Does it feel like your podcast process eats up your entire week? Many podcasters get in that situation. You feel like you finish one episode only to begin the next.
SCHEDULE & PLAN
When it comes to your podcast process, we need to develop a schedule and plan that fits into your life. When you have a well-defined process, even when life happens, there can still be time to produce the show. We just need to ensure the process doesn’t eat up your entire week.
A process will allow you to budget your time properly. There is no right or wrong answer to when it happens or how long it takes. You get to decide that. Just like a budget for money, you get to tell your time where it goes.
I was on a coaching call earlier this week, and we were talking about my client’s struggles for the week. He said his podcast isn’t growing. The downloads don’t seem to be getting bigger.
When we started talking about where he was spending his time all week, most of it was spent producing the show. I asked him how often he was on social media growing his brand and how often he was e-mailing his list. He told me he didn’t have time to do that stuff.
This is where a time budget comes in play. If you want your show to grow, make sure you are allocating time to market the podcast. The growth will be incredibly slow if you are only hoping people find you naturally or by accident.
Let’s talk about six ways your can make your podcast process more efficient.
PODCAST PROCESS
Find a show style that you love
This could be an interview, a solo show, magazine style, or something else. Be unique to stand out from other shows.
If it isn’t something you love, you will find it challenging to produce your show on a regular basis. This is where the “lack of time” tends to creep in. Find your passion.
Develop a show clock and format
A format allows you to almost plug and play. You just need to color within the lines.
I realize the structure of a format sounds like it may take away your creativity. It actually has the opposite effect. When you don’t have to worry about what the format looks like, you have the bandwidth to be creative within the structure.
A format and show clock lets your audience know what to expect from your show. We call it benchmarks in radio. These are things that happen at the same time every day.
Stray from the format when it makes sense
Just because you have a format, that doesn’t mean you are handcuffed. You can stray away from the format when it makes sense.
If you typically do a solo show, but suddenly have the opportunity to interview the biggest name in your niche, by all means take the interview.
Develop a schedule and budget your time
Just like you budget your money, you need to budget your time. If you don’t tell your money where to go, it will disappear. The same is true with your time.
If it feels like your podcast is eating your entire week, you probably aren’t budgeting your time well. How long does it take to create your outline? What time are you spending to set up the studio? How long does it take to record? When you create show notes, how long does it take?
If you do not know these times, you haven’t taken inventory of your time. You only get 168 hours a week. Make sure you are spending them efficiently by using a budget.
Break it up into parts
When you try to do everything at once, it can feel overwhelming. Create your podcast a little at a time.
Set aside a day to brainstorm show ideas and create outlines.
Use another day to just record episodes.
Find another time to do your editing and show notes.
When you break it into parts, you will find it easier to get the job done. It won’t feel so large. You won’t hear the voice in your head saying, “I don’t have enough time to get it done, so I won’t start.”
Producing is 20%. Marketing is 80%.
If you want your show to grow, you need to remember that producing the podcast is only 20% of the work. Marketing your show should take up 80% of your time.
You need to spend dedicated time marketing your show. Make people aware that it exists. Get people to download your show. Be active and be visible.
Do you need help with your podcast? You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.
Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.
Interviewing people is an art. If you do it well, you demonstrate your authority in your space while allowing your guest to become the star of the show. In this episode, I want to provide you a few podcast interview tips that will help your interviews become stronger.
As I coach podcasters with their interviews, we work to find a way to transform the interview from a question-and-answer session into a real conversation.
If you step back and think about the types of content that really attract and engage people, there are few things more powerful than a story.
Storytelling is the interactive art of using words and actions to reveal the elements and images of a story while encouraging the listener’s imagination. It brings your content to life in the theater of the mind of your audience.
CLIENT QUESTION
One client came to me looking for help with his interviews. When he would interview a guest, it was almost like an interrogation. It was question, answer, question, answer. “What niche are you in? Who built your website? How long have you been leading the organization? How do you set up your equipment?”
A line of questioning with very specific correct and incorrect answers does nothing to encourage the listener’s imagination.
However, I can engage that imagination if I tell you about a time when we were on a cruise off the coast of South America. On that vacation, my 10-year-old daughter was able to visit the Mayan ruins near Cozumel. It was a hot day unlike any heat I had ever experienced before. Any shade we could find was good shade.
We had the chance to go in these huge shelters made of stone. Our Mayan tour guide explained the Mayan calendar as we hiked the tree-lined trails that connected the various sites. He explained why everyone thought the world would end when we reached the end of the Mayan calendar and why the facts proved that wasn’t true.
Stories like that are much more engaging than “how do you hook up your equipment?”.
There are a few ways in addition to stories that can supercharge your podcast.
PODCAST INTERVIEW TIPS
1. Avoid the multiple choice and yes/no questions.
Allow your guest to expand her answer with stories.
2. Use great questions that set the guest up to tell stories.
There are ways to help your guests tell stories. When you lead with “tell me about a time when …”, “what is the craziest thing …” or “what did it feel like when you …”, you allow your guest to tell you about one specific moment in time. This is where great stories start.
You can download my 17 of the Most Powerful Interview Questions Ever for free online at PodcastTalentCoach.com/interview. This list is built in a way that will allow you to use these questions with any person you interview.
3. Start with the best question you have.
You can’t catch up to a slow start. People want great content right from the start, or they are looking for something more entertaining. Lead with the most engaging question you have. We can always go back and revisit how your guest got started and their backstory.
4. There is no need for the transition.
Just ask the next question. There is no need for a set up. Treat your interview like a cocktail party conversation. If you were having a conversation at a party, would you ever say things like, “The next question I would like to ask …” or “Let’s move into your you got started …”? No. Normal people don’t talk like that. Use questions that you would use in regular conversation.
5. Help the guest provide useful info for your listener.
You are the host of your show. You know what your listeners need and expect. Lead you guest down the path that will help them provide that information.
6. Treat the listener as if they are the 3rd person in the conversation.
As you interview your guest, pretend your listener is sitting right there with you. When you need to clarify something your guest said, say it right to that 3rd person. If I am interviewing Joe, and he makes reference to a chapter in his book, I can say, “Joe has a great book out. If you want a copy, go to my website dot com slash joes book and get the link right there.”
When I use sentences like that, it is clear that I am talking to you and not Joe. I don’t have to say, “Hey listeners, if you want to get Joe’s book …” The use of “listeners” is much less personal and connecting than if I just talk to you as if you are sitting at the table with the two of us.
7. Have 4 or 5 great questions prepared, but listen to the answers for great follow-up questions.
The quickest way to turn a great conversation into a bad question and answer session is to follow a list of prescripted questions. Know where you want to go and what you want to accomplish in the conversation before it starts. Gather a handful of great questions that will help you get there. Actually listen to the answers your guest gives you. Those answers provide great leads for your next great question.
If the line of questioning hits a dead end, look at your list, pick another question and start again. Let the conversation flow.
Bonus: Slow down and say your name with a little more pride. It is your brand. Embrace it. Be confident with your name and the name of the show.
Would you like some help with your interviews and more podcast interview tips? Take advantage of my FREE podcast strategy session. Get details at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/coaching.
Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.
Have you ever hit that wall when nothing seems to go your way? Overwhelm and frustration attack the best of us. Here are five ways to battle it.
Things slowed down for me over the summer. I had been cranking out the content. My clients had been making progress.
Suddenly, I just felt like I was in a rut.
After a spring that brought some of my best months yet, I hit that wall. My strategy calls were lighter than normal over the summer. My joy started feeling like work. The voice in my head got a little louder.
Those were some long weeks.
It had been a while since I had a call with my mastermind group. Summer had made the scheduling a little difficult.
I finally got on a call with the team. When I laid out the frustration for them, the group really helped me find my passion again.
We revisited the work I had done over the years. We talked about the success I have had. This was just a bump.
When I had the dream reignited by my mastermind team, I scheduled a call with my coach. I described the scenario for him.
By the end of the call, we had an action plan in place to get things rolling again. We figured out the next logical steps to take to help me make some progress.
I was back up and running.
By looking back over that journey, I realized there are five things you can do to battle the overwhelm and frustration.
BALANCE
Find balance in your life. When you spend all of your time on one thing, boredom and burnout will set in.
Keep your mind inspired by balancing all areas of your life. This includes money, health, relationships, faith, social, career and personal development.
Avoid burnout.
SPREAD IT OUT
When you try to do all of the work at one time or in one setting, overwhelm sets in. There are too many things to accomplish and not enough time.
Spread the work across the week. Get a little done each day to avoid drowning in the tide of tasks. Reach benchmarks. Making progress each day will help you see the light at the end of the tunnel.
VARIETY
We sometimes experience frustration when we try to do the same thing over and over expecting a different result. It is often used as the definition of insanity.
Try a different approach to maintain variety in your work. There are multiple ways to reach the same goal. Get creative. Variety is a great antidote for frustration.
BABY STEPS
When you feel overwhelmed, break the task into little parts. Find the little wins.
By accomplishing little things along the way, you’ll get inspired by the victories.
Set smaller goals that you can measure. When you reach each goal, cross it off and celebrate the win.
GET INSPIRED
Fight the frustration with some inspiration. Get around people who can inspire you. Find those who can help you remember your superpower and victories of the past.
You can do this by attending gatherings. Join a mastermind. Recruit an accountability partner. Hire a coach like I did.
Sometimes using more than one can be a bigger help. I use all four to help keep me inspired. I find when I neglect these areas, the frustration and overwhelm returns. Others who care about me help me get back on track.
Do you need help with your podcast? Take advantage of my free podcast strategy session. Find details at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com/coaching.
Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.
Do you ever find your podcast eating up your entire week? The workflow seems never ending. How do you manage your time?
Once you get one episode complete, you need to begin working on the next. After awhile, it seems like the podcast is the only thing you do.
Eventually, the podcast feels like work.
It is strange how life works sometimes. I had two things happen in the past two weeks that strangely complimented each other.
THE CALL
First, I was on a coaching call with a client. He was struggling with the production process of his podcast. Like a lot of us, he felt like the podcast was eating up way too much of his time each and every week.
I am sure you have experienced the struggle a time or two. You need to come up with a topic. The outline needs to be developed. Set up the studio and record the episode. Find time to edit it. Then you need to write the show notes and publish the show. Don’t forget to spread the word and let people know the show is out.
Managing the process can be tough. If you don’t get a handle on it, the process will eat your entire week.
THE CONFERENCE
Second, I attended a conference. During that conference, I found myself in a time management session.
As the speakers discussed company meetings and people who are time vampires, I began to realize that the tips and tricks could be applied to a podcast workflow.
With a little reshaping, I started to create a list of steps to help you manage your production process.
How interesting that both events happened the same week. When the student is ready, the teacher will appear.
Here are 5 steps to manage your podcast workflow.
STEP 1 – JOURNAL
Journal 2 weeks of podcast creation. Every time you touch the podcast, write it down.
You cannot determine where you are going until you first know where you are.
STEP 2 – GROUP TASKS
Look at the work and determine what can be grouped, like topic creation or writing outlines.
How Oscar Trimboli Landed On The List Of Best Australian Podcasts – Episode 214
How Oscar Trimboli Landed On The List Of Best Podcasts Of 2018
Oscar Trimboli is the host of the “Deep Listening Podcast“. He teaches people how to be more effective with their listening. By getting dedicated to learning more and refining his content, he now not only has an incredible business doing what he loves, he now has an award winning show on the list of best podcasts of 2018.
Oscar uses his podcast to showcase his authority and grow his business. His show has helped him land multiple speaking engagements and clients.
As he grows his influence, Oscar is on a quest to create 100 million deep listeners in the world. Yes, 100 million. When setting goals, he takes it to a whole different level.
Podcasting wasn’t always part of the mix. Oscar’s mentor told him the best platform to spread his message was to create a podcast. So, that’s what he did.
Many of us have no idea how to shape our content once our podcast has launched. Oscar would interview guests on his show. The guests would provide great content on each episode. However, there wasn’t much of Oscar. The podcast was doing very little to build his authority.
Oscar and I began working together to increase his visibility within his show.
He now says the podcast increases the sharability of his message a thousand times. People who love his podcast actively share it. He has made the show a very powerful tool for his business.
I had the chance to talk with Oscar about his success. Let’s see what we can learn from his journey.
Before we get into it, if you would like a free podcast strategy session with me to help determine your next steps toward your goals, get information online at PodcastTalentCoach.com/coaching.
Here is my chat with Oscar.
[INTERVIEW]
How can a coach help you take your podcast to the top? There are five areas where a coach can help you. A coach will help you assess your current situation and see the big picture. Your coach will help you develop your goals and plan. You will be held accountable by your coach. You will have your own personal cheerleader. Finally, your coach will provide regular feedback to help you with improvement.
THE BIG PICTURE
A coach will help you assess your current situation and see the big picture. Sometimes it helps to have another set of eyes helping you see the forrest through the trees. A great coach will help you clear away all the clutter to gain clear focus for your show.
A personal coach will help you honestly assess your strengths and weaknesses. These assessments are specific to your show. Your coach is not simply offering cookie cutter prescriptions. Once you understand your strengths and weaknessess, you can capitalize on the strengths and minimize the weakneses.
You get a different perspective on your show when you have someone else give you honest feedback. When you look at your content in a different way, you will discover new ideas and different approaches for your content. A different perspective helps you keep the end goal in mind.
A big picture view of your podcast will also help you balance your life. Your coach can make sure you don’t devote all of your time to one area of your life. Ensuring you are spending quality time on all areas of your life and business could be one of the most important benefits of a coach.
GOAL DEVELOPMENT
Your coach will help you develop your goals and a plan to achieve those goals. What do you hope to accomplish with your podcast? How does your show fit into your overall business plan? Does your podcast include a clear call to action? Your coach can help you develop each of those areas.
A dream becomes a goal when deadlines are attached. Your coach can help you set those deadlines. Your coach can then help you develop a plan reach those goals.
Setting goals help you maximize your potential. You can be your best when you set and achieve goals on a regular basis. Your coach can help keep you accountable to those goals.
ACCOUNTABILITY
Some people need a little extra push to remain focused on the task at hand. Your coach can help hold you accountable to your goals. The best part of that accountablily is the goals are your goals. It is your agenda. Your coach is simply helping you achieve the goals you have set.
With regular communication, your coach can push you to do your best. Your coach can help you keep your goals top of mind. When you don’t feel like spending that extra hour making your podcast the best it can be, your coach can give you that little, extra motivation. You can use your coach to push you as much as you would like.
Consistency is key to a successful podcast. Your coach can keep you on track. When your coach holds you accountable, you produce great content on a regular basis. Consistency produces a reliable, trusted brand. Let your coach help you achieve that quality with accountability.
CHEERLEADER
Fear and self doubt prevent many people from achieving their goals. We all have a little critic inside our head telling us we aren’t quite good enough or we do not have the authority to succeed. The impostor syndrome destroys far too many great business ideas.
When you have a coach, you will have your own personal cheerleader. Your coach will help you build self-confidence. You will have the courage to explore topics and ideas on your show that you previously avoided. Your coach will help you voice your opinion and be confident in your beliefs. You will overcome your fears and truly believe in yourself.
You will develop self-confidence when your coach helps you improve your competence.
FEEDBACK
Finally, your coach will provide regular feedback to help you with improvement. Feedback will help you improve your competence. Nobody knows everything. Collaboration helps everyone learn. New ideas, new approaches and new contacts all come from great collaboration. A great coach can help you achieve that improvement.
A great coach will share knowledge and expertise with you that will help you discover new ideas and concepts. It is difficult to improve when you don’t know what you don’t know. A coach can use years of experience to help you discover new processes and information.
You can transform your mistakes into opportunities and learn to do things better with the help of a coach. A great coach has worked with many others allowing you to benefit from the trials and errors of many others. Your coach knows what has worked for others. There is a fountain of knowledge with your coach that you can access for the benefit of your show.
Your coach will also provide specific feedback regarding your podcast. This feedback will include actionable items. You can isolate the areas of your podcast that need improvement. Your coach will help you create an improvement plan for those areas.
You cannot simply remove the negative parts of your show. You must discover the effective parts of your podcast and figure out how to create more of those opportunities. This is where a great coach can help you succeed. A great coach will help you discover the parts of your show that are strong, help you develop a plan to create those moments more often, and then find the courage to present those moments during your podcast.
COACHING WORKS
Coaching works. That is why it is everywhere in our society. Find a great podcast coach to help you reach your goals. Though I would love to help you, your coach doesn’t necessarily need to be me. You simply need to find someone with some experience that can provide a different perspective on your show.
I help podcasters refine their content and transform their information into engaging entertainment. I can help you as well.
Many podcasters let self-doubt derail their efforts. They feel like they are kids playing dress-up among other professional podcasters that have been doing it for years. Those podcasters haven’t learned how to properly structure a show, prepare the content or review the podcast. The imposter syndrome creeps in and they lose faith in their abilities.
It happened to me when I began in broadcasting almost 30 years ago. There were so many great broadcasters that came before me. Who was I to be on the radio? What did I know about broadcasting? Over two-and-a-half decades, I’ve learned the secrets of the great broadcasters to overcome that fear to create powerful relationships with my listeners.
I’ve helped many broadcasters and podcasters over the years. Many have reached the top of their game. My own personal radio show has been #1 over 80% of the time over the last 20 years.
I know what works, and it isn’t the big radio voice and cheesy lines you heard on the radio 20 years ago. This is a new era. It is a relationship era. It is time to use your podcast to create meaningful, powerful, profitable relationships with your listeners.
I can help you create those relationships using these five coaching areas. I can help you assess your current situation and see the big picture. Together, we will develop your goals and plan. You will be held accountable to your own agenda. You will have your own personal cheerleader. Finally, you will receive regular feedback to help you with improvement. Are you ready for a coach?
As we bring 2018 to a close, let’s look back over the year at the 3 Podcast Talent Coach top episodes that received the most downloads this year.
#3 – INTERVIEW QUESTIONS
The number 3 episode of 2018 was based on my list of 17 of the Most Powerful Interview Questions Ever. This episode showed you how to use these quesstions to create unique content and make your podcast stand out from the crowd.
How do you make your podcast unique when every interview asks the same questions and sounds the same? Use storytelling.
Storytelling can transform your podcast.
People do business with those they know, like and trust. Stories let people get to know you through the things you reveal in your stories. Listeners learn what you like, value and believe. Your stories help develop that likability and trust.
Stories help you connect, motivate and inspire.
They do the same for your guests. If you would like to get unique answers from your guests and create powerful podcast interviews, download my 17 Ultimate Podcast Interview questions. They are free for you at PodcastTalentCoach.com.
There are a few questions you should avoid.
“Tell me a little bit about yourself.” This questions is a time waster. It also tells the audience and your guest you didn’t do your homework. You should know your guest and provide the important background information necessary for this episode.
“Did you enjoy (blank)?” Yes/no questions receive yes/no answers. Find ways to turn yes/no questions into open-ended questions.
“Was it A or B?” Questions that require one word answers do the same as yes/no questions. There is nowhere for the guest to go with the answer.
Here are 7 of the Most Powerful Interview Questions ever from that list. Use these to generate fantastic stories.
Whether you are brand new to podcasting or have been creating podcast interviews for years, this worksheet will help you develop more powerful podcast interviews.
You will learn how to create amazing content using powerful podcast interviews.
This isn’t just theory. I have been in radio for 30 years and teaching broadcasters and podcasters for over 20 years. I have interviewed some of the biggest artists in music, including Lady Gaga, Blake Shelton, Natalie Merchant, Sarah McLachlan, Eric Church, Mariah Carey, the Samples, Big & Rich, Jason Aldean, Carrie Underwood, Dave Mustane of Megadeth, Nelly and others.
Stations I have programmed have dominated the market. My own show has been top of the ratings for years straight. Podcasters I have coached have used my training to drive their shows to new heights.
Grab the list of questions a get rolling this week.
Dave Jackson and I do a show together called The Podcast Review Show. We invite podcasters on the show to have their content reviewed. It is getting two podcast coaches for less than the price of one. We do this in order to create great content and help a ton of podcasters.
I also coach podcasters one-on-one. In 2019, my goal is to help 1,000 podcasters. This will happen through coaching, speaking and interviews.
Tony Muckleroy of the Jeep Talk Show podcastwas a guest on the Podcast Review Show with Dave and me. Then, Tony worked with me to coach him on his show. He used that coaching session as an episode of Jeep Talk Show. I also used the coaching session for episode 204. It came in at number two in 2018.
A few months back, Dave Jackson and I reviewed the Jeep Talk Showon the Podcast Review Show. Tony Muckleroy, one of the hosts of the show, reached out to me for a follow up review. Today, I want to take you behind the scenes of that coaching session to show you how things work. It is my hope there are a few things in this session that might help you improve your show.
Tony hosts the Jeep Talk Show with his two co-hosts Josh and Tammy. They started the podcast about 8 years ago.
The primary reason Tony reached out for coaching is audience growth. Their show has plateaued around 1,700 downloads a month. Tony is hoping to discover how they might increase their audience and grow the show.
During our coaching session, Tony and I discuss the points Dave Jackson and I made on the Podcast Review Show, the progress the hosts have made toward those points and where they might go from here.
Jeep Talk Show has some passionate followers. The team posted our coaching session as an episode of their podcast. It is Tony’s hope that sharing the session with his audience might get listeners to provide the show with additional feedback.
This episode features the coaching session with Tony and his show.
If you would like details on a free strategy session with me just like this one, get the details at PodcastTalentCoach.com/coaching. I’d love to help you.
I want to help 1,000 podcasters in 2019. Will you be one of them? Let’s create a strategy and plan for you in 2019. Take me up on your FREE podcast strategy session. Get the details at PodcastTalentCoach.com/coaching.
#1 – MONEY MAKING TOOLS
The episode with the most downloads covers my money making tools. This is really no surprise to me. “How to make money” is what most podcasters come to me seeking.
This episode was created to show you what tools I use to create my podcast and business. The info is still all good. However, the affiliate links are dead due to issues with Amazon. You can still find the tools. It will just take a bit of searching. I still use all of it.
(These tools can be found on the resource page atPodcastTalentCoach.com. Most links on that page are affiliate links. I may receive a variable commission for any purchase made using those links.)
How do I make money with my podcast? I get asked this quite a bit. Many podcasters want to make money to at least pay for the expense of podcasting.
I thought you could get some great help if we reviewed the tools I use with my podcasting and in my business. This includes the tools I use to create my podcast, website and newsletter. We will also review the resources I use to learn, create products and generate revenue.
This list includes affiliate links. Please understand I would never recommend anything I didn’t already use and love. I have been using most of these resources for years. That is why I feel confident recommending them to you. You can find affiliate links to and discounts for most of these in the resource section online at PodcastTalentCoach.com.
I want to give you a quick overview of my gear. Then, we will get into making money with your show.
If you have any questions about any of the tools in this episode, shoot me an e-mail. I’ll help you through it.
Before you seek to make money, you need a strategy. You need a plan. You need to build an audience. Then, you can leverage the attention.
Again, I want to help 1,000 podcasters in 2019. Let’s create a strategy and plan for you in 2019. Take me up on your FREE podcast strategy session. Get the details at PodcastTalentCoach.com/coaching.
Thanks for the great support in 2018. I’m looking forward to helping you even more in 2019 by transforming your information into entertainment. It is the beginning of turning your podcast into powerful, profitable relationships.
Catch up with these 3 episodes. These are the 3 top episodes with the most downloads of 2018.
Next week, we are digging in with one of my coaching clients to see how he landed on Apple’s list of Best Podcasts of 2018.
Your Key To Success In The Next 12 Months – Episode 206
Copyright : Przemyslaw Koch
What does success look like for you over the next 12 months? You hear so much about setting goals. How specific have you made your goals to ensure success in the next year?
Now, this episode isn’t all about setting goals. We are not going to talk about SMART goalsand the five goal-setting steps. You know your goals need to be Specific, Measurable, Attainable, Relevant and Time bound. You know you need to write them down and create an action plan. You can find that information anywhere.
What I want to talk about today is putting your goals in the right place to ensure success. What are the specific actions you can take that will get you to your goals?
If you lean the ladder against the wrong wall, it doesn’t matter how high you climb. Your goals and action plans need to be focused on the right areas. Only then can we create an effective action plan for success.
I was in a coaching session with my business coach the other day. We were talking about where I want the business to go. We were discussing my goals for the next year.
The goals I had set were centered around dollar goals for my business. I know where I want the business to be in order to be happy with the results.
My coached asked how I planned to get there. What it would take to hit the goals in terms of coaching clients and products sold?
He wanted me to break it down in terms of the number of new clients I would need to find, how many products I would need to sell and what I would need to create.
That’s when it hit me. I didn’t have those numbers.
YOUR PERFORMANCE INDICATORS
I hadn’t translated my financial goals into number of business transactions that would need to happen to find success. I couldn’t possibly begin taking steps toward my financial goals without defining those steps.
We worked together to put the money on paper in terms of business action steps and clients. We defined the Key Performance Indicators (KPIs)that help me land a new client. We determined how many free strategy sessions I need to conduct to find the ideal clients that get the most benefit from my coaching.
Ideal clients are key. Not every podcaster is the right fit for my coaching. There are specific podcasters that can truly use my coaching to really improve their podcast and business.
James and Amy Hebdon at Paid Search Magicare a perfect example of podcasters that benefit greatly from my coaching. They have a fantastic business helping their clients with paid search. They use their podcast to attract new clients and build their authority in the space.
On the other side, there are many podcasters I help with my free strategy session that are not a great fit for my coaching program. Those podcasters get a great deal of benefit from the session by defining their strategy and improving their show. Their show simply isn’t at the level where it can support coaching.
It is just fine that these podcasters aren’t ready. They will eventually be in a place where they are ready. We just work together to figure out where they are today.
YOUR COACH
That is the benefit of having a coach or accountability partner. An outside perspective can ask the questions you don’t see, because you are too close to the situation.
If you would like to see where you are, check out my free strategy session online at PodcastTalentCoach.com/coaching. You can get the details and schedule your free session right there.
You need to take time this week to not only set your goals, but truly define the areas that will really move the needle for you. Define the Key Performance Indicators that will move your podcast and business toward your goals for success.
THE NEXT STEPS
Looking back at my process, the most productive week I ever had occurred when I was specific about the very next steps I needed to take. Then I put them in writing.
That week, I accomplished more than I had in the previous 2 months. It was all because I determined what actions would make a difference, I wrote them down, and then did the very next thing on the list. Focus.
I also shared those goals with my mastermind, which helped tremendously.
Jeff is one of my clients right now. He wants to get his show on the radio. I love working with Jeff. He is incredibly creative and a great sales guy. If I had him take the DISC personality profile, he would probably be a high “i” … influence, persuading others, openness and relationships.
In working with Jeff, he sometimes suffers from shiny-object syndrome. He loves the “next” exciting thing. He is writing a book. He is creating his show. He is trying to get on the radio. He wants to create a course. He wants more public speaking opportunities.
I love multiple streams of income. We just need to build one at a time. Jeff needs to get one up and running, and THEN get to the next one.
My whole goal working with him is getting Jeff to focus on the next task that needs to be done. We then check up on progress to ensure he hits the deadlines we set. Jeff benefits most when I hold him accountable. We are close to landing a few big clients for him and getting his radio show up and running.
Do you know what your next steps need to be? Start by working backwards from your vision of success.
FIVE YEAR GOALS
Where do you want to be in five years? Define your long-term goals first.
Use the SMARTmethod to get clear. You might consider creating realistic goals along with some stretch goals.
Five years is a long time. You can get a lot done in 1,825 days.
How much do you want to be earning? What do you want your work life to look like? What does your family look like? How does your health look? Where are you in your spiritual walk?
GOALS NEXT YEAR
Next, where do you want to be next year? Be clear on the goals and lay in some stretch goals.
If you want to make $24k over the next year, $2,000 a month could be realistic. Maybe $8,000 a month is possible if a few key things happen. That would take you to $100k next year. That would be a nice stretch goal.
Just like the saying says, “Shoot for the moon. Even if you miss, you’ll land among the stars.” It has been credited to Norman Vincent Peale. I’ve heard the great Les Brown say it. Regardless of where it originated, there is truth in it.
Shoot for your stretch goal. You may just outperform your realistic number.
QUARTERLY GOALS
Now, let’s break the yearly goal into four parts. What do you need to accomplish in each quarter of the next 12 months to get you to your yearly goal?
You eat an elephant one bite at a time. Break your yearly goal into quarterly milestones. Be clear and specific. “Get more clients” is not a goal. How many do you need? If you need 24 clients over the year, can you land 6 per quarter?
As you break your goal into smaller steps, you will see if your goals are feasible with the tools and time you currently have. You may find that you need to add help or give up something in order to make the goals happen.
WEEKLY GOALS
Next, we take the quarterly goals and break those into week-by-week goals. You have 13 weeks in the quarter. What needs to happen every week to make the goals a reality?
THIS WEEK
Now that you have your weekly goals, what are the things that need to be completed this week? Create the task list.
TODAY
Take a look at this week. What are your objectives today?
REVIEW
Review each step of the way. Are your goals realistic? Can you really put in that much time everyday, every week and every month to make your goals happen?
Build in a little time to catch up. You do not want falling behind to be an excuse to give up. Give yourself a “catch up” day every now and then.
CONSISTENT ACTION
Finally, stick with it. The only way you will achieve success and realize your goals is with consistent action. Take steps forward every day. Little by little, you will eat that elephant.
To help you take those steps, find an accountability partner. Maybe join a mastermind. Hire a coach. Enlist a partner. Whatever it takes to keep you moving forward toward your goals.
Setting goals and writing them down won’t be enough. Focused action on the next step is the key to making your goals a reality. Stay accountable to action.
Behind The Scenes Of A Podcast Coaching Session – Episode 204
Behind the Scenes of a Coaching Session
A few months back, Dave Jackson and I reviewed the Jeep Talk Showon the Podcast Review Show. Tony Muckleroy, one of the hosts of the show, reached out to me for a follow up review. Today, I want to take you behind the scenes of that coaching session to show you how things work. It is my hope there are a few things in this session that might help you improve your show.
Tony hosts the Jeep Talk Show with his two co-hosts Josh and Tammy. They started the podcast about 8 years ago.
The primary reason Tony reached out for coaching is audience growth. Their show has plateaued around 1,700 downloads a month. Tony is hoping to discover how they might increase their audience and grow the show.
During our coaching session, Tony and I discuss the points Dave Jackson and I made on the Podcast Review Show, the progress the hosts have made toward those points and where they might go from here.
Jeep Talk Show has some passionate followers. The team posted our coaching session as an episode of their podcast. It is Tony’s hope that sharing the session with his audience might get listeners to provide the show with additional feedback.
This episode features the coaching session with Tony and his show.
If you would like details on a free strategy session with me just like this one, get the details at PodcastTalentCoach.com/coaching. I’d love to help you.
Do you need help with your podcast? E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s see what we can do.
I recently asked my tribe about the one thing they struggle with most with their podcast. This week, we answer the questions and help you get over a few hurdles.
On this episode, we answer questions about dealing with lost audio, boosting your stats and dealing with stiff and difficult guests.
I do a show called The Cinema Guys (WeAreTheCinemaGuys.com) and I do all of the show. My co-hosts show up record and leave. I do all the tech, recording, editing, posting and so on. Well tonight we recorded and I didn’t realize until we were done that I had the recorder set wrong and it only recorded one of the 3 mics and to top that off I forgot to set up the back up recorder. So long answer to your question I think the biggest struggle sometimes is the technical side mostly the set up and hoping everything works.
Love your show. Yours and Dave Jackson’s are my top weekly listens.
Two things can help you prevent losing a show like this. The backup recorder is a great idea. However, it only works if you remember to hit record.
First, create a preflight checklist. What are the things you need to do before you record? This probably includes show notes, audio levels, water to drink, mute your phone and a few other things.
Create this list and use it EVERY time you record your show. This is the only way you will remember everything necessary.
Bad things happen when you fail to prepare.
Next, test your gear and levels. Make sure the gain isn’t up too high creating distortion. Garbage in equals garbage out. If the levels aren’t right to start, there is nothing you can do to save it.
Make sure every sound source is feeding the recording. This includes mics, sound effects, calls, software and any other sound source you will use.
If you use these two steps before every show, you will be much more likely to avoid losing a show.
SOCIAL MEDIA
I struggle most with learning how to effectively use social media to grow audience.
My listener stats have plateaued. I have only been at it for about 6 months and we have grown to listener ship of between 150 and 200 downloads per show. The listeners we do have are loyal and engaged. Similar and more established podcasts are getting 20 and 30 times that download number though. Maybe its my content or maybe we are not marketing correctly or enough to grow our listeners.
Andrew Gonzales
EKJ: Social media is a great way to promote the show. However, it isn’t the only method you should be using.
When using social media, get involved with others. Offer help in communities similar to your community. Join Facebook groups and communicate.
Share, repost and retweet other content. Be seen on social platforms. You don’t need to create all of the content. Be a resource.
Make sure your social media profile includes your podcast prominently. Make it easy to find you.
The more people see you, the better the chances are that they will come check out the show.
Find other ways to promote the show. Check out episode 188 “Leverage Your Audience To Grow”. Asking your audience to share your show and help you grow is very powerful. If they love you, they will tell others. Don’t wait for them to think of it. Ask them to share it.
Create a lead magnet for every episode that also contains the podcast information. Then, encourage listeners to share it with their friends.
Growing your audience is an ongoing mission. Drip, drip, drip. Eventually, you’ll have a nice, little puddle. Over time, it will grow. I don’t think you will ever get to a point where you think, “Ok, I have enough listeners.” Make this part of your regular daily routine.
STRUGGLE WITH STIFF GUESTS
Some of my guests become stiff or experience stage fright during the first 10 min of the cast, also how do you keep more Domineering guests from taking over the discussion?
Thanks Ken Morris
EKJ: If your guest is inexperienced, it is critical that you define the expectations right up front. People are usually nervous, because of the unknown. They aren’t sure. They don’t know what to expect.
Lay things out for your guest right up front. Do what you can to put them at ease.
If you want answers that are around 30 seconds long, let them know. If you need answers that are full sentences, let them know. If you want short stories, tell them before the recording begins.
It is important to let them know you will do your best to make them sound great. Tell them you will edit out any answers they don’t like. If they want to start an answer a second time, you will be happy to edit that as well. This will usually help them relax.
Stiff guests are usually solved with creative questions. Ask open-ended questions that get your guest to tell you stories. “Tell me about a time when you ____.” “What did it feel like the first time you ___.” “When did you realize you were ____.” “Tell me about the person who gave you the best piece of advice you ever received.” This will help your guest give you more than one or two word answers.
With domineering guests, you need to be very clear with your guest right up front that you want this to be a conversation without their agenda. It helps when you can assure the guest you will give them plenty of time to plug their stuff.
You can also ask if there are particular points they would like to cover. Assure them you will offer questions that allow them to cover those points.
Let your guest know that when the interview is over, you will ask them if there is anything you didn’t cover. This will allow them to touch on points that may have been left out. You can then edit that question into the show. This rarely happens. However, it does help your guest get comfortable and drop the script.
Finally, tell your guest you will edit the show. It is perfectly acceptable if they feel the need to stop and begin an answer again. You can edit that out to make them sound great.
You guests will sometimes follow a script, because they are nervous and inexperienced giving interviews. Set their mind at ease by letting them know you will make them sound great.
In the end, it is your show. There will be times when you need to stop the interview and be demanding. If you find your guest is following a script and doing nothing but pitching, stop the interview and explain your goals for the show.
Use something like this. “Rick, I can appreciate you have a new book and would really like to plug it. Believe me, we will get to that. If we make this conversation nothing but a prolonged infomercial, people will tune out. They will take no action, and it will be ineffective. Please allow this to become a conversation. After we engage our audience with a great discussion and get them to trust your authority, we can get to the book with a strong call-to-action. However, we need to make it a conversation first. Do me a favor and set the talking points aside. Let it flow. Trust me. You’ll sound great.”
If you need to stop a second time and get more demanding, use something like, “Rick, I’m losing confidence that this interview will be something I can use for the show. My listeners will benefit more by natural answers from the heart. I need to ask you to set aside the talking points and simply have a discussion. Otherwise, we need to cut this interview short. Can you help me there?”
If that doesn’t work, move on to the next interview.
Do you struggle with your podcast? I can answer your question on a future show. E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s see what we can do.
I recently asked my tribe about their podcast struggles and the one thing they are struggling with most. This week, we are going to answer the questions about editing time, the structure of your show and how to get the perfect sound. This will help you get over a few hurdles and conquer your struggles.
EDITING STRUGGLES
I struggle with the production details. Would love to job it out.
Thanks Erik. Enjoying your podcasts. Heard about you via Dave Jackson. Keep up the good work. For me, it’s a tie between editing my podcasts, nailing down interview appointments, and over-the-internet issues during interviews.
Create a shell for your podcast. This is a session in your software that includes your show open, show close and any other recorded elements you use to produce the show each week. This will save you time searching for and inserting the parts.
Make editing easy. If you or your guest messes up, and you know you will need to take it out, pause for ten seconds. I learned this trick from Dave Jackson at the School of Podcasting. When you go back to edit, the long silence will be easy to locate making it easy to remove.
Finally, don’t be so worried about removing every “um” and “uh”. A few of those help you sound natural. Simply work over time to remove them completely from your speech pattern. This will take time. Be aware of it. If you aren’t afraid of the silence, your “ums” will eventually go away.
If all else fails, find someone like Steve Stewart to do your show editing for you. Eliminate one of your memberships to pay for it.
STRUCTURE STRUGGLES
We did our first recording the other day and there were a few issues we are having to work out. Sound quality isn’t bad. Small issue with mic technique but the one thing that I can tell we are struggling with is the content. Having a single topic? Three segments? Just the interview? If we just do the interview the user just doesn’t get to know us. We can talk but containing it to say 15 minutes or less seems to be a challenge. Keeping it focused is the thing that seems to be something we are working on. We are going to be doing interviews and two other segments. No such thing as too long, just too boring right? Just want to make sure we do the latter. Thanks.
Jeremy Cox
Humble Pig Studios
@40 Podcast
EKJ: Which part do you enjoy most? Your show should be content that sparks your passion.
If you love interviewing people, interviews should be the biggest part of your show. It will be the best content you deliver, because you are passionate about it. You will continue to push yourself to be better.
With regard to the number of segments and the length of the show, let’s go back to your ideal listener. If you have completed the Target Listener Worksheet from PodcastTalentCoach.com, you have your ideal listener well-defined.
If we know how and why your listener is consuming your content, and what that individual likes most, we can begin to learn how to shape our content. As you mentioned, never too long – only too boring.
The structure of your show may ebb and flow at the beginning. As you get feedback from your audience and watch your download numbers, you will start to learn what they like and dislike.
The day you don’t do the “random thoughts” segment and your e-mail inbox fills with feedback, you’ll know whether or not to add it back in. When an episode gets twice as many downloads as your typical show, you know you may have hit on a hot topic or guest.
The podcast doesn’t need to be perfect right from the start. Launch and adjust as time goes on.
PERFECT SOUND STRUGGLES
I struggle with getting the recording space right to sound professional (I reluctantly ended up having to move into my bedroom as it was the only room in my house with a low ceiling) I had to put rugs on the floor and mattresses up against all the walls. Even still it is hot in my little room – I live in Queensland Australia and I am uncomfortable.
Annie Holden
Getting the levels exactly matched. Even though I know my way around VU meters and send the whole show through a cloud-based leveling service, sometimes my guest, appearing by phone, is not at the same level as me.
I struggle with getting started due to recording equipment.
Kyle Congleton
EKJ: Don’t let the equipment be the excuse for not launching. If you can use Microsoft Word and post to Facebook, chances are you can launch a podcast.
YouTube can be a great source for learning the equipment. Start simple. A USB mic like the Audiotechnica ATR-2100 connected straight into your computer will get you up and running.
Get a crash course on your recording software, like Audacity or Hindenburg.
Then, launch.
The audio doesn’t need to sound perfect. My buddy Kraig Mathias did a show from the park. He would go walking and record the show. It was about online business and money.
The content was great. Who cares that there are birds in the background?
Have you ever listened to the Marketing Secrets podcast with Russell Brunson? It was formerly called Marketing In Your Car, because he would just hit record before he started driving and record the whole podcast on the way to the office.
People will listen to great content with average audio. Great audio will never save poor content.
Here are a few tips. To minimize the background noise, make sure you are using a cardioid or directional microphone. This will do a great job picking up the audio source right in front of the mic without allowing much ambient noise to get through. Omnidirectional mics pick up sound from all directions.
You can also minimize background noise by being closer to the mic, even touching it. This will allow you to turn down your gain.
The entire room doesn’t necessarily need to be muffled by soundproofing. If you build some soundproofing right behind and close to your mic, the sound waves from you voice will be greatly absorbed without bouncing around the room.
To balance you and your guest, you can use some software like Skype Call Recorder that will allow you to record each person on a separate track. This setting is also available in some other conference software.
You can accomplish separate tracks by using multiple tracks through a sound board as well. This takes a little more set up and mix minus. This is higher level than beginners need to tackle.
Remember, most people are not listening to your podcast in ideal conditions. They are not in a perfectly quiet room wearing enclosed headphones. They are typically at the gym or in the car or mowing the lawn. Ideal sound quality isn’t critical in most situations.
Spend more time worrying about your content and having fun.
Do you need help with your podcast to conquer your struggles? E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s see what we can do.
I recently asked my tribe about the one thing they are struggling with most. This week, we are going to answer the questions and help you get over a few hurdles.
EKJ: I was discussing this with a coaching client the other day. Use enough notes to help you remember the important points. Don’t use so many notes that you are reading them.
Avoid striving for perfection. Get 80% of the way there and call it good. It will never be perfect. Nobody is expecting you to be perfect. Get it close and move on.
SHOW NOTES
The most headache has to be writing out detailed show notes.
By the way, THANK YOU for the podcasts, the episode on Imposter Syndrome was VERY helpful!
The show is finally done (I do a lot of research and planning before recording, and a good amount of time in post production). Ugh … now I have to do show notes, and promote it too? My least favorite part. I’m attempting to spread the work over several days, as you suggested recently on your show.
Thanks for the great talk on the phone recently and for your great podcast.
EKJ: Great chat, Brian. I hope the bartender podcast and business ideas we discussed take off for you.
Producing the podcast is 20% of the work. Promoting the show is the other 80%.
If a tree falls in the forrest and no one is there to hear it, does it make a sound?
If a podcast is released and no one is there to hear it, is it really released?
You eat an elephant one bite at a time. So, yes. As we discussed in episode 166 “My Podcast Workflow”, break your big task into little parts and spread it out.
If you can afford it, hire someone to do your show notes. There are great virtual assistants and show note specialists that can help you.
How many people are actually coming to your website for show notes? You might consider simply posting the highlights of the show in a paragraph or two along with the links and resources you mention. After that, call it good. Give your listeners what they need without the overkill.
Find ways to promote the show that you enjoy. Are you on Facebook? Promote it there. Find some taste makers who enjoy the show and get them to help spread the word.
What’s giving me the most headache is relaunching my podcast after a long time not producing because life took a turn. My gear has been in storage after some life changing events and I’m starting from scratch.
EKJ: Both of these struggles have to do with passion. I know if doesn’t seem like it on the surface. But, look at the two hurdles.
“The most headache is relaunching my podcast.”
“Knowing which content to put out.”
If you are truly following your passion, starting your podcast, continuing your podcast and coming up with topics should be no problem at all.
If you don’t have a passion about podcasting in general, you need to find another vehicle for your content. Do you enjoy writing more? How about video? Do you enjoy short, live video clips on Facebook?
There are many ways to get your content to your fans. If you don’t enjoy the process of creating a podcast, it will be very difficult to find the motivation to get on the mic every week.
On the other hand, if it is the topic that lacks passion, find a new topic. Again, if you are not extremely passionate about your topic, it will be very difficult to find the motivation to get on the mic every week.
Stop searching for topic that you think your audience will enjoy and chase the topics you love. When you are interested, you become interesting. It will be much more enjoyable to listen to your podcast if we can hear your passion come through the speakers. That only happens when you are talking about your passion.
Do you need help with your podcast? E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s see what we can do.
We often talk abut coaching and receiving feedback about your show from somebody other than your mother. Today, I want to share with you that process and help you learn podcasting from the pros.
Dave has 20+ years of experience teaching people technical things. He has also been podcasting since 2005.
I have been coaching radio hosts since 1995 and podcasters for the past 4 years.
Podcasters pay us to review their show so they can improve. We cover all aspects of the show including content, show structure, style, website and business process.
Once Dave and I have listened to the show and reviewed the website, the podcaster appears on an episode with us to discuss the review and promote the show. This is a great opportunity to expose the show to a new audience while getting feedback from two experienced podcast coaches.
This week, I want you to get an inside look at a coaching session. This episode will show you the benefit of one-on-one coaching and how those sessions work.
We would love to review your show and help you learn podcasting. If you would like to be in Harry’s seat and have your show reviewed, check out PodcastReviewShow.com.
Enjoy the episode with Harry.
Do you need help with your podcast? E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s see what we can do.
Do You Know Where You Are Going [Setting Goals] – Episode 174
Setting goals in 7 areas of your life
Do you know where you are going? Have you set goals?
Without a road map, you will never get anywhere.
LACK OF GOALS
We just lost a guy from our mastermind, because his goals were not clear. He let that get in his way.
The mastermind started back in February. We had intended to take it to three months and then evaluate the progress. We made it to six.
When the group began, we all described where we were in our business journey and where we wanted to go. We talked about our hopes and dreams. We started holding each other accountable each week to make progress on our dreams.
Each week, we would talk about our progress and accomplishments. We would help one member with their struggles. At the end, we would establish the steps we planned to take in the upcoming week to make further progress.
That is how you achieve your goals. You define your dreams. You put a deadline on those dreams. Then, you take baby steps each week toward those goals.
It sounds like an easy process. It is simple, but far from easy.
When we began, our guy talked about his dreams just like the rest of us. He had great goals of launching a business creating masterminds. He had been in quite a few over the last six years and was great at running them.
Our guy joined the group to have someone hold him accountable. He is a self-described “shiny object person”. Masterminds would be his side hustle, because he has a full-time job.
By the second meeting, we had helped our guy flush out his desires, strengths and path. He pivoted a little from group masterminds to a personal accountability coach.
On the third call, he reported he had launched a coaching website, but also had a few people interested in a paid mastermind. I thought, “At least he is making progress toward revenue.”
The next week he reported that he made no progress. He was working on a video for his coaching and still trying to launch the in-person mastermind.
By June, our guy had a few free mastermind meetings with friends, but was struggling to convert it to revenue. He was looking to pivot. He just wasn’t sure he was headed down the right path.
When July rolled around, he was exploring new aspects for his business and possibly a new niche. This is when he decided to start a blog for his content. The very next week he was interviewing people for a podcast he was planning to launch.
As we neared the end of July, our guy was back talking about the mastermind niche and how he could create a live workshop to help businesses launch a mastermind.
His distractions finally got the best of him. As we rolled into August, our guy decided he needed to get out of the group. After six months, he really spent most of the time battling the impostor syndrome. He let it prevent him from taking meaningful steps toward his goal.
LITTLE, CONSISTENT STEPS
If you want to reach your goals, you need to find ways to take little steps each week. Determine the next logical step in your journey and take it. Don’t worry about six months down the road. Worry about today.
What can you do today to simply make progress?
This is one of the benefits of having a coach. If you find the right person to coach you, they can hold you accountable to your progress. Then can give you a little push when you need it. Maybe help you create deadlines.
I do this quite often with my coaching clients. Sure, I help my clients shape their contents to be more engaging. They learn to be better interviewers. We work together to create a workflow that is more efficient.
But most importantly, I help podcasters stay accountable. Each week, we set little baby goals for the week that build on each other to reach the big goal.
Could you use a coach to help you stay accountable to your goals? Do you need that little nudge every once in awhile? I can do that for you. Check out the coaching tab online at PodcastTalentCoach.com.
The first session is free. We use that to set some goals and get to know each other. We see if we work well together. If we are both comfortable with it, we go from there.
I would love to help you reach your goals.
GOALS IN 7 AREAS AND 5 YEARS
So, let’s talk about goal setting. What can you do this week.
Grab a sheet of paper. Spend 5 minutes writing down your dreams. What do you hope to accomplish over the next five years. Big goals. Big things won’t happen unless you dream big.
Over the next five years, what does your podcast look like? What does your life look like?
Break these big dreams into seven areas of your life. Your long-term goals should include career, money, self-improvement, family, social, spiritual, and health.
Define your career. How are you employed? How many hours a week do you work? What does your work life look like five years from now?
With regard to money, how much do you have? How much are you earning per year in five years? What are you doing with your money?
As you begin to describe your self-improvement five years from now, consider things like your education, knowledge and the overall person you have become. What do you need to be a better person five years from today?
Family is a piece many people forget when they are goal setting. Money and career are easy. What about your family? What does your family look like in five years? How much time are you spending with them? What are you doing with that time?
Your social goals should include your friends and acquaintences. It is often said that you will become the average of the five people you spend the most time with. Who are those people five years from now? Be intentional with your friendships. Set specific goals in this area.
How is your spiritual life? How would you like that to look in five years? If you feel it could be stronger, let’s set some goals to make that happen.
Your health doesn’t improve because you hope it will. Goals will help you become healthier if you make it a priority. Set big goals in health that you can work toward five years from today.
GOALS FOR THIS YEAR
Now that you have big goals set, let’s figure out what you can do in the next year to work toward those goals. Sure, you have five years to accomplish them. That means we need to make progress each year over the next five to get there.
Big goals won’t happen overnight. It takes consistent effort. Break your five-year goals into smaller steps that you can accomplish over the years.
How far along will you be toward each goal twelve months from now?
MONTHLY GOALS
After you have determined your one-year goals, break those into twelve steps. This will be one step for each month. What do you need to accomplish each month in order to hit your annual goal?
Be realistic with your progress. This will be a snowball. It will get much bigger each time it rolls over. Very similar to compound interest. It doesn’t grow in a straight line. The line curves upward. Your progress will do the same.
Think of revenue for a business. Revenue doesn’t typically grow in a straight line, like 100 this year, 200 in year 2, 300 in year 3, and 400 in year 4. Revenue growth is typically 100 in year 1, 150 in year 2, 300 in year 3, 550 in year 4. The amount of growth increases each year. You build momentum.
WEEKLY GOALS
Now that you have monthly goals, break those into weekly goals. These are your baby steps. Little steps each week will help you reach your monthly goals.
Stack your monthly goals on top of each other and before you know it, you’ll reach your yearly goals. Your five-year goals are reach by taking little steps each week. Eat that elephant one bit at a time.
MAKE UP WEEK
I would suggest you build in a “make up” week every six to eight weeks. These are the weeks that will help you catch up. When you miss the goal, because it was a bit out of reach, these make up weeks will help you get on track.
It would be very easy to give up after you miss a couple weeks of goals. A make up week could be very beneficial to keeping you energized.
Keep your success front and center. You may not hit the goal exactly, but you will still be making progress. If your goal was 200 and you only hit 175, you are still better off than where you started. Keep your eye on the prize.
ACCOUNTABILITY
Would you like me to help you structure your goals and hold you accountable? Let’s talk about my coaching. I’d love to give you a hand.
I work with my clients on a weekly basis. We do a 30 to 45 minute call each week to review your goals, intentions and progress. I also listen to an episode before each call to help you improve. We discuss any struggles you are facing and how you can overcome those issues.
After our call, I send you a written recap of the podcast review and our call. That allows you to listen and ask questions rather than taking notes the entire time. I want the call to be packed full of information for you. I’m also available to you via e-mail anytime you would like.
Podcast Movement 2017 is in the books. It was a fantastic week in Anaheim. Can I share with you my top seven takeaways from the conference to improve your podcast?
Podcast Movement is an opportunity for nearly 2,000 people in the podcasting world to gather and share ideas. I had the opportunity to make some great connections that should really help me to move my business forward.
At the opening session, I was able to have a chat with and get to know a $400 million woman. She was amazing. Her name is Sandy Kurtzig. Find her autobiography here: [CEO: Building a $400 Million Company From The Ground Up]
I met so many others, plus experienced the great sessions. In those sessions, I learned a few nuggets, was reminded of some great concepts and heard a few common themes.
Here are my top seven takeaways from Podcast Movement 2017.
Pat Flynn did everything himself for the first 5 years. Then he added the “Ask Pat” podcast and began to farm it out. Now, Pat records 10 episodes of “Ask Pat” every 2 weeks. It takes about 1.5 hours to record.
John Lee Dumas did it all himself at first as well. He now records 2 days/month. John uses a recording checklist for each session to review for Skype settings, etc.
Find a scheduling software that works for you, like Calendly. Don’t start with batching – work up to it
2. Leverage Your Facebook Group
Use the power of video. Let your audience put a face with the brand. A Facebook group is a powerful marketing tool.
3. Start Strong
The biggest drop off is in the first 5 minutes – you can’t catch up to a bad opening. First minute of the episode is critical. Don’t let listeners fall off. Tell them what you do at the beginning of the episode. This means every episode and every show. Who are you, and why are you there? Why should they listen to you? Make the opening provocative.
4. Artwork and Titles Matter
Use them to catch the attention of your listeners.
5. People Have Their Favorite Podcasts
People use the terms “listen to” and “commit to” a podcast differently. 75% of podcast listeners listen to 2-6 podcasts per week. 56% subscribe to 2-6 per week. Phone space is an issue for podcast listeners.
6. Friends Are Critical
How do they find new podcasts?
Social 60%
Friends 57%
Podcast apps 49%
Other podcasts mention 45%
7. Nurture Community
Nurture not only your listener community, but your peer community as well. Surround yourself with other winners who do what you do. It is critical to your success.
Do you want to create better podcast stories? Start with the end in mind. Then, start with the end.
Start with the end? It sounds crazy, I know. Let me explain.
Stories do great things for your podcast and business.
When you tell stories, your audience gets to know details about you and your life. That’s how friendships are born. Your listeners discover you have things in common. They realize you have been through similar struggles. Maybe you’re from the same area or visited a common destination.
After multiple stories, listeners begin to feel like they know you. That is when the magic happens.
Stories help you build trust. And as it is with all business, people do business with those they know, like and trust. People don’t do business with companies. They do business with people. Trust is the essence of relationships and business.
CHARACTER
Better podcast stories define your character.
I’m not simply talking about your integrity. By character, I mean all of the attributes that create you, as in character in a play.
The purpose of your show is to attract an audience. Whether you want to monetize that relationship, encourage a call-to-action, or simply create an following for your ideas, creating the audience is where you begin.
The stories you choose to tell reveal how open you are to others. Your openness is a sign of trust. Trust is a big piece of a relationship. Reveal things about yourself through your stories, and you’ll begin to build trust with your listener.
The details you include tell your listener what you value. If the listener feels you value things they too value, you solidify the relationship. People like to hang out with similar people. If your values are opposite of your listener, you may also attract them. It is like a love/hate relationship. They may dislike it, but they continue to listen. This often happens when talking politics.
What you find entertaining will be evident by the stories you tell. Since people like other people who have similar tastes, revealing those things you find entertaining will also build the relationship.
Stories also have the power to demonstrate your vulnerability. Stories can show that you are a real person. Your listener will see you as approachable. They also may begin to see you as a friend. That is when true relationships begin to form.
Next time you watch a late night talk show, notice how the great, memorable interviews contain great stories. Interviews that focus on facts and information rarely cut through. Those guests come off more as a lecturer than as a friend. The guests that tell stories appear more personal, warm and friendly. Their stories reveal things and help you feel like you know them personally. Take note next time you watch.
Foster a relationship with your listener by revealing things about yourself through stories. Stories will define your character.
MY STORIES WERE HORRIBLE
In the past, my stories were horrible. I struggled to hold the attention of people while I was telling a story. I couldn’t figure out why they would fade half way through the tale.
One day, in a coaching session with my radio coach, it hit me. The person listening had no idea where I was going.
The stories I was telling sounded like ramblings with no real purpose or destination.
My coach basically told me to open with the punchline. I thought he was crazy. If people knew the punchline, why listen to the story. That made no sense.
He explained that opening with the point of the story was similar to telling your passenger where you are going on your journey. Nobody wants to sit next to you in a car wondering where they are going to end up and when they are going to get there. They want to enjoy the journey.
I began opening my tales with the point of the story. Right up front, I revealed the whole purpose of the story to create better podcast stories. My opening began serving as a bit of a headline.
“I can’t figure out why people can’t signal their turn before they are actually in the turn lane.”
“My dog got sick and had my up 4 times last night.”
“If you want more traffic, you need to be more traffic for others first.”
Opening with an intriguing introduction will also provide a framework for the story. You will know exactly where you are going and what details are necessary to get there. This helps shorten your story while including only the important parts.
In addition to the intriguing introduction, there are three other elements to better podcast stories. After you open with the intriguing introduction, provide wonderful, vivid details while telling the story. Close with a powerful conclusion. Ask yourself, “What’s next?”
THEATER OF THE MIND
Create theater of the mind by using vivid details.
The use of active language will stir the imagination of your listener and help you connect to your audience. Put the listener in the moment. Make the listener see the action you are describing.
“I’m walking in the bustling restaurant and shaking off the cold without even watching where I’m walking.” That is active language. In your mind, you can see me walking in.
Sure, your restaurant may be different from my restaurant. That difference is what makes theater of the mind great. You see it the way you think it fits best for you. Your scene doesn’t need to match my scene in order for the story to make sense. It is your theater.
Active language connects each listener to the story in his or her own way. It will create strong audience engagement. Active language during storytelling is a powerful tool you can use while you’re building your podcast.
Create a great podcast brand. To create better podcast stories, create theater of the mind.
THE FIRST EXIT
Take the first exit.
When you are discussing a topic, take the first opportunity to get out of the bit or interview question. You will keep your audience engaged. You will maintain the momentum of the show. You will also avoid repeating yourself and becoming boring. Take the first exit.
There are clues in your show that let you know you’ve missed the opportunity to end the bit. When you find yourself saying things like “as I said”, “like I was saying”, or “as we’ve discussed”, you have missed your exit. Those phrases are simply additional ways to say, “let me repeat this again”. Once you have reached that point, you are stating your introduction point again. This should be your conclusion. Move on to the next discussion.
If you miss the exit, you begin retracing your steps. You begin offering information you’ve already provided. You listener then begins thinking of other things, because they have heard this part before. I got it. Let’s move on.
Only you will know when you’ve offered enough information to make your point. Once you hit that point, keep the show moving. Get to the next topic. Keep your audience engaged. Take the first exit.
To create better podcast stories, conclude your story by simply reframing your intriguing introduction.
ASK “WHAT’S NEXT?”
Include a call to action.
If you want to make money with your podcast, you must include a call to action. It seems logical. However, many podcasters believe, “If I build it, they will come.” It simply doesn’t happen that way.
Odd as it may sound, your podcast probably isn’t your product. Unless you are charging for your podcast, your show is only the marketing vehicle for some other product. Most podcasts are free. The show itself isn’t generating revenue. You need to create another product you can sell.
In his book “Free: The Future of a Radical Price”, Chris Anderson lists many ways to create revenue using the power of free. Many of these can be used to generate revenue from your podcast.
Some think access to the audience can be sold to advertisers as if it were traditional broadcasting. Unfortunately, audiences are not typically large enough for this model. Listeners also do not expect the traditional twelve minutes of commercials within their favorite podcast hour. Advertising is a very difficult path to revenue.
To generate revenue with your podcast, you need to create something else to sell.
You could make money by making your podcast a small portion of a larger show, which is available to paid members only. The free podcast becomes marketing for the member content.
You could turn your knowledge of some “how to” subject into a book, e-book, study course or other product. Your podcast could be the “why” behind your philosophy. The show would then promote the “how” that your listener will learn when they purchase the product.
There are many other ideas described in Anderson’s book. You could give away the product while charging for the service, such as consulting or coaching. Give away the content while making money referring people to retailers.
Rather than traditional advertising, you could give away the content while charging advertisers to be featured in it, similar to The Home Shopping Network. You could even take a cut of sales. You could podcast generic advice while selling specific, customized advice.
There are fifty ideas in the book. To make money with your podcast, I suggest you give the book (or at least that section) a read.
If you build it, they may come. However, that doesn’t necessarily mean you will become instantly wealthy. You need to create something to sell. You need to tell your listener to buy. Then, you need to show them the way. If you desire to make money with your podcast, make sure your podcast includes the call to action.
Build trust with your audience by telling better podcast stories. Start at the end. Create great theater of the mind. Use a powerful conclusion. Then, give them something to do when it is over. Implement a strong call-to-action.
Do you need help with your podcast? E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s see what we can do.
Where do you start? How do you convince yourself that you have what it takes? How do you develop your confidence to launch?
There is a great quote from famous basketball coach Bobby Knight that says, “The will to win is not nearly as important as the will to prepare to win.Everyone wants to win but not everyone wants to prepare to win.”
Many podcasters want to win. Then the little voice in their head holds them back. Is that you? Do you have the desire to get your message out to the world, but lack the confidence to actually follow through with it?
That impostor syndrome creeps in quite often. I think it is human nature.
I recently sent a quick, 5-question survey to my tribe. The survey is designed to ensure I am delivering the content every week that you can use for your show. The survey helps ensure I am delivering and serving you each week.
If you would like to take 3 minutes to complete the survey, you can find it here.:
Three of the five questions are yes/no questions. It is truly a 3-minute survey. And, it is completely anonymous.
I HAVE NO VALUE
The first question on the survey is, “With regard to your podcast, what are you struggling with most?”
The answers to that question spanned the podcasting spectrum from traffic to monetization to workflow and everything in between.
One of the answer really struck me. The respondent said, “Confidence – do I REALLY have anything valuable to share?”
Wow, what an answer. There is obviously some passion there. Otherwise, they wouldn’t have the desire to launch a podcast in the first place.
I want you to remember this. You can learn technique. You can’t learn passion.
If you have the passion, you can learn how to produce and promote a podcast to gain an audience. If you have a passion for something, there is a great chance others have the same passion.
Dave Jackson just interviewed a podcaster on the School of Podcasting who has a podcast designed to put you to sleep. The guy intentionally rambles so you can fall asleep to his show. It is reported that he gets about 2.3 MILLION downloads per month.
If he can produce a podcast designed to put you sleep, you can surely share your passion. I can teach you the nuts and bolts. It is up to you to bring the passion.
A COACH CAN HELP
On PodcastTalentCoach.com, I offer coaching services. To ensure you and I are a fit to work together, I offer a free strategy and planning review first. This helps us determine that you see the benefit of my coaching and I know you are willing to learn. We put a plan in place and then decide if we want to move forward.
The final question on the survey is, “If you have yet to take advantage of the free, no obligation review of your show with Podcast Talent Coach, what is holding you back from the opportunity?”
To that question, somebody replied, “The show is hopeless – I don’t want to spend money because I really have n0 talent.”
There is another example of the impostor syndrome creeping in. The talent to produce a podcast can usually be taught. You don’t need a big voice and huge sense of humor. You simply need the passion to share your love of your niche.
PODCAST ABOUT YOUR PASSION
I know that sounds like logical, common sense. I know you probably think only a crazy person would ever put the time and effort into a podcast on a topic about which they do not care. It’s not as crazy as it sounds.
Podcasters and broadcasters alike will often discuss topics they think interests their audience. These may be topics in which the podcaster may have a slight interest, but not a passion. They tell themselves, “I must discuss this. It is what the audience expects.”
It creates a problem when you are only generally interested in a topic and you’re only discussing it because you think the audience will be interested. As you discuss, you will sound generally interested. It is tough to fake interest for any length of time. Your listeners will notice. When you aren’t interested, they aren’t interested.
Find that topic that stirs your passion. When you are passionate, your audience will hear your enthusiasm come through the speakers. Your enthusiasm will be contagious. Your passion will stir their interest.
I’m sure you’ve seen a professor who had the ability to make a dry subject interesting. Maybe it was your trigonometry teacher. They were passionate about the subject and created an interest with you. There may not have been a passion in you for trig. But, there was some interest.
Interest works from speaker to audience. It won’t work from audience to speaker. For true audience engagement, podcast about your passion.
BATTLE THE IMPOSTOR
If you have ever fought the impostor syndrome, being more prepared will help you win that battle. Being prepared for your show will give you focus, make your show more entertaining, and create stronger relationships with your listeners. Most importantly, it will give you confidence to overcome impostor syndrome. You will be able to build that belief in yourself.
The impostor syndrome, or impostor phenomenon, is the psychological phenomenon in which people are unable to internalize their accomplishments. Despite external evidence that proves they are deserving and successful, those that suffer from impostor syndrome do not feel they deserve the success.
These people believe their success came about not because of skill or expertise, but more because of luck or manipulation. Students sometimes face this phenomenon in college when they tell themselves they really don’t belong in such an esteemed university and others may soon discover the fraud.
It is common for us all to experience the impostor syndrome to some extent. The phenomenon is roughly the opposite of your ego. Your ego is telling you that you are the best around and people should admire everything you’ve done.
Your internal impostor is then telling you that you have no authority to be doing this. You are a fake and a fraud with no credibility. The only reason you are in this position according to your internal impostor is because nobody has yet discovered the truth.
Both your ego and impostor exist within you. Learning how to manage both is a challenge. Take steps to build confidence within yourself. Understand that others fight the same battle. You are not alone.
BELIEVE IN YOURSELF
You have every right to create a great podcast. You have just as much right as the next podcaster. There is only one expert at your opinion. That expert is you.
Nobody knows more about your beliefs and opinion than you do. Develop confidence in yourself. You have great content and a unique opinion. Believe in yourself. You’ll be great. Prepare for it.
Being well prepared for your show and having the confidence to stick to the plan will help you win that battle against you internal impostor.
Do you need help with your podcast? Check out my coaching services. Let’s see what we can do.
Do you want to know how to create and conduct better podcast interviews? Stop talking.
Have you ever had a personal crutch or cliché that you used more often than you thought? It may have been something you didn’t realize until somebody brought it to your attention. Have you ever said, “Wow! I had no idea I did that all the time”? I’m here to tell you to stop it.
A good coach will tell you what you need to hear rather than what you want to hear. You need to hear this. When you are interviewing anyone on your show, stop talking. Ask the question, then get out of the way. Let your guest shine.
Here is an example. This is a recent question I heard during an interview.
Host: “Doesn’t money just really make you more of who you already were? It’s like money affords your personality to flourish, right? If you’re loving and generous and then you become wealthy, you’re going to be able to express more of that love and generosity to a greater degree. If you’re a jerk and you become wealthy, you’re just going to become become a colossal jerk. So, isn’t it really just an expansion of who you were at the core anyway? I mean, it’s not the money’s fault. It’s basically just a magnifier of it.”
Guest: “And it’s … that’s a good way of putting it. It just amplifies who you are, and makes it more apparent. It has a greater impact. Yeah, absolutely.”
This host kept talking to the point that he answered his own question. The guest had nothing left to say. The guest tried to paraphrase the same thing the host said, but couldn’t even make that happen. The host made his own point. The host’s question was seven sentences. The guest’s answer was basically, “Yeah.”
There are three points to remember when interviewing guests. If you keep these in mind, your guests will feel great about being on your show, and you will look like a brilliant host. Just stay out of your own way. Soon, you will be creating better podcast interviews.
1. KNOW THE ANSWER
Your job is to make your guest look great. You have invited your guest to your show to provide something you couldn’t provide alone. They have a story to tell. It is your job to help them tell it. Lead them to the punchline, climax or conclusion.
You need to do your homework prior to the interview. You need to know what makes your guest interesting. What will make your guest engaging to your audience? Find that story, and help your guest bring it to life.
The story will have a conclusion that you should already know. You’ve done your homework. You know what happens at the end. It is an art to help your guest tell that story without telling it yourself.
Prior to their appearance on the show, guests on The Tonight Show with Jimmy Fallon are interviewed ahead of time by a show producer. It is that producer’s job to find the interesting story. If the producer discovers the guest was recently stuck on a roller coaster during a family vacation, Jimmy will tee it up. He will help his guest shine by asking, “How’s the family? Have you had time to get away with them lately?” Suddenly, the guest is off and running telling the hilarious story of the roller coaster.
It looks like Jimmy got lucky. Jimmy just happened to stumble across a great vacation story. Reality is homework. Jimmy already knew what would make a great story. His homework (or that of his producer) revealed the gold. He simply helped his guest get there.
Our host above knew the answer to his question. It was obvious by the lengthy set up. Unfortunately, he proved it rather than letting his guest flourish. The host could have simply asked, “Doesn’t money just really make you more of who you already were?” The guest would have been off to the races. The guest could have really explored that theory. The host would have looked like he has great questions. The guest would have looked like he knows his stuff. Everybody wins. Instead, we get, “Yeah, exactly.”
Know the answer, so you can let your guest shine.
2. STOP TALKING
Make your questions brief. If you want to make your guests look great, you need to give them room to spread their wings. Short questions will allow that to happen.
Ask your short question, then stop talking. If you are talking, your guest is not. Your listeners have come to hear your guest. Let the guest talk. If your listeners have come to hear you, your guest isn’t necessary. Stop wasting everybody’s time.
Many hosts feel the need to prove how much they know. Hosts want to display all of their knowledge to impress the guest. Unfortunately, this is a myth. By showing how much you know, you are only trumping your guest. If you appear to be the most knowledgable person on the show, your guest will feel uncomfortable. You will soon find it hard to get guests.
When you ask brief questions that make it easy for your guest to tell great stories, your guest will look like a star. He will truly enjoy being part of your show. Your guests will want to return. Word will spread. Your show will grow. Finally, your audience will love the new information and engaging stories.
Everybody wins when you talk less.
3. NO YES/NO
Ask open-ended questions. When you ask questions that can be answered with “yes” or “no”, some guests will take the opportunity to answer “yes” or “no”. Your interview will go nowhere.
Yes/no questions make it difficult for your guest to elaborate. When your guests tell stories, they become engaging. Stories are easy for your guest. Stories have natural flow. Elaborations take a lot of thought. Make it easy for your guest.
Our host above started with, “Doesn’t money just really make you more of who you already were?” All of a sudden he is faced with a yes/no question. He has forced his guest to elaborate. In order to help his guest, he continues with another yes/no question. In fact, he follows with two additional yes/no questions. Suddenly, his guest has nothing left to say.
The host knows that money simply makes you more of who you already are. He could have positioned his guest with, “How does money affect the core beliefs of an individual?” With that short question, the guest is now able to expound with his “more of who you already are” theory. The guest looks great. The host looks brilliant by somehow knowing that money affect the core of individuals. The listener gets to hear a great story.
Everybody wins when you stop talking.
It is your job to make your guest the star. That is the reason you’ve invited her to your podcast. She offers something to the show that you cannot deliver as well by yourself. Let her do it.
Lob that ball to your guest, so they can hit it out of the park. You don’t need to prove how well you can pitch. The goal is to let your guest hit home runs.
Make your guest look great. She will love you for it. Your listener will love you for it. You will learn to love yourself for it when your podcast begins to flourish.
If you want to create and conduct better podcast interviews, ask the question, then get out of the way. Please, stop talking.
I’m working on a new project on interviewing. If you would like to get early, inside information on it when I have it ready, sign up. I’ll keep you informed before everyone else.
Do you spend time each week reviewing your own show? The best way to improve is to check the results of your work with a podcast review. Know where to look, ask the right questions, and develop a plan. If you want to get better, it takes work.
REVIEW IT
Dave Jackson and I do the the Podcast Review Show together. This is a show where we invite a podcaster to join us for a podcast review. Dave has over 20 years of experience teaching. He has been podcasting since 2005. I have over 20 years experience coaching broadcasting talent. Together, we help podcasters reach their goals.
On one particular episode, Dave mentioned he was reviewing his own episode and discovered something he could do to make his show better. Dave has been doing this for a dozen years and is still discovering ways to make his show better.
I have coached broadcasters for the past 25 years. Some of these broadcasters have been in the business for 40 years. The best in any industry use coaches to improve. That is why they are the best.
Using my radio knowledge and experience, I began coaching podcasters.
REAL TIME
I’m a big proponent of podcast reviews in real time in order to get better. One of my free worksheets at PodcastTalentCoach.com is dedicated to reviewing your show. It is called the Podcast Review Worksheet. You can find it for free in the Worksheet Library.
If you want to review your own show to improve, download the worksheet for free and put it to use. This worksheet will help you know where to look and what questions to ask to improve.
The key is to review your show on a regular basis. Actually listen like a listener. That is the only way to improve.
Many hosts finish recording a show and think, “That was pretty good. What’s next?” There isn’t much time spent actually reviewing a show. There are so many other duties to handle, such as editing, posting, and promoting the show.
The strongest path to improvement is spending quality time listening to the show.
TAKE NOTES
Play it back. Grab a pad of paper and write down the parts that jump out at you. Jot down the “oh wow” moments. Take note of the sections that didn’t work exactly as you planned.
You will only find these moments when you listen like a listener.
The show will sound much different to you when you listen back than it did as you were recording it. You will hear things you didn’t notice as you were focused on creating the content. Words that you overuse will suddenly become noticeable to you.
Allow time between recording and reviewing allows you to forget excuses.
Once you have created the lists of good and not-so-good, create two more lists.
First, determine how can you create more of the “oh wow” moments on the show. How might you incorporate into the show more of the great content that worked?
Next, make a list of ways you can eliminate the parts that weren’t polished enough.
Get on the road to show improvement. Use a podcast review with your show on a regular basis.
Pick an episode from a few weeks back. Listen to it in real time. Then, ask yourself these questions.
What did you hope to accomplish on this show?
Did you succeed?
How did you make the audience care?
Where were the “oh wow” moments?
Where were the surprises?
What were the powerful words you used?
What did you like about the show?
What was memorable about the show?
What worked?
What could have been better?
How did you position the story from the listener’s point of view?
How did you include the listener, making them part of the story?
At what points did you introduce and reset the show/topic?
How did it appear you were prepared for every element?
What did you reveal about yourself to help foster the relationship with the audience?
What stories did you tell?
What details did you use that were spectacular and visual?
Where did you use active language? (walking instead of walked, eating, not ate)
What crutches do you use that need to be removed?
What is your plan to make tomorrow better?
GOOD COACH
A good coach can help you objectively review your show.
There are many myths about coaching.
Myth: I know what I am supposed to do, so I can do it myself.
Truth: Your coach can see things you cannot.
The best in any industry use coaches. There are business coaches, quarterback coaches, vocal coaches, violin coaches, writing coaches, speaking coaches and many others.
Coaches are everywhere. Unless you are in a particular industry, most people have never heard of these coaches. These instructors are well educated and experienced in the profession. They help the greats become even better.
Coaches will hear things you do not. They are not too close to the content and can be objective. They don’t have the excuses.
Coaches also bring a different perspective and different experiences to your podcast review.
A good coach should also help you recognize the strong parts of your content. Your coach should give you confidence to take chances and hold you accountable to review your show.
You can be a guest on the Podcast Review Show with Dave Jackson and me. See how coaching works. Hire me for one-on-one coaching to help you improve. Or simply use the worksheet and give it a try for yourself. Either way, I would suggest you listen to the Feedback episode.
15 Quick & Easy Tips To Improve Your Podcast – Episode 153
Copyright : zerbor (Follow)
When I coach podcasters, we work on various aspects of their podcast. I most often help podcasters with their content. There are times we work on the process. Other times it is the audio quality, business or technique.
Recently, a podcaster contacted me to help with the overall creation of his show. It was taking him eight to twelve hours to produce a 30-minute podcast episode. He wanted to cut that in half if at all possible.
The show had two hosts. They would interview a few guests on each episode. Recording the intro and outro of the show, conducting the various interviews, editing the pieces together and eliminating the flaws ate up a lot of time every week.
Within four weeks of our first session, we had his podcast sounding more natural and conversational. We also had his editing time down to 90 minutes. Overall, the production of the show was within three hours.
There are times you are too close to the trees to see the forrest. Sometimes you just need somebody to point out that which is overlooked. That person could be a coach, a peer, or even you if you know what you are looking for.
In the case of this podcast, he simply needed help getting over his perfectionism to achieve a podcast quality acceptable to most while saving himself eight or nine hours every week.
Are there things you are overlooking in your podcast that could help you improve with a simple adjustment?
This week, I’d like to share with you 5 of the 15 tips on the podcast. You can get all 15 here:
You you can easily and quickly put these tips into effect this week as you record your podcast and immediately improve your show.
1. SIMPLIFY YOUR PROCESS
If you are like me, there are pieces of audio you use in every episode. For me, it would be my open and close for my show.
Make these pieces easy to insert into your podcast.
I begin creating an episode by recording the primary content. I process that audio using Adobe Audition. Then, I insert the open and close as the final step and save it as one file.
Since I use the open and close in every episode, I have those pieces saved in one production file. This file only contains that audio.
When it comes time to insert the pieces, I go to the file and insert it all. That is the only thing there. No searching. No wasting time. It just simplifies the processes.
Are there audio pieces you use in every episode? If so, save these pieces as individual files that you can easily access and insert.
4. CLEAN EDITS
Here is a quick tip to make cleaner edits.
In post production, we often need to remove parts of our audio. We might stop then start a sentence a second time. Other times we might simply want to remove an entire section.
The goal of a post production edit is to make the change unnoticeable to the listener. You want to avoid that audible bump or change in tone.
Let’s pretend you are editing a complete sentence out of your audio. The wave file would look like <last word> <breath 1> <bad sentence> <breath 2> <first word>. We want to remove the <bad sentence>.
Most people make the first edit between <last word> and <breath 1>. They then make the second edit between <bad sentence> and <breath 2>.
This leaves a final product of <last word> into <breath 2>. The audible clunk comes from the unnatural transition between a word and a breath that didn’t naturally follow it. The breath between words sounds different than a breath taken when you first begin speaking. The sound of a particular vowel or consonant usually remains constant.
To make your edit clean, place your first edit instead between <breath 1> and <bad sentence>, keeping the original breath. Make the second edit between <breath 2> and <first word>, eliminating the new breath.
This leaves the final product of <breath 1> and <first word>. The natural transition between <last word> and <breath 1> will cover the edit.
Another options is to make the edit in the middle of the sentence before a hard consonant.
Let’s say the sentence is, “The couch came crashing down.” As you are recording it, you mess up on “crashing”. You begin recording a second time at the beginning of the sentence.
When you clean it up, make the edit at the beginning of “couch”. There will be a small break right before the hard “c” in couch. Cut as close to each “c” in the two sentences.
Paste it together and you will hardly notice. Most of all, your listeners will not notice. Edits between sentences can be more noticable than edits in the middle of a sentence.
Give these a try. I think you’ll be surprised how clean your edits sound.
7. LAND GUESTS WITH THE RIGHT BAIT
Land great interview guests for your show by positioning your podcast with the benefits to the guest.
Many podcasters send the invite e-mail to potential guests explaining how the audience of the show will LOVE the info the guest will share. That fact is only a third of the puzzle … and NOT the most important to your new friend.
Just like most everyone in life, your guest want to know what is in it for them. Lead with the headline. How will your show benefit your guest?
“Ms. Guest, congratulations on your new book Crochet By The Yard. Launching a new book is always exciting. I imagine you are now busy spreading the word. I would love to help you market your book. Crocheting Conversations is the podcast I host. We have been talking about crocheting for 3 years now. Let’s find a time to have you as a guest on the show to promote your book to my 1,500 weekly listeners.”
Once you have established the benefit to your potential guest, you can then share how the interview will benefit you and your audience.
If you want to land a great guest, make your show as appealing as possible to your potential guest by leading with the prize for them. Lead with the headline.
10. WORK IT RIGHT
If you are using baffling in your studio space and still getting some echo, make sure you are working your mic properly. Working your mic properly is critical for solid audio quality of your podcast.
Your mouth should be about an inch away from your windscreen. By working close to your mic, you will not need the volume up quite so high as you record. Therefore, the microphone will not pick up as much background noise.
As you work your mic closely, be careful that your breathing, swallowing, lip smacking and other mouth noises are not loud and distracting. You may need to pull away a bit as you breath if it is too loud.
Over time, you will get comfortable and good at working the mic up close. It may simply take a bit of practice.
14. OTHER WAYS TO PREPARE FOR LIFE
In addition to working ahead, you have two other choices to have content to post even when you do not have time to create it.
We all have responsibilities in life. We have also made a commitment to publish our content on a regular basis. How do we balance the two?
You could record an evergreen episode. This is an episode that never goes out of date. It is always valuable. Evergreen content is content that is not timely, yet valuable at any given point in time.
Keep this one just in case life pops up. Post it when you just cannot find time to create the new episode.
Discussing recent events would not be considered evergreen, because 6 months from now it will sound dated.
On the other hand, an episode about budgeting could be evergreen. This episode would contain content that could be used today, 6 months from now or 2 years from now. It is always fresh. It is evergreen.
You could also create a “best of” episode to use as a fresh episode. This “best of” show could highlight your episode that was downloaded most or received the most feedback. You could highlight a few different episodes that have a similar theme.
When it comes time to deal with your other responsibilities, you will still have content to post if you use one of these three tips.
These 15 tips can easily be implemented this week to make your podcast stronger. You will be more efficient in your process. Your editing will be easier. Guests will sound better and be more willing to be a guest. Overall, your podcast will have a better sound.
Get the short e-book containing all 15 quick and easy tips to improve your podcast here.
Do you need help with your podcast? E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s see what we can do.
Surround yourself with the best people and success can be had.
Over my years in radio, I learned time and again that I could accomplish so much more by getting help and mentoring from the right people. As I ventured into podcasting, I quickly found the people that could mentor me and help me move forward toward my goals.
Today, I want to share with you a few people I think might be able to help you on your podcasting journey. Some I know personally and work with closely. Some have mentored me from afar through their work and resources.
Whichever method you choose to use, find the people that can help you get to your goals quicker and achieve more than you ever thought possible.
Here are 6 people who can provide help with your podcast and business. [Some are affiliate links of people who I use and endorse.]
School of Podcasting – Dave Jackson
The first person I want to introduce you to is Dave Jackson at School of Podcasting. If you have listened to my podcast for any length of time, you have heard me mention Dave. He has been my mentor, helping me learn the technical side of podcasting.
Dave’s coaching and tutorials have helped me more than anyone I have encountered.
My podcast actually started out as a blog. Back in early 2012, I was writing about the art of podcasting while learning the technical side and preparing to launch my show. Less than four months into it, my writings were being published on the New Media Expo site.
Shortly after I began writing for New Media Expo, Dave saw my stuff and reached out. Dave was already on my radar, because I had discovered his website when I was doing my original research. I simply hadn’t considered reaching out to a guy who had been doing it for about 7 years at that point. He was there near the beginning.
Dave’s gesture reaching out to me was a fantastic surprise. We had a great conversation that lasted about an hour. Here was a guy that had been podcasting since 2005 that just wanted to get to know more about what I was doing and how we might help each other. That is what I absolutely love about podcasters.
The conversation eventually led to a bit of a partnership. Dave and I kept in touch working on various ideas together. We met up at New Media Expo a few times. Finally, we teamed up when I joined Dave’s “Podcast Review Show” podcast. We review podcasters and help them improve.
Prior to that partnership, Dave help me multiple times with my website, podcast, and technical aspects of my show. He has truly been there and done that. Dave knows his stuff.
If you have questions about your feed, website or other technical aspects of your podcast, I highly recommend you use Dave’s knowledge and tools. He does some one-on-one coaching. He has resources on his website. You can also get deal on gear through Dave.
Daniel J. Lewis is another podcaster that helps people launch and improve their own podcast. He shares his knowledge of the audio software Audacity and web platform WordPress. You’ll learn all about equipment, software and skills necessary to podcast. His show was named the #1 technology podcast in 2012.
Daniel and I met through Dave Jackson. After following his show for quite some time, Daniel and I finally met at New Media Expo and have since developed a bit of a relationship.
The thing I love most about Daniel and Dave is their honesty and flexibility. They won’t push you toward their favorite microphone. They will give you honest reviews and options that fit your needs. For instance, do you want or need a $60 microphone or $360 microphones? They teach you the differences and why.
Daniel has a great lead magnet called “20 Things You Should Do Before Every Podcast Episode.” You learn how to get the room quiet, how to prepare, what tools to gather and more. He calls it his preflight checklist. This will make your recording session so much more efficient.
If you are serious about podcasting, check out Daniel’s Podcasters’ Society. This is a group of great podcasters together in a learning and sharing environment that can really help you improve your show. Daniel and I are discussing making some of my material available within Podcasters’ Society each month. Give it a look.
The next few guys are just a few of the guys I have used as a long-distance mentors. The books and material written by these guys have done more for my business and career than anyone I can name.
48 Days to the Work You Love – Dan Miller
Dan Miller and his book 48 Days To The Work You Love is where my journey began. Dan inspired me to pursue the work that I love. I originally discovered Dan and his work by listening to the Dave Ramsey Show.
If you are looking for your purpose, check out Dan’s material. He is a true entrepreneur.
The thing I love about Dan is his simplicity. Dan isn’t knee-deep in technology, like a lot of online business people. Though he has embraced the digital landscape more recently with the launch of his membership site, he is more about creating simple money-making opportunities that are right in front of us.
Whether is it reselling cars, selling digital content or running a gym, he has done it all. Dan can see a business opportunity anywhere. He has great tools to help you find your passion and the work you love.
Dan’s most popular resource is “48 Low or No Cost Business Ideas”. These are great. When you read this e-book, you’ll say to yourself, “Why didn’t I think of that?” Dan has great ideas. The inspiration is a huge bonus.
Internet Business Mastery – Jeremy Frandsen & Jason Van Orden
Jason Van Orden and Jeremy Frandsen at Internet Business Mastery have great information to help turn your knowledge into a business. I first discovered them during a session at New Media Expo. That presentation turned me onto their podcast.
Internet Business Mastery is not only a great podcast, but a course that has helped me refine my business focus. Both Jeremy & Jason have launched various other businesses. They have been there and done it.
In the Internet Business Mastery Academy, you learn how to develop your ideal freedom lifestyle. That leads into your freedom business blueprint. You learn how to design your single motivating purpose, create your money magnets, develop your list and more.
This has been one of the best investments I have made. The course has really refined my business plan and philosophy. If you are building an online business, this material can help you move you forward.
Michael Hyatt and Platform University have helped me organize my message and build my platform.
I like organization. Checklists are my friend. Step-by-step processes that allow me to add some creativity on top of it are tools I enjoy.
Michael Hyatt has a great membership site with Platform University. It is based on his book Platform, which is a must read as you develop your podcast. There is great learning inside the community. He only opens membership a couple times a year for enrollment. I got in early on this one and haven’t looked back since.
Inside Platform University, you will find Master Classes where Michael interviews other experts to dive deep into various subjects each month. In the Backstage Pass area, Michael shows you how he operates his platform. There are live member calls each month, member makeovers and so much more.
There is so much information inside Platform University, I don’t have enough time to get through all of it each month. I use the great material I find most useful and dip into the other stuff when I find time. When I have questions about specific topics, I can usually find the answer inside Platform University.
Michael Hyatt can help organize your work to help you be more efficient in building your platform.
Do you need help with your podcast? E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s see what we can do.
Erik K. Johnson after the interview with Lady Gaga
I want to teach you how to create powerful podcast interviews like the pros.
There are many reasons we interview guests on our podcasts.
They are content experts.
They know more than we do.
Guests add depth to the conversation.
Interviews can expose your show to others.
Interviews can cross-promote your products.
Guests add additional content to your show.
If you are like me when I started interviewing big names, you probably feel a bit overwhelmed. I felt like I was a kid playing dress-up. Did I really belong with the professional interviewers? I wasn’t big time. Impostor syndrom was definitely kicking in.
You can learn how to be a better interviewer and be more confident.
We can avoid making fools of ourselves.
We can battle the impostor syndrome.
We can look smarter by surrounding ourselves with smarter people.
If you have been with me for awhile, you probably know my story. I am a bit of an introvert. I never dreamed of interviewing big stars.
My family had little money as I was growing up. However, I was surrounded by entrepreneurs. My mom baked wedding cakes in our kitchen to earn extra money for us. My sister owned a marketing firm. My aunt was a restauranteur. My uncle owned a jewelry store. My other aunt owned a craft store. Owning a business was in my blood.
My first business was selling gum at school out of my locker. I purchased a couple cases at a white elephant sale and made some extra 6th grade cash. I also earned money as a magician for kid birthday parties when I was in middle school. As kids, we would turn our garage into a magic show theater or haunted houses for neighborhood kids.
As I got older, I started selling christmas cards door-to-door from the back of Boys’ Life Magazine to earn slot car tracks and stuff. There was always something I was selling for scouts, band, and hockey.
Selling was just a means to an end. I never had any intention of selling as a career. In 7th grade, I set my sights on getting my architecture degree. My middle school and high school classwork all led to pursuing my college degree in architecture. However, I hated presenting in front of a crowd. My design presentations was the one part of my degree I dreaded most.
While pursuing my architecture degree, I became the music director of the college station. I started in radio part-time by accident. My brother worked for a station. He wasn’t home one day when his boss called looking for someone to work. He offered me a job. That lead to my first full-time job in radio paying $12,000 a year.
The radio stations I have run have also had huge success. One of the stations I program was named Station of the Year. The morning show I coach was named Personality of the Year. We have hit #1 in the ratings 3 years straight … twice with 2 different stations in 2 different demographics.
This success didn’t come easy. I learned from some of the best talent coaches in the business.Bill McMahon developed the Authentic Personality. Tracy Johnson coached Jeff & Jer in San Diego. Mark St. John originally put together Mark & Brian who had huge success in Los Angeles. There have been many others.
Over the 25 years I’ve been doing this, I have learned the traits of great interviewers. I have distilled that knowledge down to a process that is easy to learn and implement in your show.
I call it Powerful Podcast Interviews
POWERFUL is the acronym for the 8 attributes of great interviews.
P – Prepared
O – Obvious goal – know where we are going before we leave the station
W – Warm & comfortable – get your guest comfortable
E – Energetic – maintain momentum & get to the action quickly
R – Resourceful – give your listeners something more – lead magnet
F – Fun – the reason we do what we love
U – Unique & authentic – give them something the internet cannot while being real
L – Let them shine – make your guest the star
Do you wish you could sound more prepared, more organized and more like a true, professional broadcaster during your interviews?
Do you fear people will see you as someone simply trying to play the part of a professional?
Would you like to have more credibility while sounding like an expert rather than someone with a little knowledge of your topic?
I have been there. What started as something fun to make college money suddenly turned into a career.
Here I was, a college kid studying architecture, trying to pretend I was a professional broadcaster.
I had no idea what I was doing. It was all trial and error.
Now, 25 years later, I am trying to help podcasters avoid the growing pains I suffered learning by diving head first into the deep end and quickly figuring out how to swim.
The mistakes I made were plenty. By sharing my scars and battle wounds, along with the processes, tips and skills I have learned over the years of interviewing, I can help you fast track the road to great podcast interviews.
Over the past 20 years, I have been coaching radio talent and more recently podcasters with their shows. I have helped many radio shows reach the top of the ratings. My show has also been at the top for years.
YOUR OPPORTUNITY
Would you like me to show you how to create powerful podcast interviews step-by-step?
Would you like me to show you how to put each of these steps into action to make your interviews more effective?
I am looking to gather a handful of serious podcast interviewers to take part in an interactive interviewing workshop. During this intimate workshop, I will teach you each step in the Powerful Podcast Interview system and you will also have your interviewing questions answered.
You will come out of the workshop with a custom development plan and checklist for your interviews. You will learn how to turn your interviews into traffic for your show and website. You will have a preparation checklist for show. You will learn ways to make your interviews more entertaining and engaging. You will walk away with the key “dos and don’t” for every interview. I’ll even teach you how to be interviewed on other show. That’s just the start.
This workshop will be 5 consecutive Saturdays beginning January 7, 2017. Each session will last roughly two hours as we get through each step of the system.
If you would like to be part of this intimate workshop with 14 other serious podcasters, e-mail me today at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.
Paying for coaching is a difficult decision to make. You are investing in something difficult to measure.
When you pay for coaching, it isn’t like buying a tank of gas. You can see, feel and measure the benefit of buying a tank of gas.
To measure the benefit of investing in coaching services, you need to believe in yourself.
I want to help you take that first step. You have heard the overview in this episode. We have just scratched the surface. This workshop will dive deep into each step.
Look, my coaching isn’t for everyone. Podcasters that are serious about improvement and truly believe in themselves usually receive the most benefit. It takes commitment. And, it is priced to ensure only those committed take advantage of the opportunity.
My coaching fee is typically $95 per hour.
5 two-hour sessions would typically cost $950. However, I want you to succeed. I want to see you get committed to your improvement.
You won’t pay anywhere near that amount.
This five-session workshop will only cost you $97.
As a bonus, and to help jump start your transformation, I will include a free, digital copy of the Podcast Talent Coach Workbook. This book walks you through all of the Podcast Talent Coach worksheets with detailed instructions.
To get you started, to help you see the power of podcast coaching, I’ll give you a money-back guarantee. If after the first two-hour session you don’t think the workshop is for you, just let me know and I’ll refund your entire tuition. No questions asked.
There’s no risk to you. If you don’t benefit, you don’t pay.
Am I crazy?
Not really. I offer this workshop, because I am a talent coach. I help podcasters transform their information into engaging entertainment and turn their podcasts into powerful, profitable relationships. Over the past 25 years, I’ve guided many broadcasters and podcasters to great success.
There is a good possibility my knowledge and experience can help you and your podcast. This workshop is designed to help us both.
I plan to record all five session to create a interviewing course that I will sell for not less than $200. That is twice what you will pay without the question and answer opportunity. Without the free workbook.
With that said, please understand that I am not offering a sales pitch in disguise. I promise not to pressure you or pester you in any way at all.
Now, WAIT A MINUTE.
Before we go any further, you need to know that I cannot help everyone. That is why I am limiting this workshop to around 15 serious podcasters. I can only be of benefit to people who:
1. have a podcast
2. are actively creating new content and interviews, and
3. are dedicated to making a few adjustments & improvements
If that isn’t you, enjoy my free content. I completely understand, and we’ll still be friends.
However, if you have the desire to transform your interviews and create a powerful, engaging podcast, here is what you need to do next.
If you meet this criteria, and you want to join me in this powerful interviewing workshop, no strings attached, simply e-mail me today. Send your request to join to Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.
I will review all requests on Saturday, December 16, 2016. I will then select the 15 or so podcasters to join me in this workshop.
Thanks for being part of this journey.
If you would like to be part of this intimate workshop with 14 other serious podcasters, e-mail me today at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.
Put The Fun In Your Podcast Interviews – Episode 146
One of 8 steps to Powerful Podcast Interviews
Creating Powerful Podcast Interviews requires 8 key steps. One of those key steps is adding an element of fun.
Having fun is the reason we podcast. We love what we do. Podcasting requires too much time to continue if it isn’t enjoyable. Make it fun.
To maintain a sense of fun, add these ten facets to your podcast.
HAVE FUN
Make it a goal to have fun. We often get so wrapped up in getting through our list of questions that we forget to enjoy ourselves.
ENTERTAIN
We are here to entertain. People listen to podcasts to be entertained. Even if your content is informational or inspirational, your show still needs to be entertaining.
SHOW BUSINESS
This is show business. Your podcast should be both show and business. Even if making money is not your goal, you need continue to grow your show to attract guests and listeners. You need to grow to survive. You need both show and business to keep listeners coming back.
WORD-OF-MOUTH
If your guest has fun, word will spread. The leaders in your niche talk to each other. When you send out an invitation to be on your show, potential guests will check references. Earn the reputation of being a fun show. Word will get around.
SET EXPECTATIONS
Communicate to your guest what is expected of them. Where do you want the interview to go? Explain what you hope to accomplish in order to put your guest at ease. When your guest knows the expectations of the show and is given permission to loosen up a bit, they will be more likely to have fun.
STICK TO THE TIME LIMIT
Stick to the allotted time. If you told your guest the interview would last 45 minutes, be sure you wrap it up within 45 minutes. When you go over, it is disrespectful. Word will get around. If you go long, it will eventually become difficult to attract new guests.
SHOW RESPECT
If there are topics that are off limits or your guest has asked you to avoid particular subject matter, respect their request. Always treat your guest with respect. Once you break that trust, it will be very difficult to have fun during the remainder of the interview. Protect your reputation. Create an atmosphere of fun and not fear.
RELAX
Be in the moment during your interview. Relax and let the conversation happen naturally. You can edit any rough parts out at the end of the interview. When you relax, the fun will come naturally.
DON’T FORCE FUNNY
When you try too hard to be funny, it usually doesn’t work. When you force the funny, you will typically fall short. Let it all happen naturally. The funny will come.
FUNNY FOLLOWS FUN
The funny comes most easily when you are having fun. Have you ever been in a group of people who are having a ton of fun and everything seems funny? The dumb jokes and stupid things your buddy doing are all funny because you are all having fun. Funny follows fun.
Next week we are going to cover all 8 steps to creating Powerful Podcast Interviews.
Do you need help with your podcast? E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s see what we can do.
On this episode, I review an interview podcast to help you understand how to evaluate your own podcast interviews.
Doug Piper from the Amazing Network allowed me to review one of his interviews. I can’t thank him enough for having the courage to allow me to provide a critique in front of everyone.
In this episode, Doug interviews Brad Jeffrey of CauseGear. It is a business impacting 250,000 people living in unfathomable poverty.
In my critique, I only play Doug’s questions. Those are the parts Doug can control. If you want to listen to the entire interview, find it here: http://youtu.be/fQKBjCtMzfY
Brad left a very successful family business, because he felt the need to serve others. His desire was to provide sustainable life change to victims of unfathomable poverty.
Throughout the interview, Doug does a nice job reframing Brad’s answers to guide the discussion. Doug pulls out the pieces of the answer to keep Brad focused on the direction of the interview. This keeps the momentum of the episode moving forward.
There are few places where it feels like Doug is reading some of his questions rather than letting it become a natural discussion. He could also use a little stronger call-to-action at the end of the episode.
If you would like this type of help with your podcast, you have a couple options.
First, Dave Jackson and I do a show called the Podcast Review Show. We invite podcasters on the show to have their podcast reviewed. It is an opportunity to get solid feedback from two experienced coaches on your podcast, strategy and website while promoting your show to another audience. Find that option here.
You can also get one-on-one coaching with me. These are private sessions. We work on your show together to improve your podcast and achieve your goals. You can get that information here.
Find my podcast, worksheets, workbook and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.
Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.
Over the past few weeks, we have been discussing how to create powerful podcast interviews. Thank you for the amazing questions and feedback. This week, we continue to answer those questions.
My goal is to eventually help you with a podcast interview course that will walk you through the entire process of creating powerful interviews. Your questions are helping me shape that course. Thank you for the amazing help.
If you have questions about interviews, you can e-mail me anytime at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.
Before we dive into the questions this week, I want to thank you for the response to my coaching offer. Just a reminder … I currently have two openings for my one-on-one coaching. One is Tuesday evenings. The other is Saturday mornings U.S. time zones.
If you have a desire to produce engaging content with a stronger presentation, consider improving your podcast with coaching. Get the full details here: COACHING
Let’s dive into the questions …
From Rick Sizemore …
Erik,
How wonderful to hear from you. You may recall reviewing my podcast, VR Workforce Studio, with Dave Jackson on the Podcast Review Show. I made a checklist of every suggestion you made from that show and have benefitted in significant ways for your advice. I highly recommend that serious podcasters consider the benefits and advantages of working with you. The small investment required pays huge dividends and the possibility of seeing your podcast evolve to unimagined heights becomes reality.
1. Given our carefully defined podcast focus “disability employment” there are certain questions that need to be repeated on every episode. We work hard to find new creative and different ways to present the questions, but can I feel confident that certain “questions and content areas” may be repeated on every show, as an acceptable practice? What is the risk of doing this? What are techniques you’ve used to vary “areas that must be repeated” to get to the content your listeners are seeking? For example on my show people always want to know what motivates a person to go back to work after disability, what advice they would have for others, what advice they would have for employers, what assistive technology they use.
2. How can I become conversational with a co-host and engaging the interviewee? Anne and I work hard at avoiding the “rotate who asks the question” and “just ask the question” syndrome.
3. What are some techniques for getting a guest who shows up with a script to drop it and just talk to you? Of course I warn guests ahead of time that scripting usually robs the conversational nature of the interview.
Best of Luck with your episodes.
Rick Sizemore VR Workforce Studio Podcast. vrworkforcestudio.com rick.sizemore@wwrc.virginia.gov taborroadorganist@gmail.com
ANSWER:
Let’s take these one at a time.
Is it acceptable to repeat the same questions on every episode.
This is a case-by-case basis. I teach podcasters to tailor their questions to the guest rather than asking the same list every week. When you ask the same questions on every show, it becomes a question/answer session rather than a discussion.
However, there are certain questions that need to be asked on every episode for some podcasts. When a host interviews entrepreneurs, you need to ask how they got started. It is part of the story. If you are interviewing rock stars, you need to ask about their big break getting discovered. It is part of their story.
On your show, motivation, advice and technology is part of the story. You are here to help those with disabilities. They need that information. Don’t worry about asking the same questions.
If you want to vary the way you ask the questions, brainstorm 15 different ways to ask the same question. Write them down. Have the versions handy when you conduct the interview. You know the questions are coming. Be prepared.
We use this brainstorm technique in radio when we say our name. We do not want to introduce ourselves the exact same way every time. To switch it up, we brainstorm 15 ways to introduce ourselves. “I’m Erik.” “Hey, it’s Erik.” “My name is Erik.” “It’s me, Erik.” Find variations.
How can you become conversational?
We answered that a bit with Joe on the last episode. Relax and let the conversation happen.
With a co-host, it is important that you can see each other. This allows nonverbal cues to happen during the conversation.
When you have a question to ask, give your co-host a signal. Raise your hand. Look them in the air. Give them a nod. Point to them. Some sort of signal that says, “I’m going to jump in here.”
When you can see each other and use the nonverbal cues, you will be able to jump in to ask those great follow-up questions. When you trade off questions, it doesn’t allow the follow-up to occur.
Nonverbal cues also prevent you from talking over each other.
How can you get your guest to drop the script?
You need to be very clear with your guest right up front that you want this to be a conversation. It helps when you can assure the guest you will give them plenty of time to plug their stuff.
You can also ask if there are particular point they would like to cover. Assure them you will offer questions that allow them to cover those points.
Let your guest know that when the interview is over, you will ask them if there is anything you didn’t cover. This will allow them to touch on points that may have been left out. You can then edit that question into the show. This rarely happens. However, it does help your guest get comfortable and drop the script.
Finally, tell your guest you will edit the show. It is perfectly acceptable if they feel the need to stop and begin an answer again. You can edit that out to make them sound great.
You guests will sometimes follow a script, because they are nervous and inexperienced giving interviews. Set their mind at ease by letting them know you will make them sound great.
In the end, it is your show. There will be times when you need to stop the interview and be demanding. If you find your guest is following a script and doing nothing but pitching, stop the interview and explain your goals for the show.
“Rick, I can appreciate you have a new book and would really like to plug it. Believe me, we will get to that. If we make this conversation nothing but a prolonged infomercial, people will tune out. They will take no action, and it will be ineffective. Please allow this to become a conversation. After we engage our audience with a great discussion and get them to trust your authority, we can get to the book with a strong call-to-action. However, we need to make it a conversation first. Do me a favor and set the talking points aside. Let it flow. Trust me. You’ll sound great.”
If you need to stop a second time and get more demanding, use something like, “Rick, I’m losing confidence that this interview will be something I can use for the show. My listeners will benefit more by natural answers from the heart. I need to ask you to set aside the talking points and simply have a discussion. Otherwise, we need to cut this interview short. Can you help me there?”
If that doesn’t work, move on to the next interview.
From Doug Piper …
Erik,
How do you keep the guest from being distracted by other things? How do you increase the concentration and enthusiasm of the guest? How do deal with guest that have poor equipment or poor “rooms” to hold the interview (assumes the interview is via Skype or similar). Does providing the questions to the guest beforehand screw up the spontaneity of the podcast?
-Doug
ANSWER:
You can solve all of this with your pre-interview communication.
When you discuss the interview with the guest prior to conducting it, you need to lead with the “why”.
Why is it important to have good equipment? Why is it important to have a quiet room? Why is it important to be enthusiastic?
When you can communicate to your guest that the interview is a great way to promote their goods and services, you can convey the importance of a good, clean interview.
If they were shooting a television commercial to promotes their goods, they wouldn’t shoot it on their iPhone with no script while their kids were running around the store. They also shouldn’t do an interview in that atmosphere.
The better we can make the interview sound, the stronger their marketing message will be.
In your pre-interview checklist, tell them exactly what they need. Quiet room. Best mic available (the mic on the computer is not acceptable). Enthusiasm as if they were promoting their business to an auditorium of willing buyers. Have them pretend to be selling you if that makes them more comfortable.
I would not suggest providing them a list of questions prior to the interview. This tends to generate scripted answers that sound unnatural.
It would be acceptable to let them know you will touch on topic A, B and C. That will allow them to prepare some notes without scripting the entire answer.
From Kim Krajci …
I want to get the interviewee to understand the importance of the equipment requirements: microphone, quiet room, headset. About half of my shows are interviews. About half of those are interviews in person. I don’t use a mixer but should I? Won’t Levelator or some other tool solve the problem for me?
Kim Krajci
Writer Podcaster
ANSWER:
If you have more than one audio source on your show, you should use a mixer. This helps you balance the inputs.
If you use Levelator or some setting within Adobe Audition to level the audio, it boost everything. If I increase the level of your mic using processing, I am not only increasing your voice. I am also increasing the background noise and every little pop and click.
It is best to take a couple minutes to teach your guest how to work the mic up close. You should also use the mixer to balance the inputs.
Not all voices are the same. Some are soft. Some are high. Some project. Some have big low ends. Your audio software will respond differently to each voice. Therefore, you need a mixer to create the proper input.
In radio, we have a processor connected to the output of the board. All of our mics, music and other audio run through the board. The board then runs through the process before it heads to the transmitter.
Our audio processor increases the low audio and brings down the hot audio. We don’t leave it all up to the processor. It is a back up plan. We control all levels with the board to provide the best possible audio to the processor. You should do the same with your audio.
Use every tool you have to create the best audio possible.
Do you need help with your podcast? E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s see what we can do.
Over the past few weeks, we have been discussing how to create powerful podcast interviews. We are off to a great start.
YOUR PODCAST INTERVIEW QUESTIONS
On the past two episodes, I asked for your questions regarding podcast interviews. Thank you for the tremendous response. This week, we will begin to go through those questions to get you some answers.
My goal is to eventually help you with a podcast interview course that will walk you through the entire process of creating powerful interviews. Your questions are helping me shape that course. Thank you for the amazing interaction.
If you have questions about podcast interviews, you can e-mail me anytime at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.
COACHING
Before we dive into the questions this week, I want to let you know that I currently have two openings for my one-on-one coaching. One is Tuesday evenings. The other is Saturday mornings U.S. time zones.
If you have a desire to produce engaging content with a stronger presentation, consider improving your podcast with coaching. Get the full details here: PODCAST COACHING
Let’s dive into the questions …
HOW MUCH PREP IS TOO MUCH?
From David Freeman …
I think my biggest concern, which you mentioned, is Imposter Syndrome and then closing the deal on scheduling an interview.
I took so much time in planning and pod-crastination that potential guests (50) may have forgotten that they agreed to a chat. (Too much time to learn the technology: You and I chatted on your show about my beginning process MORE THAN A YEAR AGO)!
MY QUESTION: How much Show Prep is TOO MUCH PREP?
Being totally nervous about asking for interviews, I wanted to answer EVERY POSSIBLE question and objection, upfront. I prepared a SUPER-detailed show prep sheet to send to potential guests.
After my first guest confirmed his interest in an interview chat for podcast and verifying his interest, in several chats on FaceBook, I sent him my “Super Cool Show Prep” form in a Google doc. I was able to see that he actually opened my doc on three separate occasions, but … no response, no reaction, no comment and no interview scheduled.
Based on his previous commitment, I had recorded and released an intro episode and mentioned his future visit as the upcoming launch episode. I guess the lesson is “don’t promo an interview that you haven’t already recorded”.
Thanks for all you do. I sincerely appreciate your podcast and advice.
Dave
ANSWER:
Is it overkill? Yes. Your questionnaire is 11 pages long with multiple links.
Your guest has agreed to the interview. They have agreed to give you 30 minutes of their time. Now, you are asking them for another 30 minutes on a separate occasion to complete the document.
The questionnaire is asking too much of their time. That is evident by the fact that your guest opened it three times and did nothing with it.
Trim it down, and do your investigative homework to find out about your guest. For instance, you can probably find all of their social media info on their website. There is no need to include that on your worksheet.
Only provide the essential info in your pre-interview document. Address the rest on a case-by-case basis.
You are smart to avoid promoting anything that isn’t already done. There is always the possibility that the interview will fall through. Get it in the can, and then promote it.
It would be acceptable to says, “I’m trying to get Ms. X on the show.” Your listeners know there is a possibility that it will fall apart. They can go on that journey with you.
When you promote that Ms. X will be on the show in two weeks, you leave yourself open to disaster.
One thing I do love about your questionnaire is the “30 minute in-and-out guarantee” for your guests. It might be tough to get enough audio in 30 minutes for a great interview. However, your guarantee tells your guest exactly what is being asked of them.
Don’t let the prep hold you back. Jump in. If you want to learn the tech and get comfortable, do a few interviews with people that you know as a test run. Tell yourself that they won’t be published. You’re just practicing.
Get two or three under your belt, and you’ll be off and running.
HOW DO YOU MAKE IT A CONVERSATION?
From Joe Taylor …
Hey Erik,
How about providing tips on creating an intimate, conversational interview; one that feels like you’re listening in on two friends talking?
Conversation is key to a powerful podcast interview.
The key to creating a great conversation is listening. Stop being so concerned that you ask every question on your prep sheet. Truly listen to the answers your guest is providing.
When you listen to the answers, you begin to ask great follow-up questions just as you would if you were chatting with a friend. Your interview becomes more of a conversation and less of a question and answer session.
Relax and let the interview happen.
Don’t be afraid of the pregnant pause. The pregnant pause is that uncomfortable silence when both people stop talking.
When you allow the silence to linger, your guest will naturally begin talking again. They might give you details you wouldn’t otherwise get.
This silence allows you to come up with a great follow-up question. It also allows you to slow down and be conversational.
If all else fails, you can edit out the silence in post-production.
HOW DO I LAND PODCAST INTERVIEWS?
From Stephen Aiken …
I need help with getting interviews, when I send invites I don’t get any response.
-Stephen
ANSWER:
Do not try to get interviews by cold calling.
My client John Livesay at the Successful Pitch Podcast helps entrepreneurs connect with and pitch their ideas to investors.
John helps entrepreneurs find the warm intro. The key is finding people who know the people you would like to meet.
Do the same with your interviews. Find the people who know the people you would like to interview. Ask for the connection. You can even write the e-mail for them. Or simply ask your friend for a reference, so you can mention them in your e-mail.
“Hey, Mike. Stephen Aiken passed along your contact info. He was recently on my show and thought you might make a good guest to discuss your new book. Would you have a few minutes to chat?”
Get the door open. Don’t ask to get married in the first e-mail. Open the line of communication. Warm up your lead.
At the end of every interview, after the conversation has ended, ask your guest if they have two or three people that might benefit by being a guest on your show. When they provide the names, ask if they would make an introduction for you or if you could use them as a reference when you reach out.
Do you need help with your podcast? E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s see what we can do.
Actually, a change in my employment. You know I have programmed radio stations for the past 20 years. Well, recently my employer thought my skills were strong enough to take over our entire market.
I was recently elevated to Sr. Vice President of Programming for our 7-station cluster in our market. I now oversee the programming of all 7 radio stations with a few program directors working under me.
As I got up to speed with my new role, along with helping my coaching clients, the podcast took a little pause. We are now ready to roll again.
Thanks for those that reached out. Especially Dave Jackson, Alex Exum and a few others. It meant a lot.
POWERFUL PODCAST INTERVIEWS LIKE THE PROS
Why do we interview guests on our podcasts?
There are various benefits to having guests on our shows.
They are content experts
They know more than we do
The interview adds depth to the conversation
Interviews can expose your show to others, such as your guest’s tribe
Your guest can cross-promote your products
Interviews add additional content to your show
It is possible to become better at conducting interviews. When you work to improve, your entire show will benefit.
As you learn to be a better, you will naturally become a more confident interviewer. We can avoid making fools of ourselves and battle the impostor syndrome with a little work and education.
By conducting strong interviews, we can look smarter by surrounding ourselves with smarter people. This is a huge benefit of interviewing.
Growing up, I never envisioned myself creating a life in radio interviewing stars and other big names. I was quite introverted all the way through college. Radio became my career by accident.
Our family had little money while I was growing up. My family was full of entrepreneurs. They were all around me, because we were all trying to make ends meet.
My first business was selling gum at school. In junior high school, I bought a case of gum at a white elephant sale. I took that gum to school and sold it out of my locker. That was pretty decent money for a sixth grader.
As a kid, I also did magic shows and built haunted houses in our garage for the kids in the neighborhood.
Those early days of business lead to selling door-to-door as a kid. I sold anything I could. I sold for popcorn and Christmas cards for Boy Scouts, ornaments and calendars for band, candy for hockey and on my own. I sold sold all kinds of stuff.
It wasn’t the selling I enjoyed. It was the reward at the end that kept me going.
That reward was similar to the motivation I used when learning to speak in front of a crowd and interviewing others. I loved the outcome.
My radio career began while I was getting my architecture degree in college. I hated presenting in front of a crowd. However, it was a required part of the program.
As I was getting the degree, I was offered a part-time job running the board at a radio station in 1989. I then became music director of the college station. That eventually turned into a full blown radio gig.
My first full-time job in radio paid $12,000 per year. That wasn’t much. In fact, I had two other jobs just to make ends meet.
Over the years, I have interviewed Natalie Merchant, Sarah McLachlan, Mariah Carey, Lady Gaga, the Samples, Big & Rich, Jason Aldean, Miranda Lambert, Carrie Underwood and many others.
I have also taught others to interview. Radio stations I have programmed have been named “Station of the Year”. Shows I have coached have been awarded “Morning Show of the Year”. By learning the skills necessary to interview and engage, I have been #1 in the radio ratings 3 years straight … twice with 2 different stations in 2 different demos.
My success can directly be linked to my training over the last 25 years. I have learned from some of the best talent coaches in the business. Tracy Johnson coached Jeff & Jer in San Diego to huge success. Mark St. John launched the morning careers of Mark & Brian in L.A. There have been many others.
Over the 25 years I’ve been doing this, I have learned the traits of great interviewers. I have also distilled it down to a process that is easy to learn and implement in your show.
Would you like me to teach you? I just need to know what you would like to learn.
I would love to help you refine your interviewing skills. In the long run, my goal is to create an interviewing course.
To get this started, I need to know what you need to know.
Today, we will open the Podcast Talent Coach mail bag and answer a few content questions I have received. The first questions is about making effective use of a co-host. The second is about consistently helping your listeners with your content. I would love to hear an episode on involving a highly effective style with a cohost. – Rick Sizemore – VR Workforce Studio
CO-HOST BASICS
Different point of view
Distinct styles and perspectives
Different voices
One needs to be the leader
I was listening to a business podcast the other day. It is a show that is hosted by two marketing gurus. They typically offer business advice to listeners who write or call the show.
The hosts had received a question regarding unique ways to market a product. The listener had included a few methods he had used. Host number one rattled off his critique of the methods used and offered a couple of his own. Host number two basically said, “I agree with your assessment and really have nothing further to add.”
When a second host (or guest for that matter) isn’t offering any new information or differing opinion, the second host is unnecessary.
If your podcast involves more than one person on the show, you need to have a justifiable reason for each of you to exist on the show. When there are multiple voices on a show, each voice needs a role. One of the hosts is unnecessary if two voices are offering the same information, with the same opinion persona.
There are many podcasts hosted by two co-hosts. Many of those are successful, such as “On The Media” with Brooke Gladstone and Bob Garfield, “Manic Mommies” with Erin and Kristin, and “Mike & Mike in the Morning” with Mike Golic and Mike Greenberg.
Not all two-person podcasts are structured quite as well as these. It seems two friends who have similar interests get together and start a podcast without much planning. The similar interests of the hosts seem to spawn similar opinions and positions on topics.
If you and I are hosting a show, and we are both saying roughly the same thing, one of us isn’t necessary.
A great example of two hosts that compliment each other well is “Mike & Mike in the Morning”.
Mike Golic and Mike Greenberg host “Mike & Mike in the Morning”. You can find the show broadcast on ESPN television and radio as well as their “best of” podcast online. The show recently celebrated its 10-year anniversary.
Both Mikes have an interest in sports. That is the commonality that brought them together. A general interest in the topic is necessary for the subject matter and foundation of the show.
The differing opinions create the magic within the show.
Mike and Mike come from very different background. Their different experiences have developed differing opinions, attitudes and approaches to various sports topics. These differences make the show compelling.
Mike Greenberg was born to a Jewish family. He grew up in New York City. Greenberg went on to study journalism. He worked his entire career in broadcasting, beginning in Chicago, the third largest city in the United States.
Mike Golic was born in suburb of Cleveland, Ohio. He played American football in College while studying finance and management at Catholic university Notre Dame in Indiana. Golic played professionally in the NFL. He then began his broadcasting career after his playing career ended.
Where Greenberg approaches topics from the researcher/journalist perspective, Golic tackles those topics from the real life experience angle. Greenberg comes from the big city. Golic comes from the suburbs. Greenberg worked big-time radio in the nation’s largest cities. Golic made big-time hits on one of professional sports’ biggest stages.
There are multiple approaches you can take on a show with multiple hosts.
Good cop/bad cop is a common show structure.
This is approach would position one host as the nice guy. He is there to help. Always encouraging and supporting the listener.
The second host would be a bit of a jerk. He might have a big ego. This host would be in your face and telling you like it is. He wouldn’t necessarily be mean. However, he would be the antagonist in the show.
There is a three-person version of this called “The Dog, The Doll and The Dork”. This show involves the bad guy (the dog), the good guy (the dork) and the sweet girl to round it out (the doll). The female typically plays mediator between the two guys. This show is heard quite often on radio morning shows.
You can also see “The Dog, The Doll and The Dork” in America’s original version of “American Idol”.
Simon Cowell was “The Dog”. He was the bad guy with the big ego. Simon was the guy everyone loves to hate.
Paula Abdul played the role of “The Doll”. She was sweet while often siding with one of the two guys. She was very likeable. Paula was almost the antidote to Simon.
Randy Jackson was “The Dork”. He would often play the nice guy, even while providing tough criticism. You would hear Randy say something like, “You know you’re my dog, but that just wasn’t good.” Randy could be seen considering the feelings of the contestants.
“American Idol” is currently not as strong, because they’ve lost the role identity of each judge. When you watch the show, you really don’t know what to expect from each judge. Is Randy going to be the nice guy or suddenly play the part of “the Dog”? Roles are inconsistent from show to show.
There are many other varieties of show roles. You could use nerd/jock where one host has “studied it” and one host has “done it”. Liberal/conservative is an option if you can find a co-host with the opposing point of view. Corporation/entrepreneur could offer diverse points of view on business. Male/female is pretty clear. You simply need to select the differences that work for you.
Think of some of the best duos in history. What makes them different (and therefore valuable)? McCartney & Lennon. Abbott & Costello. Siskel & Ebert. Bert & Ernie. Sonny & Cher. Milli Vanilli. Ok, maybe not that one.
Each member in those great partnerships offered something different than their teammate. Often, that difference was the opposite of their counterpart. Sometimes, it was simply a different approach. Find those differences that make each of you unique.
The goal of your show is to entertain your audience. Listeners have come to your show to learn something, laugh at something, or be amazed by something. Your job is to create compelling content.
Debates and differing opinions are a great way to stir up emotion with your audience. It doesn’t always need to be an argument. Multiple hosts simply need to offer different information. If both hosts are offering the same content, one of you are just wasting the time of your audience. You are repeating yourself when you could be dishing up new content.
If you host a show with multiple people, find each individual voice and use those differences to entertain your audience.
HELP OTHERS
How can I help others with every show. I am so grateful for your show, keep up the good work, I point all my podcasting friends your way! You have a devoted fan on Oahu, if you need any ideas for family adventures on Oahu…. I’m your Man! – Dave Tupper – Kids Adventures Hawaii
Start with the goal of your show. What is it that you want people to take from this particular episode? How will your content help them?
I’m sure you’ve heard the phrase “what’s in it for me?”
Your audience will be asking this very question every time they tune into your podcast. Your introduction better tell your listener exactly how your topic will affect them. You need to hook them right at the beginning with an intriguing introduction. If you don’t hook them early, they will be gone in search of something more captivating.
When your audience knows what is in it for them, they begin to care. Making your listener care is the only way to get them to listen and more importantly come back again.
As I was listening to a podcast recently, it suddenly hit me. How does this apply to me, and what am I getting out of this podcast? I was having a tough time answering those two questions.
It was an entrepreneural podcast. The host and guest were recounting the launch and growth of the guest’s company. It was a decent story. There were a few highlights about growing out of a basement and finding industry partners. The most interesting part of the story was the fast growth of the company.
After twenty minutes of the show, it hit me. I really have nothing in common with this tech company. The stories being told were very specific to the guest’s company. Most of all, neither the guest nor the host were making the connection between the tale of the company and lessons that could be gleaned by the listener. They were not incorporating the audience into the show at all.
To truly engage your audience, you need to make the listener the star. Nobody wants to watch your home movies unless they are in them.
Your listener doesn’t need to be part of the show to be the star. The content could give them hope, help them envision the future, or relate to their situation. You need to help them make that connection.
The key question is “what’s in it for me?” Your listener isn’t attracted to your podcast by your content. They listen to your podcast because of what your information can do for them. They don’t buy products. They buy benefits.
If your podcast is only focused on you, your product, or your guest without making a connection to the listener, the size of your audience will shrink. Engaging content must be listener focused. Keep your audience engaged by making your listener the star.
Connection, put them in the show, one-on-one communication and teaching without being condescending.
This week, check out the free video I have on PodcastTalentCoach.com about one-on-one communication. We discuss how to make your listener feel like they are part of the show and that your content is specifically for them.
Next week, we will start a series on interviewing. How do you make the most of the time with your interview guest? What is more effective at attracting traffic, interviewing others or being interviewed? In the next few episodes, we will cover that, along with interview terms, and tips to help create powerful interviews.
Do you struggle to find time to create your podcast each week? I think it is a challenge we all face at some point in time.
I have a few tips that can help you streamline your process while still creating great content. This week, I want to walk you through the process I use when creating my podcast every week.
This is part of a content creation series. Last week, we discussed reviewing your show to improve your content. Determining your goal for the episode and evaluating your progress is a critical step for improvement.
Over the next couple weeks, we will talk about organizing your content and making the best use of your co-host.
This podcast started nearly 3 years ago. I knew I could use the knowledge I’ve gained over the past 25 years in radio to help podcasters improve their shows.
When I began recording the show, the process would take me hours every week. It felt like I would get one show posted and promoted only to begin creating the next episode.
Over time, I learned that I needed to spend more time promoting my show than I was spending to create the content. The content needed to be great. But it wouldn’t have any effect if nobody knew about it.
The key is spending 25% of your time creating great content and 75% of your time promoting that content.
To free up time to promote your podcast, you need to streamline the content creation process. Find the areas that can be combined, removed or refined in order to shorten the time it takes to create your podcast.
The plan is fluid. The topics change if listener feedback or topics of the day warrant a move. The planner simply gives me a basic framework.
The planner includes episode date, post type, category and headline. I also include call-to-action, offer and marketing info in the plan. It is flexible. You can customize it in a way that fits you best.
I took a few hours one Saturday and completed the planner.
Topic Development Worksheet
This helps me flush out the focus of the episode. Download it for free at PodcastTalentcoach.com.
Why is the topic relevant? How will you make the audience care? What emotion do you hope to stir? Where will you take the topic?
There are 11 total questions on the worksheet to help you focus and make the content as powerful as possible.
I use the topic from the planner to complete the worksheet. On a Saturday morning, I will usually complete 2 or 3 worksheets for upcoming episodes. These 3 worksheets take me about an hour to complete.
Show Outline
After I complete the worksheet, I create a show outline. These are the big points I want to hit during the episode. This will serve as the framework as I record.
After the outline is complete, I add any details that need to be included. This would include names, web addresses, examples, stories or anything else that will support my topic.
Each outline will take me about an hour to complete. So, it takes about 3 hours to complete all three outlines.
Overall, worksheets and outlines take me about four hours on a Saturday morning. Now I am ready to record.
Batch Recording
In order to avoid feeling like all of my time is eaten by the content creation process, I batch my recording whenever possible.
After creating my outlines, I am ready to record three episodes. This usually takes place on Sunday mornings for me. I head to the studio and knock out a batch of episodes.
To record my 30-minute podcast, it usually takes me about an hour. This includes recording, editing, processing and saving. Knocking out all three episodes usually takes me about three hours.
All in, writing, recording and editing three shows will take me about 7 hours of time. However, because I have batched the process, I am now set for three weeks. If you average it out, the time is just over two hours a week. The batch process frees up a lot of time to promote the show.
Post and Promote
Podcast Talent Coach podcast is posted late Wednesday night. I upload the show to Libsyn. Then, I post the Libsyn link, show notes, all website links and a graphic on my website. This will typically take me about an hour.
After the show is posted, I create my e-mail to all of the members on my list. I find ways to help them in addition to the content.
Making this e-mail free and valuable is critical. I want to be able to provide my members information they can put to work immediately. This includes tips, resources, links and free downloads.
The promotion of the episode is not the sole intent of the e-mail, though it is an important part.
To further promote the episode, I post the graphic I created for the post on Twitter and Facebook.
The promotion of the show requires another hour or so. That is two hours of posting a promoting each Wednesday night.
Now, I have given myself the rest of the week to engage on social media and comment on other shows. I can use the time to post to forums and appear on other podcasts. My coaching work with other podcasters also takes up time during the week.
Overall, my podcasting endeavors requires about ten hours a week on average. I keep the work concentrated, focused and batched where possible. This allows me more time to work on my business rather than in it. (See “The E-Myth Revisited“.)
This week, take time to assess your entire process. Where can you batch your process? How can you streamline your content creation?
FIND ALL OF MY RESOURCES HERE.
If you would like a Podcast Talent Coach workbook that will walk you through the entire batch of worksheets step-by-step, it is available in paperback or Kindle versions online at PodcastTalentCoach.com.
Next week, you’ll learn how to organize your podcast content to create focus with powerful, impactful content.
You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.
Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.
Do you fear sounding like a beginner? Do you have a desire to have stronger content?
On this episode, I want to help you learn to review and critique your own podcast in order to make your content stronger.
Reviewing your content on a regular basis is critical to your improvement. Learning how to critique yourself will help you sound more prepared, more organized and more like a true, professional broadcaster.
When I was beginning my broadcasting career, I feared people would see me as someone simply trying to play the part of a professional. I didn’t have any idea what I was doing, let alone how to get better.
I wanted to have more credibility. How could I get there? Over 20 years, I learned to review and critique my own show through coaches, consultants, articles, conferences and mentors.
My broadcasting career began while I was in college studying for my architecture degree. What started as something fun to make college money suddenly turned into a career.
Here I was, a college kid studying architecture, trying to pretend I was a professional broadcaster.
I had no idea what I was doing. It was all trial and error.
Now, 25 years later, I am trying to help podcasters avoid the growing pains I suffered learning by diving head first into the deep end and quickly figuring out how to swim.
Over the years, the mistakes I made were plenty. In radio, on-air talent learn to be better through a process called the aircheck session. These are some of the most painful meetings you could have if the coach doesn’t have a teacher’s heart.
My aircheck sessions were typically run by my Program Director of the radio station. I would bring a recording of my show. We would listen to the show together. Then, my Program Director would tell me everything I’m doing wrong.
Over the next week, I would try to improve. We would go through the entire process the following week.
Once I was able to find a Program Director who had my interests at heart, we began working on my strengths. We would find the area that were strong and try to do more of that.
This became a much more enjoyable process. Over the years, I learned to recognize those strengths myself. My show continuously got stronger. I was then able to critique myself on a regular basis.
By sharing my scars and battle wounds, along with the processes, tips and skills I have learned over the years, I can help you fast track the road to great podcasting.
Over the past 20 years, I have been coaching radio talent with their shows. I have helped many radio shows reach the top of the ratings. My show has also been at the top for years.
This success is built on a quality review and critique of each show. When you learn to recognize the powerful parts of your episode, the will naturally become part of your content over time.
What did you hope to accomplish on this show? Did you succeed?
Part of your show prep should have included a goal and focus for the episode. We walked through that in the episode about show prep. Did you accomplish that goal?
To create more engagement with your listeners, your show needs to take the next step. Where do you take your content from here? How do you continue the conversation? Did you succeed?
How did you make the audience care?
Engagement is created when you stir emotion. Why is much more powerful than how. How did you make them care during this episode?
Where were the “oh wow” moments?
You do not need to make your entire show amazing. You simply need a few memorable spots. Create a couple moments to make your listener say “oh wow”. This is how you get your listeners to share your content. Find the “oh wow” moments in your episode.
Where were the surprises?
Surprise and delight. That will keep listeners returning week after week. Surprise will bring a smile to your listener’s face. This is where your information becomes entertainment. Where were your surprises?
What were the powerful words you used?
Words are powerful when you make the right choice. Selecting smart words help draw pictures in the mind of your listener. Thick and lush evoke two different emotions. Sad and devastated spark two different visions. Find the words in your episode that jump out of the speakers.
What did you like about the show?
When you are interested, you are interesting. What parts impressed you?
What was memorable about the show?
Find the one thing that people will remember. Your listener will not remember the entire show. What is your one thing?
What worked?
Did you try something new in this episode? Did it work? Push yourself to create new content in every episode. Then evaluate that content to see if it was a success.
What could have been better?
This is the other end of the previous questions. Where can you improve?
How did you position the story from the listener’s point of view?
We often talk about “what’s in it for me”. Did you position your content from your listener’s point of view?
How did you include the listener, making them part of the story?
Great marketing is more like a mirror. Reflect the life of your listener. Make them forget they are listening to a podcast by putting them in the story. Where did you include your listener?
At what points did you introduce and reset the show/topic?
Resetting the show topic is important to maintain the flow of the show. If the theme of the show is improvement, and you have a few different topics that support that theme, reset before each topic. Help support the overall concept by reintroducing the theme that ties it all together. Where was that apparent in the show?
How did it appear you were prepared for every element?
Keep your notes close as you record your content. We discussed this in the episode about show prep. Did you sound prepared with every piece of information you presented?
What did you reveal about yourself to help foster the relationship with the audience?
We talk about doing business with those we know, like and trust. Where did you reveal things to allow your listeners to begin to know you?
What stories did you tell?
Stories are the best way to allow listeners to get to know you. When you tell stories, you reveal your thoughts, beliefs and values. Find the stories in your episode. Learn to recognize when stories can be included.
What details did you use that were spectacular and visual?
Details help stories come to life. Specifics make the story more believable. This is similar to powerful language. Where did you use vivid details?
Where did you use active language? (walking instead of walked, eating, not ate)
Listeners can see active language. You can see “walking”. It is difficult to see “walked”. If you want your content to come to life in the theater of the mind, use active language. Find some in your episode.
What crutches do you use that need to be removed?
Crutches are words you use too often to fill time. These are typically phrases you use when you cannot think of anything else to say. Where do you hear crutches in your episode?
What is your plan to make tomorrow better?
Find three things in the 19 questions that you can work on this week.
Do you find yourself struggling to find time to create your podcast every week? Next week, I am going to walk you through step-by-step on how I create my content.
I would love to help you with your podcast. E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.
Snow White – “Snow White” is a German fairy tale known across much of Europe and is today one of the most famous fairy tales worldwide. The Brothers Grimm published it in 1812 in the first edition of their collection Grimm’s Fairy Tales.
Pinocchio – The Adventures of Pinocchio is a novel for children by Italian author Carlo Collodi, written in Florence. The first half was originally a serial in 1881 and 1882, and then later completed as a book for children in February 1883.
Fantasia – The movie was developed around the Sorcerer’s Apprentice, a German poem written in 1797 by Johann Wolfgang von Goethe.
Bambi – Bambi, a Life in the Woods, was originally published in Austria in 1923 and written by Felix Salten.
Cinderella – This movie started as a European folk tale. The first written European version of the story was published in Naples, by Giambattista Basile, in 1634.
Peter Pan – Peter Pan is a character created by Scottish novelist and playwright J. M. Barrie in 1902. Peter Pan, or The Boy Who Wouldn’t Grow Up, premiered on 27 December 1904 in London.
Jungle Book – The Jungle Book (1894) is a collection of stories by English author Rudyard Kipling. The stories were first published in magazines in 1893–94.
Even recent, successful movies created by the Disney company after Walt Disney’s death were based on stories written by others.
Walt Disney’s upbringing shaped his view on life and influenced how he told stories. According to the book “Walt Disney – Hollywood’s Dark Prince” by Marc Eliot, Disney’s life on his boyhood Missouri farm was harsh. Though criticized for some inaccuracies, the book gives an interesting glimpse into Walt’s childhood.
Walt was unsure of his father, because he had no birth certificate. He grew up in a very strict household where his father often used corporal punishment. Walt’s mother usually did very little to tame the strick hand of the senior Disney.
Growing up on the farm, Walt and his brother Roy were required to do chores to earn their keep. They would attend school during the day while working on the farm at night. There was no time for friends. Walt’s friends were the various animals around the farm.
The life Disney experienced on the farm influenced his films.
If you study the films created by Disney while he was alive, you see the evidence. Most of Disney’s feature-length films contain a protagonist with no father figure. The main character is typically a lonely outcast who has made friends with various animals.
Think of your favorite Disney character. Does that individual fit that description?
Cinderella. Snow White. Mowgli in the Jungle Book. Peter Pan. It is all right there.
Disney didn’t write great stories. He told great stories as seen through his filter.
ELEMENTS OF GREAT STORIES
There are four elements to a great story. Those elements include a reason to care, revealing the details, a powerful resolution and asking “what else?”.
THE REASON
Give your listener a reason to care. Begin with an engaging introduction. “Tell me if I’m gonna go to Hell for this…” That is a hook.
What do you want the audience to feel? This is what your engaging introduction should answer.
Make your introduction human. Stir emotion. Make it humorous, compelling or tragic. My radio coach Bill McMahon often asked what I would like to make the audience laugh at, marvel at or better understand.
Find great emotions. They could include joy, sympathy, empathy, anger, tragedy, tenderness, humor, rage, patriotism or various other emotions.
Your introduction should pull your listener into the story. Give them a roadmap.
REVEAL THE DETAILS
Details are more believable than generalities. Details reveal specifics about your thoughts, beliefs and character. This is how listeners get to know, like and trust you and your business.
Use all 5 senses when telling your stories. We are creating visions in the theater of the mind of your listener.
POWERFUL RESOLUTION
Your powerful resolution is a strong reframing of introduction. This resolution puts a nice bow on the story.
WHAT ELSE?
Asking “What Else” will transform your show. This takes your story to a whole new level. This transforms your story from a nice piece of entertainment into an incredible piece of engaging content.
When you ask “what else”, you let your story lead to something bigger. This might mean continuing the conversation on your Facebook page. You may solicit questions or thoughts from your listeners. The story might lead into a bigger discussion or interview or skit.
The options are endless. Your “what else” step will also make your content unique and powerful.
HOW YOU CAN BE A STORYTELLER
You can become a powerful storyteller by funneling your content through your filter. Then, ask the four storytelling questions.
What is the engaging set up?
How will it be revealed in the story?
What is the resolution?
What else can you do with it?
Try a few stories in your episode this week. Let me know how it goes.
If you would like a Podcast Talent Coach worksheet to help you develop your stories, CLICK HERE.
Next week, how your stories activate the theater of the mind for your listeners. Plus, how to use theater of the mind to create more engagement.
You can find my podcast, information on my coaching services and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.
Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.
In a previous episode of Podcast Talent Coach, I shared 7 ways to drive listeners away from your show. One of the main points suggested you treat every listener as if they are new to the show. We need to continually feed the funnel.
Joshua Liston from The Deadly Arnold podcast was checking out my back catalog when he stumbled across this particular episode. He took exception to one of this particular suggestion.
THANKS
I must say that I do appreciate Joshua for a few reasons. One, he took the time to comment on the episode. Two, he was listening to my back catalog. Finally, he provided some great thought starters for a few solid episodes. I truly appreciate Joshua allowing me to use his comments to help others learn. That is what this community is all about.
In that episode, I suggested one way you drive listeners away is being the podcaster who assumes listeners have heard the show before.
POWERFUL INTRO
If you’re not explaining your podcast purpose each and every show, it will be difficult for new listeners to understand the show. Your audience will feel like they are joining a conversation in the middle. They will be lost.
In this episode, we review an episode that Josh mentions to see how they do these things.
I have selected one of the podcasts Joshua mentions with less of a national platform. Rather than tell you the name, we just jump in to see if the intro pulls you into the episode.
As we discuss the introduction and care for new listeners, please do not interpret this as something you should do at the expense of your current fans.
Sure, the content of your show must be great to keep listeners around. That is simply the price of admission. To get people to subscribe, create great content. That should go without saying.
In order to keep people engaged, you need to make them feel like they are part of the club. This is especially true for new listeners.
If you’re not explaining your podcast purpose each and every show, it will be difficult for new listeners to understand the show. Your audience will feel like they are joining a conversation in the middle. They will be lost.
SHOW REVIEW
In the episode of Back To Work that I review, the hosts do a few things to make new listeners feel included.
They use each other’s name often. This helps us get to know the voice.
We find out Merlin is 40-something and has a daughter. By sharing his life, his listeners get to know him.
Merlin refers to the same five books quite often. Though he is obviously well-read, these books seem to have been very influential on him.
Merlin knows a bit about Hollywood and the process of making movies. We learn this by his discussion of the four quadrant theory.
Merlin is a Democrat.
Merlin is confident and has little fear of speaking in front of large crowds. Dan admires that quality.
IS THE INTRO NECESSARY
On the other hand, there is no introduction to the show. I listened as a casual listener and had no idea what this show was about. There was nothing to suck me into the episode.
Merlin’s 355,000 Twitter followers along with his writings in magazines like Wired, Popular Science and MacWorld probably go a long way in driving listeners to the podcast.
Since the average podcast has roughly 170 downloads per episode, those podcasters cannot assume listeners will stick around if there is no clear benefit.
So many podcasters want to play the part before they are the part. It is similar to living like a billionaire before you are a billionaire. You cannot buy the Porsche, mansion and private plane until you make the money. You cannot act like a podcaster with 100,000 downloads until you earn the attention.
Make everyone feel welcome, supply your listeners with great content, and make your material unique. Then, watch your subscribers grow.
Focus On Current Or New Podcast Listener? – Episode 126
_
Photo Copyright : Eduardo Huelin/123rf.com
In a previous episode of Podcast Talent Coach, I shared 7 ways to drive listeners away from your show. We work so hard to gain listeners. Why would we ever drive them away.
But … should you focus on the current or new podcast listener?
Joshua Liston from The Deadly Arnold podcast was checking out my back catalog when he stumbled across this particular episode. He took exception to one of the 7 ways I mentioned.
In the episode, I suggested one way you drive listeners away is being the podcaster who assumes listeners have heard the show before.
If you’re not explaining your podcast purpose each and every show, it will be difficult for new listeners to understand the show. Your audience will feel like they are joining a conversation in the middle. They will be lost.
Have you ever felt left out of a conversation due to inside jokes. Two other people are chuckling about something, and you have no idea why. “Oh, it’s an inside joke” they say. Why aren’t you important enough to be in on the joke? Why is it inside only to them? Those situations are a bit offensive. You’re not included.
When you are not explaining your podcast, you are not allowing your listener to understand the nuances of your show. They won’t feel like part of the club. Your listener will not feel important or that you care about them. It is quite possible they will leave.
The opening of your podcast should explain the purpose of your podcast and let your listeners know exactly what to expect as if this is the first time they have ever heard the show. We discussed this in the past two episodes when we reviewed the importance of a strong introduction.
A well-crafted introduction serves two purposes.
First, it tells the brand new listener who is hearing the show for the very first time exactly what to expect from the show. You know exactly what is coming your way, even if you have never seen the show before.
Second, those that have heard the show before are confident that they are in the right place. Those regular listeners will find comfort in the opening of the show they hear each time they tune in. Fans will also feel like they are “in the know”. This is similar to singing the theme song of your favorite sitcom. As soon as you hear the first few notes of the theme song, you know you’re on the right channel. Your show intro should elicit the same response.
As you create your show open, treat it as if every listener is saying, “Hey, I’m new here. What’s going on?” You’ll make everyone comfortable as the show begins.
Here are Josh’s comments on the subject:
I must stress that I do disagree with your ideas around “making new listeners feel welcome in every episode”.
Personally I think Podcasters focus too much on their new audience and far too little on those already listening (which is where the majority of engagements and downloads come from for most podcasters). Those same things that you suggest make new/new listeners feel left out (in-jokes, personal references, etc) are the very things that make a longtime listener feel even more part of something special, and exclusive.
If you reference great podcasts that have stood the test of time “Back to Work” “Joe Rogan Exp” “Roderick on the Line” “Nerdist” “Hardcore History” “FOFOP & TOFOP” “Monday Morning Podcast” “Welcome to Night Vale” “We Are Alive” “The Dollop” “99% Invisible” “This American Life.” they make little to no intentional effort to morph their shows personality/language/individuality to entice new listeners to stay – they work incredibly hard in embracing their longtime listeners and fans though!
I can see how your ideas applies to a more transient audience like those of commercial radio stations where listeners are after the content within the content (music, news, score-lines, financial data etc) but for personality driven podcasting I think this falls purely into speculative theory.
-Joshua C. Liston
The Deadly Arnold BraveryByTheDay.com
In this episode, I offer my assessment of Joshua’s position.
Sure, the content of your show must be great to keep listeners around. That is simply the price of admission. To get people to subscribe, create great content. That should go without saying.
In order to keep people engaged, you need to make them feel like they are part of the club. This is especially true for new listeners.
If you’re not explaining your podcast purpose each and every show, it will be difficult for new listeners to understand the show. Your audience will feel like they are joining a conversation in the middle. They will be lost.
Should you focus on the current or new podcast listener? The answer is both.
Make everyone feel welcome, supply your listeners with great content, and make your material unique. Then, watch your subscribers grow.
Do you need help with your podcast? E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s see what we can do.
Episode 125 – Are You Losing Listeners? (Pitfalls Disrupting Podcast Traffic)
In a previous episode of Podcast Talent Coach, I shared 7 ways to drive listeners away from your show. We work so hard to gain listeners and podcast traffic. Why would we ever drive them away.
Joshua Liston from The Deadly Arnold podcast was checking out my back catalog when he stumbled across this particular episode. He took exception to one of the 7 ways I mentioned.
In the episode, I suggested one way you drive listeners away is being the podcaster who assumes listeners have heard the show before.
You work so hard to attract listeners to your podcast. Growing the audience is a constant challenge for most podcasters. You do all you can to bring more people to the party.
In this episode, we discuss the 7 ways you could be driving listeners away.
In the episode next week, I will dissect one of the episodes suggested by Joshua and demonstrate how successful podcasters eliminate these traps.
There are seven common mistakes podcasters make that drive listeners away. Here is a brief overview of each. See if you recognize these within your show.
THE PODCASTER WHO TALKS AT YOU
Great podcasters are not announcers. Great podcasters are conversationalists. If you can have a conversation with someone you cannot see nor hear, you have the ability to create a great podcast.
Instead of talking at me, talk to me and with me. Let’s have a conversation. You won’t be able to hear my responses. However, how many times have you found yourself talking back to the radio or podcast host? When the listener is responding out loud, you know the host has the ability to be conversational even when the other party isn’t present.
Be personal and talk to your listener, not at her.
THE PODCASTER THAT WASTES YOUR TIME
The wider the focus of your podcast, the better chance your topic will not interest me. It sounds counterintuitive. If you want more listeners, you need to narrowly focus your topic.
When you are too broad, your listener doesn’t know what to expect from your show.
Instead, pick a niche. Make it a tight focus. Pick the segment of your topic that you most enjoy and really focus there.
Focus is powerful. When you are focused, your audience knows exactly what to expect. Your focus builds loyalty, because you aren’t attracting listeners who have no interest in your niche. Since the niche is only focused on the slice of information that that interests your listener, your audience will almost always feel like you are delivering great content. You’ll never be wasting their time.
THE PODCASTER THAT DOES NOT MAKE YOU CARE
When you only deliver the what, the listener has no real reason to care. You are only providing information. Facts are lifeless. You must provide the why before you can provide the what. The “why” makes your listener care.
I’m sure you’ve heard the phrase “what’s in it for me?”
Your audience will be asking this very question every time they tune into your podcast.
When your audience knows what is in it for them, they begin to care. Making your listener care is the only way to get them to listen and more importantly come back again.
Provide the “why” early in the podcast. Make them care.
THE PODCASTER THAT DOES NOT GET YOU INVOLVED
A podcast that is only focused on the host quickly becomes a very lonely podcast. “Enough about me, let’s talk about me.” Listeners surely won’t stick around for that very long. If listeners are not involved, they feel like the host doesn’t care about them.
Make your listener the star. It is your show. You know where it is going. When listeners are involved in your show, it is always your job to lead your guest and make them the star.
Get your listener involved wherever you can. Provide opportunities for listeners to interact with you. Even if you receive very little feedback, the opportunity to do so will send the message to your listeners that you care. The opportunity for involvement goes a long way.
THE PODCASTER THAT DOESN’T HELP OTHERS
Focus on helping others.
Zig Ziglar had many great quotes. One of my favorites is, “You can have anything you want in life just as long as you help enough other people get what they want in life.” How true that is.
As you turn your information into engaging entertainment with your podcast, keep in mind that helping people is part of the foundation of a strong relationship. If you take, take, take, your relationship won’t last long. If you are there to give and help, you will develop friends for life.
Get what you want out of life. Focus on helping others.
THE PODCASTER THAT TRIES TOO HARD TO BE FUNNY
Many podcasters painstakingly try to be funny. Jokes are never funny when the joke teller tries too hard. The forced punchline is uncomfortable. The timing is off. He will lead with something like, “This is funny” or “Here’s a good one” or “You’ll love this”. If I’m going to love it, do you really need to tell me? Won’t I know I love it once you tell me?
The good news is you don’t have to be funny. Stop trying so hard. The funny will come. You are focused on the wrong thing.
Funny follows fun.
THE PODCASTER WHO ASSUMES LISTENERS HAVE HEARD THE SHOW BEFORE
If you’re not explaining your podcast purpose each and every show, it will be difficult for new listeners to understand the show. Your audience will feel like they are joining a conversation in the middle. They will be lost.
Have you ever felt left out of a conversation due to inside jokes. Two other people are chuckling about something, and you have no idea why. “Oh, it’s an inside joke” they say. Why aren’t you important enough to be in on the joke? Why is it inside only to them? Those situations are a bit offensive. You’re not included.
When you are not explaining your podcast, you are not allowing your listener to understand the nuances of your show. They won’t feel like part of the club. Your listener will not feel important or that you care about them. It is quite possible they will leave.
A well-crafted introduction serves two purposes.
First, it tells the brand new listener who is hearing the show for the very first time exactly what to expect from the show.
Second, those that have heard the show before are confident that they are in the right place.
As you create your show open, treat it as if every listener is saying, “Hey, I’m new here. What’s going on?” You’ll make everyone comfortable as the show begins.
Next week, we will review a podcast suggested by Joshua to learn how these ideas are put to use in the real world to attract listeners and drive podcast traffic.
As I mentioned in this episode …
On a recent episode of the Podcast Review Show that I do with Dave Jackson, we got into a discussion with a podcaster who struggles with the introduction of his show. This happens with so many hosts. How do you properly begin an episode? What are the important elements of a solid podcast introduction? What is the purpose?
We were talking with Doug Salamone of Mind Drippings podcast. On this particular episode, Doug was interviewing Taylor Pearson, author of “The End Of Jobs”. Doug said he was having trouble forming the introduction of his interviews.
Before you begin your show, determine what are you hoping people will take from the interview. What is the point?
Many podcast introductions are a waste of time. They host wanders into the episode rather than creating anticipation and setting up the content that is to come.
“Tell us a little about yourself, who you are and what you do.” It is such an overused first questions.
Do your homework. Know the important facts about your guest that support the topic. Provide those pieces of information right at the beginning. Then, hit the ground running with great questions.
Make your podcast introduction compelling. It should make your audience want to stick around for the payoff. I hear so many shows begin with their standard show open immediately followed by a bunch of housekeeping. Don’t waste the time of your audience. Your introduction should make a promise (tell the audience what to expect). You should then follow through on that promise (give them the content they expect).
Last week, we discussed the purpose of a strong podcast introduction. This week, I want to walk you through the steps of creating your powerful purpose and intriguing introduction.
What do you hope to make the audience laugh at, marvel at or better understand?
What is in it for them?
Why is the topic relevant to your audience?
How will you make the audience care?
What is the source of the topic?
How will the source lend credibility to the topic?
What do you find intriguing about the topic?
What emotion do you hope to stir?
In what context will the story be set?
Where will you take the topic? Where will the story go?
What details will you use?
What is the one thing you hope your listener will remember about you/your show?
Write the intriguing introduction to your topic.
Before you begin your show, determine what are you hoping people will take from the interview. What is the point?
Do your homework. Know the important facts about your guest that support the topic. Provide those pieces of information right at the beginning in your podcast introduction. Then, hit the ground running with great questions.
Do you need help with your podcast? E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s see what we can do.
The Critical Piece To A Great Podcast – Episode 123
On a recent episode of the Podcast Review Show that I do with Dave Jackson, we got into a discussion with a podcaster who struggles with the introduction of his show. This happens with so many hosts. How do you properly begin an episode? Why are the important elements of a solid introduction? What is the purpose?
We were talking with Doug Salamone of Mind Drippings podcast. On this particular episode, Doug was interviewing Taylor Pearson, author of “The End Of Jobs”. Doug said he was having trouble forming the introduction of his interviews.
START WITH WHY
Here is Doug’s first question: “Taylor, why don’t you introduce yourself a little bit more, and start off at the beginning with what brought you to decide to write this book and I’ll just let you roll with it and we’ll get the questions going.”
Doug needs to make us care about the author as he introduces him BEFORE he brings Taylor on the show. Then, Doug needs to make us care about the subject.
Before you begin your show, determine what are you hoping people will take from the interview. What is the point.
When you use, “Tell us about yourself”, it sounds like you didn’t do your homework.
The show is about big ideas. What is the big idea in this episode? The world of jobs is coming to an end. Start there.
Later in the interview, Doug asks, “What are people to do … if the opportunities are limited … and every single year we have thousands upon thousands of people graduating from universities across the country … what are people to do to protect themselves from becoming obsolete in this current economy that we’re seeing everyday increasing where jobs are being eliminated or being exported to countries across the world?”
This is the essence of the conversation. Let’s start here.
Many introductions are a waste of time. They host wanders into the episode rather than creating anticipation and setting up the content.
“Tell us a little about yourself, who you are and what you do.” It is such an overused first questions.
Do your homework. Know the important facts about your guest that support the topic. Provide those pieces of information right at the beginning. Then, hit the ground running with great questions.
Make the introduction of your show compelling. It should make your audience want to stick around for the payoff. I hear so many shows begin with their standard show open immediately followed by a bunch of housekeeping. Don’t waste the time of your audience. Your introduction should make a promise (tell the audience what to expect). You should then follow through on that promise (give them the content they expect).
When a show begins with, “I’ll show you how to make a million dollars in 4 easy-to-understand steps”, followed by, “But first, let me plug 14 things and chat a bit about why I didn’t post an episode last week”, you are losing your audience. Your fan tuned in to hear your secrets, not your problems.
If you have housekeeping notes to pass along, sprinkle them within the show throughout the content. Lead with your strongest material. Housekeeping is not it.
Your introduction should set up your podcast. It should be an intriguing introduction that tells the listener exactly what the podcast is all about. What will I get when I listen? It doesn’t matter whether your podcast is 10 minutes or 60 minutes long. You need to tell the listener what is to come.
“Welcome to Podcast Talent Coach Podcast. My name is Erik K. Johnson. This is where we help you transforming your information into engaging entertainment so we can turn your podcast into powerful, profitable relationships.”
With that quick introduction, I told you exactly what to expect. You know the name of my podcast. You know the name of the host. You know the goal we are setting out to accomplish. I’ve also put you in the mix by referencing your dreams and how my podcast will help you. In those brief seconds, I’ve given you who, what, when and why.
That content should be followed immediately by a creative tease of this particular show. It might be something like, “We will help Steve figure out how to gently end a bad interview. Shelly asks about incorporating a call-to-action without making the show sound like an infomercial. And finally, we will hear a clip for the ‘The Golden Garden’ podcast and help Chris increase the energy and forward momentum in the show. Let’s get to it. First up …” This goes right into the show content. We start delivering on the promise made in the introduction. The show is moving forward.
If I said, “Before we get to it, let me explain the new look of my website”, I would only be relevant to a small portion of my audience. Who cares about my new layout? That would assume first that most of my audience has visited my website prior to this show, and second that they can’t find their own way around the new layout. That’s a pretty big assumption. If is important enough to include, put it at the end, or somehow incorporate the information into an answer.
Don’t waste the time of your audience. Make your introduction intriguing and get to the content immediately.
MAKE THEM CARE
I’m sure you’ve heard the phrase “what’s in it for me?”
Your audience will be asking this very question every time they tune into your podcast. Your introduction better tell your listener exactly how your topic will affect them. You need to hook them right at the beginning with an intriguing introduction. If you don’t hook them early, they will be gone in search of something more captivating.
When your audience knows what is in it for them, they begin to care. Making your listener care is the only way to get them to listen and more importantly come back again.
Lead with an intriguing introduction.
This is true for your podcast in general as well as each individual topic. Your intriguing introduction should hook your audience, let them know exactly what to expect, and allow them to enjoy the story.
What do you hope your audience will take away from this particular discussion? Your introduction should spell it out. It should set up what is to come.
If your goal is to make your listener laugh at your misfortune over the weekend, lead with it. “This weekend was so disastrous, I wouldn’t have had time for anything else to go wrong even if I tried.” The audience will now have time to enjoy the vivid details of your horrible weekend rather than trying to figure out what point you are trying to make.
When you begin your story with the details, your listener spends energy trying to determine the point you are trying to make. They are trying to figure out what the story is about.
Have you ever been stuck listening to someone tell a story while you’re thinking, “Will he ever get to the point?” That is what we are trying to avoid.
Here is an example of a story you might hear. “This weekend we went to the mall. It was just the two of us. We were looking for a gift for my dad.” Are we telling a story about finding gifts? Is this story just recapping the weekend? Maybe it is about my dad. You don’t know. I haven’t told you. There is no lead to this story.
To hook your audience and allow them to truly enjoy the story, lead with an intriguing introduction.
EMOTIONALLY POWERFUL?
A successful podcast is built on a strong relationship with the listener. It could be called a tribe as defined by Seth Godin in his book of the same name. The strong relationships with your listeners begin to develop your brand. You can then monetize your brand and associated relationships with an effective call-to-action. But it starts with the brand.
Powerful brands are more than just recognizable names. Powerful brands are full of emotion. A brand is a collection of perceptions, creating emotional connections, while consistently delivering on a promise. The more powerful the emotional connection, the more powerful the brand.
Take a moment to think of some very powerful brands and the associated emotions of the rabid fans of those brands. Nike. Volkswagen. Star Trek. Starbucks. Apple. Harley Davidson. Fans will go out of their way to interact with their favorite brand. These brands are unique, because they create powerful emotions within their fans that are not found in ordinary brands.
Ordinary brands lack emotion. Keds. Buick. Battlestar Galactica. Dunkin’ Donuts. Hewlett Packard. Honda. The powerful emotions are not present for most people in these brands.
An amazing book entitled “The Power of Cult Branding” by Matthew W. Ragas and B. J. Bueno describes the seven golden rules to cult branding. Emotion is the key to all seven. Social Groups, Courage, Fun, Human Needs, Contribution, Openness, and Freedom. All emotional. None are functional. It’s not the best, biggest, brightest, loudest, or #1 product. Cult brands are focused on emotion, not hype.
If you want to turn your podcast into a powerful brand that you can monetize with a strong call-to-action, stir emotion every time.
Next week, we will walk through the steps in creating a powerful introduction. I’ll give you a step-by-step process.
Do you need help with your podcast? E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s see what we can do.
Content creators struggle with topic ideas. It is natural. There are days when few ideas are coming to mind.
The other day, I was listening to the great motivational speaker Les Brown. He says speaking is natural. You don’t hear of people facing speaker’s block. Why do people run into writer’s block?
You simply need to find topics that pique your interest.
These topics could stir any sort of emotion within you. They could make you laugh, cry, or simply say hmmm.
The good news is that you can find topics everywhere. We tend to limit ourselves to our niche or genre. Expand. Topics are everywhere.
YOUR INTEREST
During my 25-year radio career, I’ve attend many, many seminars on creating great radio. One session eventually led to a coaching relationship with Bill McMahon.
Bill had been coaching radio talent for quite some time. He had coached Jeff & Jer in San Diego along with many others. He had a great process for creating great radio.
In our sessions, Bill would always encourage us to determine what we hoped to make the audience laugh at, marvel at or better understand. Then, start there.
Before we could get there, we needed to find the topic.
TOPIC GENERATION
The idea for topic generation came from another radio mentor of mine. Dan O’Day is probably more famous in radio circles for creating great advertising. However, he did a radio session one time on finding great topics from everyday articles. Any article could spur a topic.
Find any magazine or blog or paper. Scan through it until a headline catches your eye. As you read the article, highlight any sentence or word that captures your attention. When you are finished reading the article, find the one sentence or word that grabs you most.
With this sentence or word, spend three minutes brainstorming and freeform writing about that sentence. Set a timer. Write everything that comes to mind. Put it all on the paper. Write instead of typing. It will let the ideas come more freely.
At the end of the three minutes, look through the words on the sheet. Find the one idea that really jumps out that can be turned into a great podcast topic.
Use articles out of everyday periodicals.
PLAN IT
The third tip came from internet marketer Ryan Diess. He suggest creating a planner that includes publish date, post type, your category, your offer and the headline. Ryan offers a list of over 40 post types. You can find that link HERE.
Finally, I’ve created a worksheet that will help you ask questions to develop your topic. Once you find the sentence that piques your interest, use the worksheet to flush it out.
EXAMPLES
Here is an example of how I would use this method in my podcast.
USA Hockey – “The Meek Shall Inherit the Ice” p20 June/July 2013
“When the nation’s top quarter of college hockey teams hook up at a neutral site, only one gets to go home with a shiny gold trophy” – What makes a winning podcast. – Dissect the winners of the podcast awards – What industry events are available to learn?
“Going back to the 1950’s, when college hockey was a relatively new thing…” – Where podcasting began. – How podcasting grew from broadcasting and the theater. – What makes great theater? – What can we learn from those that came before?
“But, every now and then, a smaller school … would crash the party.” – What can we learn from some of the fastest growing podcasts? – Review some new, undiscovered podcasts. – Review a show on the show.
1. Why is the topic relevant to your audience?
2. How will you make the audience care?
3. What is the source of the topic?
4. How will the source lend credibility to the topic?
5. What do you find intriguing about the topic?
6. What emotion do you hope to stir?
7. In what context will the story be set?
8. Where will you take the topic? Where will the story go?
9. What details will you use?
10. What is the one thing you hope your listener will remember about you/your show?
Finally, write the intriguing introduction to your topic.
Don’t settle for the first idea. Work and mold your topic.
It is easy to do an interview exactly like you do every other interview. Just like you’ve heard everyone do every other interview. Unfortunately, it will sound like every other interview.
It is easy to approach a topic just like everyone else.
Do something different. Stand out. Make your show different. Find new questions. Find ways to ask questions differently. Gain attention by being unique.
If you are discussing an article, do something different. If most hosts would simply read the article and comment, zig when they are zagging. Grab the phone and call the subject of the article. Interview the author. Act it out. Create a parody of it that is so over-the-top that it becomes memorable. Find that unique way to rise above the rest.
If you continue to settle for the first idea when presenting an idea, you’ll keep delivering typical content. We want to make you memorable. We want you to stand out and get noticed. When your content is vanilla and just like everyone else, you become wallpaper that nobody notices. You also become easy to replace.
Push yourself. Brainstorm until you find something that is great. Then, run with it and make it engaging and memorable. Don’t settle for the first idea.
Do you need help with your podcast? E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s see what we can do.
9 Uncommon Books That Shaped My Podcast – Episode 120
We are all looking for great books and inspiration. In the online business space, the same books are often recommended and discussed. Godin. Ries & Trout. Think & Grow Rich. Those are the must-reads to be in the game.
Lesser known books can often offer powerful information and inspiration. They can also help you stand out from the crowd.
When I started in radio 25 years ago, I would read all I could about radio and business. I read the big books of the industry to keep up with the crowd. Those books were the center of many discussions at industry gatherings.
After I began programming my first radio station in Lincoln, Nebraska in 1995, I quickly realized keeping up with the crowd wasn’t going to put me ahead of the crowd.
To win, we need to think differently. To get ahead, we need to be willing to do what others will not. Find motivation and inspiration where others haven’t looked.
As you are trying to create a podcast that is unique and entertaining, one that will stand out and attract a following, take a chance on a few new ideas. Find a few nuggets that keep your heart pumping. Be a champion for a different way of thinking.
Here are few books that have inspired me. These books are not the typical fare you hear mentioned in every keynote speech. You won’t find these titles at the center of cocktail party discussions … unless you make it so.
However, these books have useful information you can put to work in your podcast and online business today. You can use these ideas to spark your creativity.
Find one book that looks exciting and inspiring to you. Give it a read. Maybe you’ll find your own wonderful spark of an idea.
This book covers the 7 rules of cult branding. As examples, the book explores the success of brands like Star Trek, Oprah Winfrey, Apple, Jimmy Buffett and Linux.
I love this book, because it explains the characteristics of brands that truly stand out from the crowd. These brands have created cult-like followings. The book gets me excited about what is possible.
Valerie dives into the characteristics of successful radio. These principles can also be applied to podcasting. From Valerie, I learned to never be boring. She says, “There is no such thing as too long, only too boring.”
This book provides the steps to take to create your business. The process begins with selecting your area of expertise and ends with finding promotional partners and repeating the process.
It is an easy read. The book is the foundation of Brendon’s teachings. His work has really shaped my online approach.
If you coach, this book will help you build your process of finding clients.
This book was first recommended by Dan Miller of 48Days.com. Alan provides a great process to finding clients, converting leads and turning your coaching into a real business.
This book is full of great tips on management, overcoming obstacles, focus and competition. The lessons come from the actual events in the life of Ulysses S. Grant. It is an incredibly inspirational read.
This book discusses why start-ups fail, how to make sales and how to keep customers. Norm created a few businesses in New York City. He was also a contributor to INC. magazine. The lessons in the book come from his real-world experience and not simply theory.
This is probably the most popular book on this list. For the small business owner, this is a must-read. Learn to work on your business and not simply in your business. The lesson is fundamental for small business success.
This book shows you how to think differently to create quick cash, and then turn that cash into more cash. The lessons require action and courage. The book is creative in its storytelling.
I hope these books give you a bit of inspiration as you continue to grow your business. There should be at least one piece to spark some creativity for you.
Let me know what one you use. E-mail me at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.
If you are like me, and many others in the online space, you struggle with pricing. You don’t want it to be too low and leave money on the table. On the other hand, you don’t want it to be too high and not make any sales.
So, where do you set the price?
Pricing is tricky. There is a lot of art to setting your price. Most is trial and error.
There really is no “correct” price. Price is determined by supply and demand. The price of anything is that point where a seller is willing and able to sell AND a buyer is willing and able to buy. It is a continuum.
If a seller is not making much money on a sale, she will focus on another area of business that is creating more profit. If she is a public speaker on self defense and earns $2,500 per speaking opportunity on the weekends, she is creating decent income.
If she then creates an online course teaching other women self-defense and creates sales of $3,000 per week with an hour of work online marketing the course, she may opt to do less speaking and more work online.
Her speaking gigs require her to find clients, travel to the location, give the presentation for an hour or two (depending on dinner and other presentations), possibly spend the night, travel home and miss time with her family. That is a lot to give up in order to make $2,500 when an hour a night on her schedule could earn $500 more.
People may be willing and able to buy her speaking at$2,500. However, she may not be willing to sell it for that. She may do a few speeches. It may just be less frequent. If her price increases to $5,000, the decision may be different.
HOW DO YOU DECIDE?
When I began coaching podcasters, I came to that very problem. I was in that place so many entrepreneurs find themselves. A price needed to be set for my services.
What would podcasters be willing and able to pay that I would be willing to accept?
In this episode, I take you step-by-step through the process I took to set the pricing for my podcast coaching.
So, how do you set your price.
OVERVIEW
First, ask your customers what they will buy. This could be a survey of your list. You could simply study the market and determine what they are already buying. Find a few people that could use your help and ask five or ten of them.
Next, determine what problem you are solving for your audience. People buy benefits and solutions. People don’t buy mops. They buy clean floors. Solve a problem they know they have.
Then, price on value. Know what value you have to offer. Your experience, knowledge and ability all play into your value. This will determine why it should be you rather than anyone else.
You can now set a price by looking at the market and seeing what they charge. Buy a few similar products to see what is included if necessary. You want your price to be competitive, but not necessarily the cheapest.
Your price does not need to be less than everyone else. It should probably be more expensive than others in order to stand out. Make it a great value for the price to justify being at the top end.
If you tell your audience what to do, you can charge a low price. If you teach them how to do, you are able to set a mid-level price. When you do it for the, you can be at the high end.
To be at the top of the range, go all out and solve all of their problems. Be a full-service machine. Prove the value and then add a bit more.
Most importantly, have a sales process. Know how you will attract people to your process. Define how you will demonstrate your value and benefits. Give your audience a ton of value, then the opportunity to buy.
I am not guaranteeing you will make money. I am not promising you that you will get rich, or even make a dime for that matter. I do not know you or your abilities.
I am saying this process worked for me. You may find a few helpful tips here that could help you in some way.
If you show your visitors the value of your product or service while giving them more than they expected, there is a good chance they will buy.
As in my example, there are times when the price doesn’t make sense. This is when you need to review your process.
Is the issue the price tag as it was with my program at the beginning?
Does the roadblock appear due to the structure of the product or service as it did with my 12-week program rather than weekly calls?
Are your clients looking for a product or service tailored to their needs, like my calls ever other week?
Rather than launching your product to thousands of people at one time, launch to a few. See if they are interested at that price and value. Gather some feedback. Make adjustments. Launch again to a few more people.
As you adjust your sales process, you will find a spot where clients are willing and able to buy your product at a price you are willing and able to sell. If you are not selling enough, add more value or lower the price. If you are selling too much, raise the price.
Tinker until it feels right. There is no correct price. There is only a price with which you are comfortable and that pleases your audience.
How Radio And Podcasting Are The Same – Episode 118
The podcast “elite” will sometimes say, “This isn’t radio, this is podcasting. It’s different here.”
Well, I have news for you. Podcasting and radio are more alike than some will admit. You could benefit a bit by recognizing the similarities and borrowing the best practices.
There are many ways that radio and podcasting are the same.
The Same …
1. Same Tools
Both create with audio equipment.
This one is pretty obvious. Both are creating shows using a mic and other audio equipment.
The different ways the equipment is used makes it art. One sculptor may work with wood when another works with rock. Both are still sculptors and artists.
2. Same Approach
Both sit in a room alone trying to entertain people they cannot see.
It sounds crazy when you say it out loud. Both podcasters and broadcasters sit alone in a room talking with people they can neither see nor hear. Both try to predict the reaction of the listener while creating the entertainment.
3. Same Conversation
Both have real conversations with the listener.
Being authentic is critical to success of both podcasters and listeners. Both try to build knowledge and trust with the audience in order to develop a relationship.
4. Same Visions
Both create images in the mind of the listener.
When you tell great stories, your listener gets to know you. This is part of the “know, like and trust” philosophy of doing business.
Stories with vivid details allow the listener to develop images in the theater of the mind. These stories allow her to enjoy the story in her own way.
5. Same Experience
Both are individual activities.
When two people watch the same video, little is left to the imagination. When the same two people hear audio, each will develop individual images in their mind.
No two images will be identical. Listening is an individual activity.
6. Same Connection
Both try to make a one-on-one connection and create a following.
The podcaster and broadcaster are both trying to create a tribe for their content. If you are not trying to grow your audience, you will eventually be talking to yourself.
7. Same Episodes
Both produce episodic content that keeps listeners returning.
This is especially true in talk radio. Content is regularly produced by both podcasters and broadcasters. Those episodes of content build upon each other to create an ongoing show.
8. Same Goal
Both hope to capitalize on the attention using a strong call-to-action.
Content is created by both in order to attract an audience. Once the audience is built, both try to activate that audience with a call-to-action.
The goal may be monetization, support or simply returning for the next episode. Either way, both hope to move a group of people.
9. Both Can Interact
Both are able to interact in real time.
This wasn’t true a few years ago. However, now that technology has come such a long way, both podcasters and broadcasters can interact with the audience in real time.
Podcasters chat with their listeners in real time using phone systems, Google hangout, chat rooms, and other methods. No longer is this feature limited to broadcasters.
… And Sometimes Different
There are a few features of podcasting that differs from broadcasting.
1. Podcasters Time Shift
Podcasting can be time shifted. This can be a benefit over broadcasting.
Podcast listeners can enjoy the show anytime they would like. They do not need to be next to the radio at a given time in order to hear their favorite show.
This is a feature and not necessarily something that makes podcasting inherently different from broadcasting. When we are talking about the art and goal of the audio, this is just a different way of delivering.
2. Podcasters Benefit From The Beginning
Podcast listeners start at the beginning. Mark Ramsey did a great session on this at New Media Expo 2015.
Some broadcast listeners join the show at the beginning and some join in the middle of the show. Podcast listeners all start at the beginning of the episode.
Rarely will a podcast listener download a show, scroll through to the 17:00 mark and begin listening there unless there is a specific direction to do so.
3. Podcasters Can Niche Down
Podcasting can afford to be more niche. By nature of the medium, broadcasting must be mass appeal. This is definitely a benefit for podcasting.
4. Podcasting Is Inclusive
Almost anyone can create a podcast. Podcasting requires a minimal investment. This makes it easy for most to get involved. There is no limit to the number of podcasts that can be created.
Getting on the radio requires getting through the gate keeper. Your other option is to buy your own station. Both are quite difficult.
Again, advantage podcasting.
The nine similarities between the two formats are largely foundational. The essence of the art is the same. The goal, methodology and tactics are identical between the podcasting and radio.
Podcasting enjoys a few benefits over broadcasting. The few differences are hardly enough to proclaim podcasting much different than radio.
I’d love to know what you think. E-mail me anytime at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.
(These tools can be found on the resource page at PodcastTalentCoach.com. Most links on that page are affiliate links. I receive a variable commission for all purchases made using those links. If you would like to support the show, please take advantage of some of these resources.)
I have recently received questions from listeners looking to launch a podcast in 2016. I thought this would be a good time to review the tools I use to in my business. This includes the tools I use to create my podcast, website and newsletter. We will also review the resources I use to learn, grow and develop.
This episode is an encore presentation of an earlier episode you may have missed. If you did catch it last time, let this serve as inspiration and a little refresher.
I have been using most of these resources for at least 24 months. Some have been used longer. A couple tools are more recent. For the most part, I have been a long-time user and have been quite happy with each of them. That is why I feel confident recommending them to you. You can find affiliate links to most of these online at PodcastTalentCoach.com.
COACHING RESOURCE
This list doesn’t include much technical information, such as mixers, processors and software. I leave that to Dave Jackson at the School of Podcasting. He is the tech expert that helps me. If you are looking for help setting up the studio, Dave is your guy. He leads off my resources.
TECHNICAL TOOLS
A few technical tools from my studio include my mic, my mac and a few web tools.
My studio mic is an ElectroVoice RE20. This runs about $450. It is a high quality mic. This mic is probably much more than a beginning podcaster needs. However, if you are serious about podcasting, this is a great mic.
My backup mic is a Audio-Technica ATR-2100. It is a quality USB mic for the money. This costs around $60.
For editing, I use Adobe Audition in the studio. I will occasionally use Garage Band for quick projects or when I’m traveling.
I use a Mac Book Pro 13” for the flexibility. I cost me $1,200.
My mp3s are tagged with ID3 Editor from PA Software. The price tag was $15.
My URLs were purchased through GoDaddy. The price really depends on the URL. You can usually find a deal. After the initial deal, I pay about $45/year.
I have a website on Homestead and one on Host Gator with WordPress. Homestead is a stand alone site builder. Host Gator just hosts my WordPress site. Homestead is $20/month. HostGator is $135/year, just over $11/month. WordPress is free.
On my website, I use Paypal for my transactions. Most of my providers accept it. Plus, they have a card option for my customers.
I use Aweber for my newsletter. It is $196/year. Just over $16/month. I looked at Mail Chimp. Both are very similar services if you have a list under 5,000.
Canva.com is a decent resource for creating graphics. They have a decent photo library as well. Most photos are about $1/photo.
I self-published my workbook through Create Space, an Amazon company. You simply upload a .pdf. It is fairly simple to use. Not very expensive. They also sell the workbook through Amazon and converted it to Kindle.
I am in the process of creating a membership portal through WishList Member. $297. They have solid training videos. I am not yet complete with this one.
LEARNING TOOLS
Dan Miller and 48Days.com is where it all started. He has great tools to help you find your passion and the work you love.
Internet Business Mastery is a great podcast and course that have helped me refine my business focus. Jeremy & Jason have been there and done it.
Michael Hyatt has a great membership site with Platform University. It is based on his book Platform, which is a must read as you develop your podcast. There is great learning inside the community. He only opens membership a couple times a year for enrollment. I got in early on this one and haven’t looked back since.
Audible.com has turned my car into a mobile classroom. I am usually listening to a couple books a month on top of the podcasts. You can get a free book when you use my affiliate link on the resources page.
Most of all, I cannot say enough about Dave Jackson and the School of Podcasting. If you want to learn the technical nuts and bolts, check out his course, membership and training tools.
You can find affiliate links to most of these online at PodcastTalentCoach.com. I would appreciate the support if you choose to use any of these links and great products.
I would love to help you with your podcast. E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.
7 Thanksgiving Concepts To Drive Your Business And Podcast – Episode 116
As this episode is posted, it is Thanksgiving in the United States. It is a day of the year when we pause to give thanks to those treasures in our lives. Whether you are celebrating in America or just working another day somewhere else in the world, I would like to thank you for all you have done for me by simply being part of this community. Thank you.
This week, I would like to share with you 7 Thanksgiving concepts to drive your business and podcast any day of the year.
1. New Relationships
Take a few minutes today to plant the seeds of new relationships. Reach out to five people you do not know, and thank them for what you have learned from them. This could be authors, podcasters, business people, pastors or any other people who have given you a bit of their knowledge.
Only thank them. There is no hidden agenda. We are simply reaching out to give thanks.
If the quick note leads to a relationship down the road, that would be great. If it generates no response, that is ok as well. Our only goal is to give. Send good vibes into the universe. It will make you feel good. You never know what might come back.
2. Old Relationships
Next, take a few minutes to strengthen the relationships you have already built. Reach out to five people you know, and thank them for enriching your life.
This is a great opportunity to rekindle a few relationships that have gone dormant. Send a note to just say thanks. It will make the day of the recipient.
We all enjoy hearing that we have influenced someone in some way. It gives us validation. When you take time to thank someone for all they have done for you, the good will created by the note will go a long way.
The new conversation may also lead to new opportunities. Do not expect it. But, you never know what might happen.
3. What Gets Scheduled Gets Done
Use a day off to plan the next 12 months. This year, Thanksgiving is 36 days from the end of the year. It is a great time to look forward.
It doesn’t necessarily need to be the beginning of the year to set your goals. Your 12-month plan can begin at any point in time. Don’t let the calendar dictate your actions. Use today to look forward and plan.
As the old saying goes, what gets scheduled gets done. A goal without a deadline is only a dream. Set your goals for the next 12 months, and then add deadlines. Schedule the time.
Set goals at various lengths. Define big, 12-month goals. Decide what you will accomplish each month. Determine what steps need to happen each week to reach those goals. Let each goal build toward the next bigger milestone.
4. Great Offers
Black Friday and Cyber Monday bring great deals. This is especially true in the online world. It seems everyone has a great deal.
Just as with goals, the calendar shouldn’t dictate your strategy. It doesn’t need to be the day after Thanksgiving in order to make a great offer to your tribe.
Create something of tremendous value, add a little more, and offer it to your community. Thank your followers for being part of the group. As a “thank you”, present your great offer.
You do not need to wait for a particular day of the year to be generous to your tribe. Make your great offer today.
5. Fill Your Heart
Take pause and ponder all of the things in your life for which you are thankful. Fill your heart. Be grateful.
When we consider all of the wonderful things in our lives, it will naturally make us feel better. In business, we tend to think of all the things that need to be fixed. The items on our “to do” list. We look for the ways we can improve. We focus on our weaknesses.
Take time to focus on the treasures present in your life. It is wonderful that we have access to the internet. That we can determine our own future with the effort we put forth. We have amazing gifts in our lives. Count your gifts.
Let’s fill our hearts by giving thanks for all we have. It will relieve some of the stress we bring upon ourselves. Life will be a little happier.
6. Walk Away Wednesday
We need to take time away from the “to do” list and devote it to a bit of housekeeping. This is a concept I learned from radio great Mike McVay.
In radio, we tend to get too close to the product to be able to truly evaluate the quality. We live with the product every day. Knowing too much about the station handcuffs a program director.
The same is true with your podcast. We get so focused on the next episode that we forget to review the content we have already published. The website needs to be cleaned up. The autoresponder needs to be freshened. We never take time.
Mike created “Walk Away Wednesday” for radio program directors. It was a day to get away from the radio station and just listen. We would listen to everything to ensure it had a purpose. The goal was to review the radio station from top to bottom.
Take a day to review everything about your podcast and business. Look over the website. Check all of the links. Proofread the copy. Sign up for your newsletter. Make your “about” page forward-facing. Ensure everything works as it should.
Check your iTunes description to ensure it is still valid. Look over your Facebook “about” section. Listen to your podcast like a listener. Check the podcast on various devices. Review for quality in every aspect of your podcast and business.
7. Give
Pretty simple. Help someone. As Zig Ziglar always said, “You can have anything you want as long as you help enough other people get what they want.”
It is true. Giving does something to us. Giving makes us more attractive as a person. Serve people.
We do not give expecting something in return. We are giving, because it is the right thing to do. Giving helps society. We have been given gifts to share with the world.
Send out the good vibes. You never know what you will get in return.
Take time this week to put a few of these concepts to use with your podcast and business. You never know what good things might come your way in the next year.
Thank you for being part of this community. I truly value the time you give me every week. My hope is that you find value and some useful nugget in the content I provide in each episode.
I would love to help you with your podcast. E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.
This week, I would like to share a few podcasting tips and tricks I have learned over my 25 years of broadcasting. These tips will help you with your interviews, editing, voice and sound quality.
1. Stronger Interviews
Would you like to make your interviews stronger?
There are times when your guest is not great at thinking on their feet. Sometimes it takes a couple sentences before she really hits her stride with her answer to our question.
To make your interview content stronger, prepare the guest ahead of time. Tell your guest to feel free to pause a few seconds to gather his thoughts before he begins to answer the question. You will edit out the silence before the podcast goes live.
This little instruction will help your guest prepare much stronger answers. And, it will only take a little editing on your part.
Next, tell your guest it is perfectly acceptable to stop and begin his answer again. If your guest feels the answer isn’t as strong as he had hoped, he can pause 10 seconds for an easy edit and then begin again.
This instruction will also provide some peace of mind for your guest. Simply knowing he can start again can sometimes calm his nerves and help him provide stronger answers in the first place.
2. Land Great Guests
Land great interview guests for your show by positioning your podcast using the benefits to the guest.
Many podcasters send the invite e-mail to potential guests explaining how the audience of the show will LOVE the info the guest will share. That fact is only a third of the puzzle … and NOT the most important to your new friend.
Just like most everyone in life, your guest want to know what is in it for them. Lead with the headline. How will your show benefit your guest?
Once you have established the benefit to your potential guest, you can then share how the interview will benefit you and your audience.
If you want to land a great guest, make your show as appealing as possible to your potential guest by leading with the prize for them. Lead with the headline.
3. Better Interview Answers
If you want to get more from your guest and get deeper answers to your interview questions, do not be afraid of the pregnant pause. Many hosts panic as soon as the conversation stops.
Let the silence sit there for a few seconds. Just as you typically jump in when you hear silence, your guest will do the same. If you do not talk, your guest will speak up. It is natural.
If the pause gets too long, you can always edit the audio. Take the silence out if it sounds unnatural.
If your guests provides a short answer, or you would like more, don’t talk. Allow that pregnant pause to encourage them to talk more. You will be surprised by the effectiveness of the pause. Not talking is a learned skill just like talking is a talent.
4. Have More Energy
If you want to better project your voice and sound like you have more energy, stand up while you record.
Many podcast “coaches” will recommend that you sit down, because it will help you sound more natural. These teachers unfortunately do not understand how the human voice works.
In order to project your voice, your diaphragm needs to work properly. Your larynx needs to be fully open. Your vocal chords need to have a sufficient oxygen supply.
When you stand, your entire airway opens to the extent that it can fully function. Your diaphragm can send sufficient air to your vocal chords. Your vocal chords will then need to do less work. Your voice will not get tired as quickly. You can project your voice with less effort.
When you sit, your abdomen is squashed. Your diaphragm does not have enough room to move properly. You then need to force the air through your vocal chords to create sound. In the end, your voice becomes tired.
Have you ever been at a cocktail party or networking event and found yourself saying, “Hey, let’s sit down so I can sound more conversational with you”? I didn’t think so.
If you believe you cannot sound natural and conversational while standing, just smile and stop yelling. Sitting has nothing to do with having a conversation.
5. Stop The Pop
If you want to avoid popping your Ps, talk across the microphone at a 30-45 degree angle rather than directly into it.
Your Ps pop when the burst of air from your mouth attacks the diaphragm inside the mic. When you talk across the mic rather than directly into it, the air doesn’t hit the mic so hard. This will keep your Ps clean.
6. Like Your Voice More
We often do not like the sound of our own voice. There are many reasons, many of them physiological.
There is one trick that will help your voice sound less bouncy, less singsongy, and less like a puking radio DJ. It is the way you use your headphones.
First, turn down the volume of your headphones. This will help you hear the natural sound of your voice.
Next, only wear one cup of the headphones leaving the other ear open. This will help you hear your natural voice without the enhancement of any audio equipment.
These two tips will help you deliver your content in a manner that is closer to your normal conversational voice.
These may not make you suddenly love your voice. However, your voice will sound more natural. This adjustment should help you like your voice just a bit more.
7. Cleaner Edits
Here is a quick tip to make cleaner edits.
In post production, we often need to remove parts of our audio. We might stop then start a sentence a second time. Other times we might simply want to remove an entire section.
The goal of a post production edit is to make the change unnoticeable to the listener. You want to avoid that audible bump or change in tone.
Let’s pretend you are editing a complete sentence out of your audio. The wave file would look like <last word> <breath 1> <bad sentence> <breath 2> <first word>. We want to remove the <bad sentence>.
Most people make the first edit between <last word> and <breath 1>. They then make the second edit between <bad sentence> and <breath 2>.
This leaves a final product of <last word> into <breath 2>. The audible clunk comes from the unnatural transition between a word and a breath that didn’t naturally follow it.
To make your edit clean, place your first edit instead between <breath 1> and <bad sentence>, keeping the original breath, with the second edit between <breath 2> and <first word>, eliminating the new breath.
This leaves the final product of <breath 1> and <first word>. The natural transition between <last word> and <breath 1> will cover the edit.
The way you inhale after words varies. They way you start a sentence with a particular vowel or consonant usually remains constant.
Give it a try. I think you’ll be surprised how clean your edits sound.
8. Better Audio
If your audio sounds like you are in a canyon or restroom, you need something to absorb the sound waves in your studio.
Many podcasters record in a spare bedroom or the basement next to the water heater. These rooms are not always the best recording environments. Your mic may pick up a lot of echo as the sound waves bounce off of the walls.
To deaden the room, you need some baffling. Before you go spend a ton of money on expensive baffling, try creating your own from comforters, blankets, packing foam or other household items.
Here is a link to a great video that will teach you how to build your own baffling. CLICK HERE.
Are you stuck? I would love to help you with your podcast. E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.
Thank you for allowing me to help you with your podcast. I get a great deal of joy helping podcasters achieve their goals.
A few weeks ago, I asked you for questions and ways I can help you with your show. I received some great questions from you. This week, I want to go through a few with you.
How do you market your show? How can I get to the point of launch? How do I fight the Impostor Syndrome? How do I name my podcast?
I’m struggling with promotion/marketing and spreading the word.
-Greg from the “I Want To Know” podcast
There are many ways to market and promote. Most of it takes time.
I learned a lot about marketing from Paige Nienaber from CPR Promotions. He often refers to this drip style of marketing as dog crap marketing.
Paige lives in Minnesota, where it snows a lot every year. The ground is typically covered with snow from November to March.
Paige also owns a dog. If you are a dog owner, you know all about cleaning the back yard. The dog makes deposits. You clean it up.
Just because there is snow on the ground doesn’t mean the dog doesn’t need to go out to do his business. It just makes it tougher to clean up.
When the snow finally melts in March, you find the results of all the hard work of your dog. It wasn’t done in a few days. It built up slowly over months of productive work by the dog.
The same is true for your marketing. Work on it daily and let the results build over time.
Here are six tips you can use.
1. Know your most frequent listeners by name and use them.
2. Use stories to stand out and be remembered.
3. Host events to create community.
4. Make it easy to share your content.
5. Don’t blow your first impression.
6. Write great show notes with helpful links that your audience can use.
You can find a worksheet of 52 podcast marketing tips at PodcastTalentCoach.com.
I am a beginner, not even live yet, in fact having problems getting from intro, outro, episode and artwork to live. So frustrating, feeling like I am THIS close.
– Corrine
This is a matter of finding the courage to launch. Fight the impostor syndrome. Learn as you go.
If you have your intro, outro, episode notes and artwork, you are ready to go live.
If it is belief in yourself that is holding you back, take baby steps. Record three episodes telling yourself you won’t really post these. You are just practicing. Get them recorded.
Once you have the episodes recorded, put them on Libsyn and post to your WordPress site to ensure the technology works. Test the links. Listen to the shows. Submit it to iTunes. Just tell yourself you can always change it if necessary.
After you are sure everything works, move on to the next few episodes. Changing those first three episodes is posible. However, it is more work. I think once you get them posted, you will be more excited and interested in working on the next few episodes rather than tinkering with the first three. Move forward in baby steps.
If it is the technology that is holding you back, check out Dave Jackson at the School of Podcasting. He has great tutorials that will help you create a website, set up a Libsyn account and submit your show to iTunes. He also has a great offer where he will set up your site if you order your hosting through him.
Dave always says if you can post on Facebook, you can create a website with WordPress and launch a podcast. Don’t let the intimidation stop you. There are many resources that can help.
I want to launch a show I can be proud of. I quickly get into my own head and get slapped down by the Nobody’s Going to Like This Fairy. Stupid fairy. Any tips for shutting that voice up?
– Greg
I began my broadcasting career when I was 19. It was completely by accident. I was going to college to get my architecture degree. Since I was 12-years-old, I had been tailoring my education to be an architect or engineer.
In college, I had the same fear of public speaking as most people. In our design classes, we had to do presentations in front of a panel of judges. I absolutely hated doing these presentations.
During class, four or five students would present during the hour. It would take about a week to get through the entire class. That was the worst part. The anxiety would build for presentation day only to not get your name called. I would have to live through the anxiety again in anticipation of presenting during the next class.
I never envisioned being a public speaker, radio talent or any other presenter.
My younger brother worked for a radio station at the time. I was home for the weekend doing nothing like most college students. That was when the phone rang. It was the manager of the radio station looking for my brother to fill in during a shift. My brother wasn’t home and I was offered a part-time job.
My career in radio started just running the board for long-form programs. I only talked on the radio between the 30-minute shows. I might give the time or temperature. Otherwise, I would sit around while the show played. Speaking was minimal.
As an elective for my architecture degree, I took a class called “Broadcasting For The Non-Major”. I figured being in a radio station for a part-time job should make this class a little easier. It would also help me learn more about my job.
That class eventually led me to become the music director of the college station.
That position got me a job working overnights at a commercial station. Suddenly, I instantly found myself talking to 10,000 people. I was no longer talking between long-form programs to a handful of old people. This was real radio.
Over time, I started to get comfortable talking on the radio. It took a little time. I eventually got there.
As I started picking up more hours on the air, my boss started to send me out broadcasting live in front of a crowd. I was being sent onstage to introduce concerts in front of 10,000 people. These were no longer people I couldn’t see. They were right in front of me.
It took me years to figure out how to overcome those butterflies I would get each time I stepped in front of a crowd. There were tips and tricks I learned along the way to help me. It was a combination of things I learned over the years that helped me defeat the jitters. Here are a few ways to shake the butterflies out of your system. It could save you years of trial and error.
Preparation is the key idea in the process.
Here are four steps to properly prepare for your show.
1. Overcome Jitters
– Prepare your material
– Rehearse
– Focus on one person – preferably your single target listener you have defined
– Tell yourself you are an expert at your opinion
– Making people either love you or hate you only means you are making people care.
2. Create Great Notes
– Bullet points – don’t script
– Tell stories
– Give examples – play audio
– Determine your open and close, intro and outro for show and each topic … “now it’s time for” is not an appropriate intro
3. Set the Room
– Get the temp correct – be comfortable
– Get some room temp water
– No distractions – phone, family
4. Prepare Your Equipment
– Close other programs
– Prepare your software
– Turn off your phone, close e-mail, close IM
– Test your mic and set your levels
Contact and prepare guests & co-hosts
The places I am struggling with my future podcast is mainly the what to name it. I have ideas for about 3 different podcasts (though I only want to start with one). The main problem is naming them also i.e. website name and so forth. I have an idea about formats but with never having done a podcast, they seem to escape me. I know I won’t be perfect at first and I am okay with that. But at the same time I would like to be somewhat in order. A little more guidance on this would be greatly appreciated.
– Richard
The name of your podcast sets up your brand. It should tell people exactly what they will get from your show. Don’t get cute.
If you name your show “Outside the Lines”, nobody will know if that is a show about paint-by-numbers, football or off roading. “School of Podcasting” is pretty clear. You know what you are going to get.
Take five minutes and brainstorm. Start writing every name you can think of that relates to your niche. There are no bad ideas here. Every idea will lead to another. Don’t critique. Just write as much as you can.
After the five minutes is up, review the list. Highlight the names you like.
These names should be clear about your content. Find names that capture the imagination. Look for names that sound interesting.
Once you have narrowed the list to five to ten names, ask others for their opinion. Explain the criteria of a great name. Have them give you their top three choices.
Read over the five or ten lists of three. Look for the names that get the most mentions.
Now, take action. Pick a name and run with it.
What is the worst that can happen? You get a year into it and need to adjust it. That’s ok. On a podcast the other day, I heard someone say, “If you wait until all of the stoplights turn green before you begin your journey, you’ll never start.”
Just begin. Don’t wait for things to be perfect. That will never happen. Just start.
Thanks for all of the questions. If you need help with your podcast? E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s see what we can do.
Are you looking to make your brand stand out from the rest?
It is possible. However, it takes a lot of work.
Famous college basketball coach Bobby Knight once said, “Everyone wants to be a champion, but few want to do the work it takes to be a champion.”
Taylor Swift is one of those people willing to do the work. I think you can learn a lot from the Taylor Swift brand when creating your own.
She has done amazing work over the past 10 years. Regardless of your musical preferences, it is hard not to admire the empire she has created.
Taylor Swift was recently in town for a pair of concerts. This was the fourth time I’ve had the pleasure of meeting her. She never fails to amaze me with her networking abilities.
There are four things you can learn by studying the brand Taylor has created.
1. KNOW WHEN TO LAUNCH
Now 25 years old, Taylor moved to Nashville when she was 14. She was determined to get a record deal when most 8th graders are just figuring out middle school. She knocked on doors until someone opened.
Even though she got a record deal at 14, she didn’t experience immediate success. Taylor wrote, recorded and learned the business for two years before her first album was even released.
Taylor Swift took her time to learn what she needed to know. When her record label felt the time was right, they launched her.
Lesson: Learning is important, but at some point you have to launch.
2. BE DARING & DIFFERENT
Taylor Swift broke the mold. Kids simply didn’t have hits on country radio. She dared to do the unthinkable. By not giving up, she eventually found a record label willing to give it a try.
The accomplishments Taylor has achieved are impressive. She is the youngest songwriter to ever sign with Sony/ATV Music Publishing, one of the largest in the world. She is the youngest person to have ever write and perform a #1 song by themselves. Her 2nd album “Fearless” made her the youngest Album of the Year Grammy winner.
Taylor Swift has only released 5 albums. Even so, she is the only artist to have 3 albums sell more than one million copies in the opening release week. That mark is even more impressive in today’s music world on digital downloads when people are buying single songs over albums.
With her latest album “1989”, Taylor left the world of country music to release a pop album. People thought she was crazy. She took the daring leap and sold over a million copies in the first week of release. It was also named one of the best albums of the year by magazines Rolling Stone, Time and others.
By daring to be different, people take notice.
Lesson: Do what others are scared to attempt.
3. PUT IN THE WORK
Taylor Swift has many, many other awards. One of her attributes that make her so successful is the fact that she is willing to do things few others are willing to do. She goes above and beyond.
When was the last time you sent a hand-written thank you note?
I’ve had the great fortune of meeting many big names in the music business. Justin Timberlake, George Strait, Ozzy Osborne, Christina Aguilera, Blake Shelton, Metallica. It is one of the perks of the business.
The Program Director of a radio station decides which songs make it on the radio station. Artists usually want to take time to meet the person who holds the keys. They understand a handshake can go a long way.
Most stop there.
A typical meet & greet at a concert is in a converted locker room and resembles a cattle call. People wait in line making their way around the room until they reach the artist.
“Thanks for being here. Let’s get a photo. Enjoy the show.”
Taylor is different.
Instead of a locker room, Taylor sets up a “tea party” or a “loft” party backstage, complete with soda machines, photo booths, high top tables, boas, other party accessories and a professional photographer. VIP guests hang out, eat munchies and get ready for the show.
Instead of the handshake and photo op, Taylor makes her way around the room coming to each VIP for a photo and minute to chat.
It is obviously different from every other experiences.
It is what happens a week later that really sets Taylor apart.
About a week after the concert, I received a hand-written note from Taylor thanking me for taking the time to bring my family to the show and for the support. Nobody does that, especially the biggest stars in music.
Inside of my note was another hand-written note. This one was for my daughter. That note thanked my daughter for coming to the show. Taylor encouraged my daughter to stick with her piano lessons. She went on to tell my daughter to tell her friend Ellory (who was also with us) “hi”.
The details Taylor included were amazing. I’m not sure if she has a photographic memory, if she video tapes the event to review later, if someone close by takes notes, or if there is some other magic involved. It really doesn’t matter.
What does matter is the fact that Taylor takes the time to ensure it all happens. That attention to details makes her stand out from every other artist. She is willing to do the extra work.
Lesson: Do the things that others are not willing to do that will make you stand out.
4. SURROUND YOURSELF WITH HELP
After a typical meet & greet, the artist typically sends you on your way.
Instead of sending you to your seat, Taylor sent us on a backstage tour led by her mom, Andrea.
Mama Swift led out around the backstage area telling us all about the stage and production. We saw the hydraulics under the stage. We saw the cases and trucks that transport the gear. We saw the costumes Taylor wore. She took us to the tour busses Taylor uses for the band and dancers.
At the end of the tour, Taylor’s mom took us directly to our seats. It was the kind of customer service you don’t typically receive from average businesses.
As Taylor’s mom is leading us around backstage, Taylor is freed up to handle the other pre-show duties on her list. She needs to meet those in her fan club. She needs to warm up her voice. I’m sure there are a few other things in her routine before the show begins. The amazing team Taylor has assembled helps her be the best she can be.
Lesson: Find great people that can help you.
YOUR BRAND
As you create your brand, be willing to do the work it takes to be a champion.
Know when to launch. Be daring and different. Put in the work. Surround yourself with others who will help you reach your goals.
Do you need help with your podcast? E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s see what we can do.
A Simple Way To Improve Your Show That Works For Every Professional Broadcaster – Episode 112
Do you want to be the best? Do you want to move forward quickly?
Broadcasters learn early in their career that there is one primary way to get better. One well-worn path to improvement. A method used by nearly every broadcaster that has come before.
It is a tactic still used today. It is not only used by professional broadcasters, but used by world class athletes, writers, dancers, musicians, and others throughout most highly visible and well-paid professions in the world.
They all use a coach.
You see coaches everywhere. Life coaches. Career coaches. Sport coaches. Birthing coaches. Speaker coaches. Executive coaches. It seems coaching is a big part of the world today. Why is that.
Coaching is prevalent in our society, because coaching works. Coaching gets results.
Coaching works, because your coach helps you reach your goals when you can’t push yourself. Coaching helps you face difficult truths, learn how to make powerful change and maximize your potential.
The best speakers, the best executives and the best athletes all have coaches. Coaching helps the best become the best and stay at the top. Coaching is a powerful, secret weapon of those at the top of their game.
You can work tirelessly to learn on your own. Or, you can enlist the help of a coach and reach your goals much quicker.
I offer a free podcast review to serious podcasters who wish to get better. Why free? Because nearly every podcaster who talks with me for 30 minutes about their show instantly sees the benefit. They leave the session with a list of things to transform their podcast and business in a week. Because it works, most want more. They sign up for a quick program.
How can a coach help you take your podcast to the top? There are five areas where a coach can help you. A coach will help you assess your current situation and see the big picture. Your coach will help you develop your goals and plan. You will be held accountable by your coach. You will have your own personal cheerleader. Finally, your coach will provide regular feedback to help you with improvement.
THE BIG PICTURE
A coach will help you assess your current situation and see the big picture. Sometimes it helps to have another set of eyes helping you see the forrest through the trees. A great coach will help you clear away all the clutter to gain clear focus for your show.
A personal coach will help you honestly assess your strengths and weaknesses. These assessments are specific to your show. Your coach is not simply offering cookie cutter prescriptions. Once you understand your strengths and weaknesses, you can capitalize on the strengths and minimize the weaknesses.
You get a different perspective on your show when you have someone else give you honest feedback. When you look at your content in a different way, you will discover new ideas and different approaches for your content. A different perspective helps you keep the end goal in mind.
A big picture view of your podcast will also help you balance your life. Your coach can make sure you don’t devote all of your time to one area of your life. Ensuring you are spending quality time on all areas of your life and business could be one of the most important benefits of a coach.
GOAL DEVELOPMENT
Your coach will help you develop your goals and a plan to achieve those goals. What do you hope to accomplish with your podcast? How does your show fit into your overall business plan? Does your podcast include a clear call to action. Your coach can help you develop each of those areas.
A dream becomes a goal when deadlines are attached. Your coach can help you set those deadlines. Your coach can then help you develop a plan reach those goals.
Setting goals help you maximize your potential. You can be your best when you set and achieve goals on a regular basis. Your coach can help keep you accountable to those goals.
ACCOUNTABILITY
Some people need a little extra push to remain focused on the task at hand. Your coach can help hold you accountable to your goals. The best part of that accountability is the goals are your goals. It is your agenda. Your coach is simply helping you achieve the goals you have set.
With regular communication, your coach can push you to do your best. Your coach can help you keep your goals top of mind. When you don’t feel like spending that extra hour making your podcast the best it can be, your coach can give you that little, extra motivation. You can use your coach to push you as much as you would like.
Consistency is key to a successful podcast. Your coach can keep you on track. When your coach holds you accountable, you produce great content on a regular basis. Consistency produces a reliable, trusted brand. Let your coach help you achieve that quality with accountability.
CHEERLEADER
Fear and self doubt prevent many people from achieving their goals. We all have a little critic inside our head telling us we aren’t quite good enough or we do not have the authority to succeed. The impostor syndrome destroys far too many great business ideas.
When you have a coach, you will have your own personal cheerleader. Your coach will help you build self-confidence. You will have the courage to explore topics and ideas on your show that you previously avoided. Your coach will help you voice your opinion and be confident in your beliefs. You will overcome your fears and truly believe in yourself.
You will develop self-confidence when your coach helps you improve your competence.
FEEDBACK
Finally, your coach will provide regular feedback to help you with improvement. Feedback will help you improve your competence. Nobody knows everything. Collaboration helps everyone learn. New ideas, new approaches and new contacts all come from great collaboration. A great coach can help you achieve that improvement.
A great coach will share knowledge and expertise with you that will help you discover new ideas and concepts. It is difficult to improve when you don’t know what you don’t know. A coach can use years of experience to help you discover new processes and information.
You can transform your mistakes into opportunities and learn to do things better with the help of a coach. A great coach has worked with many others allowing you to benefit from the trials and errors of many others. Your coach knows what has worked for others. There is a fountain of knowledge with your coach that you can access for the benefit of your show.
Your coach will also provide specific feedback regarding your podcast. This feedback will include actionable items. You can isolate the areas of your podcast that need improvement. Your coach will help you create an improvement plan for those areas.
You cannot simply remove the negative parts of your show. You must discover the effective parts of your podcast and figure out how to create more of those opportunities. This is where a great coach can help you succeed. A great coach will help you discover the parts of your show that are strong, help you develop a plan to create those moments more often, and then find the courage to present those moments during your podcast.
Coaching works. That is why it is everywhere in our society. Find a great podcast coach to help you reach your goals. Though I would love to help you, your coach doesn’t necessarily need to be me. You simply need to find someone with some experience that can provide a different perspective on your show.
I help podcasters refine their content and transform their information into engaging entertainment. I can help you as well.
Many podcasters let self-doubt derail their efforts. They feel like they are kids playing dress-up among other professional podcasters that have been doing it for years. Those podcasters haven’t learned how to properly structure a show, prepare the content or review the podcast. The impostor syndrome creeps in and they lose faith in their abilities.
It happened to me when I began in broadcasting 25 years ago. There were so many great broadcasters that came before me. Who was I to be on the radio? What did I know about broadcasting? Over two-and-a-half decades, I’ve learned the secrets of the great broadcasters to overcome that fear to create powerful relationships with my listeners.
I’ve helped many broadcaster and podcasters over the years. Many have reached the top of their game. My own personal radio show has been #1 over 80% of the time. I know what works, and it isn’t the big radio voice and cheesy lines you heard on the radio 20 years ago. This is a new era. It is a relationship era. It is time to use your podcast to create meaningful, powerful, profitable relationships with your listeners.
I can help you create those relationships using these five coaching areas. I can help you assess your current situation and see the big picture. Together, we will develop your goals and plan. You will be held accountable to your own agenda. You will have your own personal cheerleader. Finally, you will receive regular feedback to help you with improvement. Are you ready for a coach?
If you feel you could benefit from my help, e-mail me at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. We can collaborate on a plan to crate a powerful podcast.
Is This Causing You To Lose Podcast Listeners – Episode 111
There are two elements of your podcast that will help you create podcast engagement with your listeners and keep them coming back for more.
Focus and consistency.
Impress your listeners by making one big splash. Then, do it so consistently that your listener comes to expect it.
FOCUS
Focus on the one thing you do best. When you try to be all things to all people, you fade into the wallpaper. Those with focused intensity stand out.
Be great at something. People will take notice.
Rather than being consistently good with your podcast, be occasionally great.
Your listener will remember one big thing from your show. They will not remember every detail, every comment or every e-mail answer. They will remember that one thing you did. Each show, try to make one big splash that will be memorable.
Swing for the fence.
Many know the great Babe Ruth as one of the greatest home run hitters in baseball. Many also know that Ruth struck out roughly twice as often as the league average. He struck out 1,330 times.
Babe set out to do something exciting. He wanted to be memorable. Sometimes, that meant striking out.
People don’t remember all of the singles Babe hit. Even though he is 2nd all-time with his on-base percentage of .474, nobody talks about all the times Ruth got on base. He had 1,517 singles and 506 doubles to his 714 home runs. That is nearly twice as many singles as homers. Doubles and home runs were just about equal.
Why do people remember all of the home runs? Because they were exciting.
Babe was occasionally great. He was great often enough to be memorable.
You don’t have to set records. Simply make your podcast occasionally great. Nobody remembers your strikeouts. Don’t worry about them. When you finally hit the home run, people will remember.
Every now and then, swing for the fence.
When you try to be all things to all people, you end up being nothing.
Focus your topic on what you know best. Be opinionated. Be passionate. Pick a side. Be unique.
CONSISTENT
Once you have focus, add consistency.
When you try to discuss an industry in general, your audience won’t know what to expect when they visit your show.
Stick to your focus. Simply find new ways to communicate it.
Let’s take Dave Ramsey for example. During the opening of “The Dave Ramsey Show”, Dave says, “Where debt is dumb, cash is king, and the paid-off home mortgage has taken the place of the BMW as the status symbol of choice.”
Dave’s show is a personal finance show. Moreover, it is a show about getting out of debt. Dave helps people find ways to pay off their debt and become financially stable.
“The Dave Ramsey Show” doesn’t discuss particular stocks or mutual funds. Dave doesn’t discuss how to go about investing other than simply suggesting you sock away 15 percent of your income for retirement and then some for college.
On his show, Dave recommends 7 basic steps to financial security. He has been doing a show on these 7 steps for over 20 years. Every show, everyday, every call. It’s all about these 7 steps in some way or another.
When you tune into “The Dave Ramsey Show”, you know what you will get. Dave is focused. He is consistent with his focus on a daily basis.
Now, if Dave talked about the benefits of real estate investing on one show and the pitfalls of no-load mutual funds on another, you would never know what to expect. You wouldn’t know what the show would be about on any particular day.
There are times where Dave will focus a particular hour on entrepreneurs. Even these shows are centered around the 7 steps. He helps businesses launch and operate debt free.
The focus of “The Dave Ramsey Show” is consistent, but not predictable.
When you listen, you cannot predict the questions. However, the answers are consistent.
Give your podcast focus. Consistently deliver on that focus. Your audience will find comfort in the known. These two elements will help you build podcast engagement and a solid foundation on which to build your audience.
Here is a link to the FREE show review I mentioned. Yes, it is free. No, there are no strings attached. However, there are a few criteria you need to meet. See if you qualify:
COMPLIMENTARY COACHING
I’d love to help you with your podcast. Post any questions or comments you might have, or e-mail me at Erik@PodcastTalentCoach.com.
You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.
Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.
How To Turn Podcast Topics Into Creative Content – Episode 110
Before we dive in, here is the link to the Podcast Review Show I mentioned. PODCAST REVIEW SHOW
You can turn your clever podcast topics into creative content by answering a few easy questions.
Developing your overall podcast strategy involves determining how you will uniquely address each topic on your show. Whether you are presenting information, answering questions or interviewing guests, there are many ways to address each topic.
So many podcasters follow the herd. They create interview shows that sound like every other igniting interview show.
You do not need to do it the same way every other podcast does it. Be unique. Find the way that will stand out.
If you are interviewing, do you really need to ask the same questions that every other podcast asks? When you actually listen to the answers coming from your guest, you will be surprised by the new questions you can discover.
Play a game. Do a contest. Get your guests to tell stories. Different stories than every other show. “How did your mom influence you?” “What was your first business?” “When did you know you wanted to be an artist as a career?” “What is a unique talent you have that few people know?”
Here is a tip many people forget. This is show business. You are here to entertain. Create compelling entertainment?
How do you do make it engaging?
First, you know where you want to go and what you hope to accomplish. Then, you map out how to get there. Don’t just wing it.
Do you think the actors in “Modern Family” or “The Walking Dead” ad lib their lines? Of course not. Do you find it less entertaining when they follow the script? Of course not. There is no reason you cannot add a little show biz to your show.
Just be sure to always be true to the show.
This question will help you begin to shape your topic. If we can determine why your niche needs to know this material and how it fits into the overall concept of the show, we can make sure it fits the show.
I love hockey. However, hockey isn’t relevant to this particular podcast niche unless I’m discussing a hockey podcast. There is no relevancy.
WHO CARES?
How are you going to make your audience care about this topic? What is in it for your listener? If we can determine why they would care, we can begin in their world.
Every listeners asks, “What’s in it for me?” Care about your listener first. You will be well on your way to engaging content.
SOURCE
What is the source of the topic? Does the source matter with regard to the context and credibility of the information?
There are times when the source will help shape the context of your story. Other times, the source was simply the spark to the idea and doesn’t really matter.
We discussed it a bit last week. If I read a story about the correlation between bars and churches and it sparks the topic of “everyone wants to constantly change the rules”, the source really adds nothing to the context.
If I read a Gallup report covering the President’s approval rating which leads me to the discussion of where it is trending, the source adds context. It also adds credibility.
INTRIGUE
What do you find intriguing about the topic?
We have discussed this before. If you want to be interesting, be interested. You are only interested when you find topics that are intriguing to you. Determine what parts of the topic pique your interest. If you creates a spark in you, it is likely that it will do the same in your listener.
EMOTION
What emotion do you hope to stir?
Content is always most powerful when you stir emotion. You can make money when you sell things people need. You can get rich when you sell things people want. Why? Wants come from an emotional place.
Find ways to get your audience emotionally involved in your content.
CONTEXT
In what context will your story be set?
Determine how you will approach each topic. Will you play audio examples? Will you play voice messages from your listeners? Are you going to read e-mail? Maybe there is a guest contributor. Determine each approach before the show begins.
Add some context by making the topic personal. Drugs mean different things when you add context. Are we talking criminals or pharmacists? That is context.
JOURNEY
Where will you take the topic? In other words, what is your point?
This is like your headline. It is the one thing you want to drive home about this particular topics. With this episode, I want you to understand there are defined steps you can take to create shape your content.
Your point (or intriguing introduction) is where your episode will begin. Take time to define it.
DETAILS
What details will you include in your episode?
Vivid details make your stories come to life. Find great words and details that make visions dance in the theater of the mind.
YOUR ONE THING
What is the one thing you hope listeners will remember about this episode?
Your “one thing” goes hand-in-hand with your point. The one thing you want to drive home to your listener is very similar to the one thing you want them to remember.
My point here is the fact there are steps you can take. What I want you to remember is that you can do it, and the steps are easy to understand. The point is the “what” and the one thing is the “why”.
Start with your intriguing introduction. Lead with the headline. Then, shape the content to support your point with some passionate “why”.
I’d love to help you with your podcast. Post any questions or comments you might have, or e-mail me at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.
You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.
Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.
3 Key Elements To A Rockstar Podcast Brand – Episode 108
Why is a brand so important for your podcast? Your brand communicates the essence of you, your podcast, your business and everything you represent.
There are many, many definitions of a brand. Basically, it is your identity.
When people think of you and your podcast, what comes to mind? There are usually a couple words that your brand represents in the mind of the consumer.
Apple is Think Different. Nike is Just Do It. Ford is Built Ford Tough.
Those brands are more than just slogans. They mean something to the consumer. Different is part of the fabric that makes up Apple. Everything they do is different.
Many companies try to add slogans thinking it will become their brand identity. Most of the time, the words just become throw away tag lines.
IBM is currently using “building a smarter planet” as their slogan. What does that mean? There are many articles written on the brilliance of this campaign. However, most of the writing centers around the cool logo, the social aspect of the idea and Watson, the mega computer. How does that change my life? What’s in it for me? How am I smarter because of that slogan?
An iPod is different. The iOS platform is different. Apple is different. When I interact with the product, I am different as well. We can be different together.
“Different together” is one element of a cult brand as described by B.J. Bueno in “The Power of Cult Branding”. We’ve discussed that in a past episode.
I truly enjoy studying branding. When I was completing my M.B.A., I studies branding all I could. I have read many books on branding in addition to “Cult Branding.” Those include “The 22 Immutable Laws of Branding” by Ries & Ries and “Brand Like a Rock Star” by Steve Jones.
“Different together” brings us to the first element of a successful brand.
Consistent
To create a solid brand, you need to be consistent. Consistent with your message. Consistent with your promise. Consistent with your image.
When you think of great brands like McDonald’s, Coca Cola and Nike, you can see the evidence of solid consistency. When you walk into McDonald’s, you know exactly what you will get. You’ll get inexpensive hamburgers fast.
It doesn’t matter if it is a McDonald’s in Missoula, Montana or Mexico City, Mexico. The brand will be the same. You may be experience some small differences in the menu. For the most part, you’ll still get hamburgers, french fries and a Coke.
And of course the Big Mac. If you head into a McDonald’s and suddenly find fish n chips or bratwurst as the main entree, your trust in the brand will be destroyed. You won’t be sure what you’ll get next time you visit.
Your podcast must be just as consistent in order to create a great brand. Your listener must know exactly what they will get each time they listen. They come to your show to receive your promise. Deliver every time. Deliver consistently.
Consistency doesn’t mean lack of variety. It simply means that you always deliver your promise. McDonald’s offers different sizes. They offer chicken and fish sandwiches. You can get McNuggets. Either way, it is always inexpensive food fast when you want it. And the burgers are always there.
You are creating a brand when you are creating your podcast. You need to deliver consistently each time your listener tunes into the show. Foster that strong relationship with your audience. Be consistent.
Benefits
Your podcast should contain some sort of call to action. You might ask the listener to visit your website. You may ask them to contribute to a cause. Selling your product is a definite possibility. Simply tuning in again is a call to action. Whatever it happens to be, the call to action is part of the relationship building process with your listener.
In your call to action, be sure to sell benefits, not features. If you are selling a cookbook, the large print, stain-free cover and fact that it will stay open are all features. The ease at which the cook can read the book at a distance, the way it will stay clean to hand down to the next generation and the hands-free help it provides are all benefits. People don’t buy products. They buy what the product will accomplish.
How often does Starbuck’s promote their fine coffee bean. The answer is very little. Starbuck’s spends their time creating the Starbuck’s experience. They market the way Starbuck’s makes you feel. They aren’t promoting the warmth, color and robust flavor of their coffee.
Starbuck’s creates a relationship and true experience. They sell the way the coffee experience makes you feel. It is the barista, the smell, the music, the drink names, the cup, the sleeve, and even the lid. It isn’t warm, dark caffeinated beverages.
Find the true benefits of your podcast and product. Then, promote them heavily. People buy benefits.
Last week, we discussed changing your show introduction to better reflect your benefits.
Unique
Great brands are unique. Not simply a different shade of gray, but truly unique. To be remembered, you must stand out.
You stand out when you are loved. You are remembered when you are hated. You fade into the background when you are plain, vanilla and trying to avoid upsetting anyone. If you don’t stir strong emotions, you are easily forgotten.
When we create, we expose our perspective. We open ourselves to criticism. It is natural to want your thoughts, views, art and creation to be accepted by everyone. To avoid being disappointed, we often play it safe.
Those fantastic, memorable brands are usually both loved and hated. Apple is loved and defended by the converted and outcast by the PC crowd. Harley Davidson is loved to the extent that the converted tattoo the logo on their bodies.
Rush Limbaugh is loved by the conservatives and hated by the liberals. Dave Ramsey is loved by the conservative investor and hated by credit card companies and whole life insurance salespeople. Dr. Laura would consistently be critical of her callers. Yet she would receive more callers than she could handle on any given show.
Safety lacks creativity. It is risky to be truly creative. Taking a chance is really the only way to get noticed. Safe blends in. Risky stands out. Great brands are unique.
Take this week and review your brand. Look for consistency, the benefits and the uniqueness. Are you succeeding at all three elements of powerful brand? Where can you improve?
Successful brands do not happen overnight. It takes time. We are creating a relationship. Continue to build your consistency each week. Keep your listener at the forefront of your content. Then, find ways to be unique.
I would love to help you with your podcast. E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.
Should You Change Your Introduction? – Episode 107
Should you change your introduction? Is it time to freshen it up?
I get this question a lot when I’m coaching clients. Before we can adequately answer the question, we need to examine the purpose of an introduction.
The first thing we learned in speech class was the structure of a speech. A good speech is built with an introduction, a body and a conclusion. Your podcast is no different. However, it may be structured like a series of tiny speeches.
Let’s just look at the introduction of the podcast itself.
Your introduction should set up your podcast. It should be an intriguing introduction that tells the listener exactly what the podcast is all about. What will I get when I listen? It doesn’t matter whether your podcast is 10 minutes or 60 minutes long. You need to tell the listener what is to come.
“Welcome to the Podcast Talent Coach Podcast. My name is Erik Johnson. Over the next 30 minutes, we will help you transform your information into engaging entertainment and turn your podcast into powerful, profitable relationships.”
With that quick introduction, I told you exactly what to expect. You know the name of my podcast. You know the name of the host. You know exactly how long my podcast will run. You know the goal we are setting out to accomplish. I’ve also put you in the mix by referencing your dreams and how my podcast will help you. In those brief seconds, I’ve given you who, what, when and why.
Your introduction must be intriguing. This is true for the overall podcast introduction and the introduction to your stories. “Today we are going to talk about work” is not intriguing. That will not make anyone want to stick around to hear what you have to say, especially for 30 minutes or an hour. “Do you love your work? Do you think it’s possible? Well, you’re about to find out.” That is the intro to Dan Miller’s “48 Days” podcast. That is a statement that will stir some emotion and make people listen through to the end.
It is critical that you tell the listener what your podcast is all about EVERY time. Each week, you will be gaining new listeners. You cannot assume they heard the first podcast, or even one of the first twenty-five. Each time you begin an episode, you have to assume someone is hearing your show for the first time. Your introduction will welcome them into the party and get them up to speed.
Even those people that have been listening since the beginning will find comfort hearing that consistent opening they can almost recite verbatim. They’ll feel like they are in the club. Your introduction tells your listener they are in the right spot.
Remember, it is every time.
Failing to introduce every time is the one misstep I hear most often with podcasts. Talent get too comfortable with their podcast after doing it ten or twenty times. The podcast gets lucky enough to make it into the top ten. People discover it, and the podcast begins with no introduction as if the listener stepped into the middle of a conversation. It becomes uncomfortable for the new listeners. The podcast suddenly stops growing its audience. Remember, your show will always be new to somebody.
You will have new listeners every time you post a new podcast. You cannot assume your audience has heard your podcast before. You need to set up the show at the beginning to let the new audience members know what they can expect while letting the returning fans feel comfortable without being bored.
THREE QUESTIONS
There are three questions you should answer to help you form your introduction.
1. What do you hope to make the listener feel with this story? Your introduction should stir some emotion. You need to establish the atmosphere right out of the gate.
2. How will you engage the listener with your introduction? Hook them immediately. Make them care right at the beginning. What is in it for them?
3. What will your position for your show? This will help you define the structure of the show and tell your listener what is to come. Are you teaching? Is it an interview or debate? Are you answering questions from listeners?
So, should you change it up? If your introduction is doing the job of informing your listeners and encouraging them to listen to the episode, then there is little reason to change.
REMEMBER THESE INTRODUCTIONS?
Your regular listeners find comfort in your show open. Many people dislike change.
Remember some of these tv themes? Cheers ran for 11 seasons. Friends ran for 10 seasons. M.A.S.H. lasted for 10 seasons with the same introduction.
The Simpsons debuted in 1989 and has been running for 27 seasons. Over the 27 seasons, the series had two revisions. The first revision was at the beginning of the second season when the graphics were improved. The other revision happened for season 20 when the show moved to HD.
Both revisions were necessary to add new characters and a few other updates. The unique quirks in the intro where Bart is writing on the chalkboard and other jokes keep the intro fresh. However, it has basically been the same intro for 26 years.
If your introduction is enticing people to listen to your episode, it is succeeding. There is no real reason to change it. Don’t change for the sake of changing. You just might make your regular listeners feel uncomfortable. People know what they like and like what they know.
I would love to help you with your podcast. E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.
How To Improve Your Podcast In 9 Steps – Episode 105
Sometimes you are just too close to the content to recognize the issues.
I was recently working with two coaching clients. They were both struggling with the introduction to their episodes. The opening of the shows didn’t feel powerful enough.
As we dug into the shows with each podcaster, we realized they were missing their “why”. The hosts were not giving their listeners compelling reasons to stick around.
We would never have realized the issue had we not performed the show review.
In sports, coaches and athletes watch game film. Corporations use the annual review. Scientists incorporate theory evaluation. In the world of podcasting and radio, we call it the aircheck show critique.
Review your work. It is the best way to improve your show. Listening to the podcast like a member of the audience will reveal things you don’t hear while you’re recording the show. Your review will expose areas that need attention and focus.
There are a few ways to critique your show. One way is to review the podcast yourself. The other is to have a coach review your podcast for you. Both can be very effective if used correctly.
An experienced coach can be very powerful for your show. An experienced coach has mentored many shows. That professional has been exposed to many elements that have effectively attracted and entertained an audience as well as those that haven’t. You will also received unbiased feedback from a coach, because they aren’t as personally close to the content as you may be.
This episode should not turn into one big advertisement for my coaching services. Just know that I am available if you would like someone with experience to review your show for you. If you would like details regarding my coaching services, visit www.PodcastTalentCoach.com. It is affordable and rewarding.
You can learn to review your show on your own. It takes time, but is possible. This episode is focused on helping you with the self-critique by providing some critical questions.
To effectively review and critique your show on your own, you must be brutally honest with yourself.
It is not easy to separate yourself from your podcast. Becoming an unbiased onlooker to something you’ve worked hard to create is tricky. You will often find yourself justifying things you do on your show because it is personal.
To effectively critique your show, you need to ask yourself if the audience truly understands and is entertained by the content. Then, you need to honestly answer the question and be willing to change if necessary. Force yourself to be honest about every piece of content.
Not everything works. There will be times you fail. That’s ok. That is how you learn.
In order to properly critique the show, you need to listen to it in real time like an average listener. A few days after you’ve recorded the show, when the excitement of the new show has dimmed, go back and listen to your podcast. Play it in real time while taking notes.
Waiting a few days will remove many of the justifications you would normally use to explain away things that need to be adjusted. The content won’t be so fresh to you. The excuses will fade. You will find it much easier to be unbiased.
Actually listening to the audio rather than just remembering it in your head will make your critique more authentic. You never remember a show exactly as it happened. By listening to the audio, you will hear the exact words you used. It will be much easier to honestly review what really happened.
Listening to your own voice won’t be easy at first. That is alright. Most people do not enjoy the sound of their own voice. That is natural. Listen anyway. You will get more comfortable with it the more you listen.
When you critique your own show, you need to know where to look for areas that will make a difference. If you understand what content will engage your audience, you will begin making strides to add more of that content. Determine the goal for the show. Know what content will make a connection with your audience. Then, create a plan to add more of that powerful content.
If you have not yet downloaded the Show Review Worksheet from PodcastTalentCoach.com, get it HERE. We walk through the nine questions on that worksheet in this episode.
Here are 9 questions you can ask as you critique your show.
1. Did you accomplish your goal for the show?
Every show should have a goal. You should have an idea of what you hope to accomplish before you even open the mic. Be specific.
What do you hope to make your make your audience feel? Is there something they should better understand? Are you incorporating a call-to-action?
Write down your goal before the show begins. A written goal makes the show critique easier and more effective when you return to the show for the critique. As you review the show, find the areas that did and did not help you accomplish your goal.
2. What did you like about the show?
What parts of the show really jumped out at you as you were reviewing your podcast? Jot those parts down on a sheet of paper. If you can find ways to recreate similar experiences, you will be well on your way to creating a podcast that is consistently entertaining.
3. What was memorable about the show?
Your listener needs to remember your podcast, so they can return and listen again. That is the way to build a following. If each show has a few more listeners than the previous episode, you eventually build a solid audience.
It really doesn’t matter how many people listen today. What builds a strong podcast is the number of listeners that come back the next time, and the next time, and the time after that. You build your audience slowly with more listeners this week than you had last week.
Get your listener to remember to return. Most people will remember one or two things about any particular show. Find the big parts of your podcast episode that are memorable.
4. How did you make the audience care about your topic?
Nobody wants to watch our home movies unless they are in them. People will only care about your topic if affects them. How does your topic relate to your audience?
The best way to make people care is to first care about them. Show your audience that you have their best interest at heart. They will come back again and again. Start in the world of your listener.
If you truly want to engage your listener, put her in your story. This doesn’t mean create a fictitious part of your story where she becomes a fake character. Include details that are so vivid that your listener feels like she is right there in the moment.
Stir the passion within your listener with great emotion. You create strong engagement with emotion. Find the parts of your show where you made a connection and made your audience care.
5. Where did you surprise your audience?
You will delight your audience when you surprise them. When the show is predictable, your audience will get bored. Find ways to make them say “oh wow”.
This doesn’t mean your show shouldn’t be consistent. You can use benchmarks and bits that regularly appear on every show. You should simply find ways to keep them fresh with unique content.
Great comedians delight their audience, because the punchlines of their jokes aren’t expected. The material takes turns you don’t see coming. Great movies do the same thing with their plots. That is what makes movies and comedians entertaining.
Find the great surprises in your podcast. Make your audience say, “Oh, wow”. Add that same movie experience to your podcast more often.
6. What did you reveal about yourself?
When you tell stories during your podcast, you reveal things about yourself. Self-revelation is the beginning of great friendships. Friends will support you every chance they can.
People like to do business with people they like. Find those little nuggets that reveal wonderful details about you. That content will make you more approachable and human to your audience.
7. Where were the powerful words?
Storytelling is an important step to revealing details about yourself. Vivid details are a vital part of great stories. Your listener will enjoy your podcast stories more when you include very vivid details.
The more vivid the details, the more your listener will enjoy the story. Make your audience see the story in their mind. Draw the mental picture for them. Details help your listener experience the story rather than just hearing it.
Details are powerful words. Find those words in your podcast. Learn to recognize them. Then, add powerful words more often.
8. What could have been better?
There are always parts of your show that could be better. You need to find those parts. Become aware of your weaknesses. That will be the only way to improve.
Your shortcomings could be the introduction of the show. It might be the way you transition from one topic to another. You may find yourself using jargon and cliches most people do not use in natural conversation. Find the areas of your podcast that do not fully support the goal for the show. Those are typically the areas that need work.
9. What is your plan to make the next show better?
To improve, you need to develop a plan. Discovering the areas that need adjustment is only half the battle. You then need to figure out how to improve those areas. Put it in a plan.
The improvement plan is where a coach can be incredibly effective. A good coach has worked with successful shows. They know what works and what doesn’t when trying to attract and engage an audience. A solid coach can review your show and provide you an unbiased opinion. Sometimes that tough love is just the prescription necessary to break through to true improvement.
It is possible to critique and improve your podcast yourself. You should learn from others who have done it successfully. You will also need the ability to be extremely honest with yourself.
If you have studied successful shows to the point where you can consistently recognize quality content, you may be able to effectively critique your show. Give it a shot. Remember, you can find my free series of Podcast Talent Coach Worksheets to help you at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.
Have You Tried These 6 Audio Imagination Tricks? – Episode 104
Imagination. It is the wonderful result of recorded audio. When you listen to the radio, podcasts, audiobooks or other recorded audio, the imagination is in full motion. Your imagination belongs to you and you alone. You have full control. Your imagination is unlike any other.
Your imagination is used for your sole benefit. The characters and scenes created in your “Theater of the Mind” are exactly how you want them to look. The images are created in your mind in a way that gives you the greatest pleasure. It is all to benefit you.
The wonderful details in a story can stir the imagination in magical ways.
Last week, we talked about the element of surprise and delight within your podcast. Pieces of audio can add a wonderful element of surprise.
Video typically doesn’t stimulate the imagination the way audio does. When you see a car in a video, you know exactly what it looks like. If you and I both see a car in a video, we would both describe it in very similar ways. There is not much left to interpretation.
If I describe a cherry red 1968 Ford Mustang to you, I couldn’t possibly describe every detail. What does the interior look like? Where is it parked … or was it moving? Is there anybody in it? What kind of tires are on it? Hard top or convertible? There are many details to the story left to your interpretation.
Your imagination creates the car in a way that adds the most to your story and vision. That is the magic of recorded audio. Vivid details take your stories to another level of engagement that video cannot.
WAR OF THE WORLDS
You and I often discuss the incorporation of stories within your podcast. Stories reveal a lot about you as a storyteller. Stories also bring your content to life in the “Theater of the Mind”. Audio simply makes those mental images even stronger.
“War of the Worlds” was an incredible radio broadcast in the 1930s that brought mental imagery to life a little too well.
The episode by the great Orson Welles changed the way broadcasters approached their on-air responsibilities to the public for years to come. The show became famous for allegedly causing mass panic, although the reality of this mass panic was disputed.
Regardless, broadcasters changed the way they presented information on the air in order to keep the government off their backs. The audio was that powerful.
“War of the Worlds” was an episode of an American radio drama called “The Mercury Theatre on the Air”. This particular episode aired as a Halloween episode on October 30, 1938 when shows of this nature were performed live.
The story is an adaptation of the H. G. Wells novel “The War of the Worlds”. The story was shortened to fit a one-hour performance. It was presented as a series of fake news bulletins reporting an actual alien invasion.
The audio and effects added to the realism and the ensuing panic.
Later that evening, a few hours after the show aired, Orson Welles was standing in Times Square in New York City. Staring up at the New York Times building, he read the news bulletin, “Orson Welles Causes Panic.”
The media and politicians were in outrage the next day. They called for regulation by the Federal Communications Commission that would limit material allowed to be broadcast. They were upset that the broadcast was TOO REAL and therefore deceptive to the public.
The production was TOO GOOD. How crazy is that?
Over the years, Welles rose to fame as a producer and actor. This particular episode added to his meteoric rise.
Audio has that power to supercharge the imagination.
How are you using audio in your podcast to spark the imagination?
There are different ways to include recorded production elements within your show that will enhance your listener’s imagination and experience. When you add recorded elements, the imagination of your listener will be further stimulated. You will help create elements within your listener’s “Theater of the Mind”.
Here are a few recorded elements you could easily add to your podcast to spice up the listening experience.
1. INTRO/OUTRO
This is showbiz. Your podcast is created to entertain just as much as inform. It is just as much “show” as it is “business”. Add some sizzle to your show.
A produced “intro” and “outro” for your podcast is easy first step. The “intro” opens the show, as in “introduction”. The “outro” closes the show, similar to a conclusion.
At a minimum, find a great piece of music that will open and close your show. You can find many sites on the internet that sell music clips for just a few dollars.
Guest interviews are a great way to add depth to your audio. A second voice on the show will stir the imagination. Listeners will wonder what your guest looks like. The stories told during the interview will create visions in the mind of your listener.
Listeners enjoy eavesdropping on other conversations more than listening to a lecture. By adding interviews to your show, you allow your listener this pleasure. Sure, you could provide the information yourself rather than going through all the work to secure, arrange and conduct the interview. If you are hoping to develop a relationship with your listener using content that will be engaging, go the extra step by including interviews within your podcast.
3. LISTENERS
Adding listener audio to your show will add additional depth to your podcast. When you simply read a listener e-mail, the question typically lacks the passion that would come from the listener. The inflection is a little different than the caller would use. The question is also asked in the same cadence, style and voice that you ask every other question.
When you add listener audio, a second dimension is added to the show. Though the caller isn’t actually there, the second voice almost creates a conversation. Your audience is now listening to a conversation rather than a monologue. The question will also be asked in a way unique to the caller.
Similar to the way interviews stimulate the listener’s imagination, callers can add to the “Theater of the Mind”.
You don’t need to include the entire phone call. It is show biz. Use the part of the call that will most add to your show. If the call includes a bunch of details not relevant to the question or the show, feel free to edit those parts out of the call. As long as you are not changing the intention of the caller, or making it sound like they are saying something they didn’t say, editing the call is perfectly acceptable.
4. AUDIO EXAMPLES
When you make reference to a piece of audio, play a sample. If you are talking about an interview that Jimmie Johnson gave after a race, play a clip of that interview. Your listeners will be further engaged by the additional voice. Audio examples are just another way to add that additional level of production to your show.
Additional audio will take your listener to another place. An interview clip will transport your listener to the interview location. An old television clip with create memories of seeing the show. A sample of a classic speech may elicit visions of the orator. Use audio to enhance the listening experience.
5. CELEBRITY ENDORSEMENTS
People like to have their decisions validated. That is why many companies hire celebrities to endorse their products. If Michael Jordan wears Hanes, it should be alright for me to wear Hanes as well. I don’t feel like I’m the only one doing it when I see Michael Jordan doing it.
You can use this concept to benefit your podcast. If you can get a well-known name in your area of expertise to record a quick endorsement for your show, that piece of audio will add an element of credibility to your podcast. Your listeners will feel like they are not alone in liking your show. They will be validated.
6. SOUND EFFECTS
Sound effects can easily enhance the imagination. You need to be careful that you don’t overuse sound effects. Too many effects can make your show sound amateur. However, a well-placed effect here and there can add to the delight of listening.
Adam Carolla has a producer who is responsible for adding sound effects to the show. If you haven’t spent time with Adam’s podcast, listen to one episode simply for the production elements. His content may not be your cup of tea. However, the production of the show must be admired.
The magic of recorded audio comes from the imagination. When you stir wonderful visions in the “Theater of the Mind” of your listener, you will truly begin to engage your audience. You can then begin to build meaningful relationships with your listeners and keep them coming back again and again. Use these ideas to add a little “show biz” to your podcast today.
If you have never subscribed to the Podcast Talent Coach podcast, please spend two minutes to do so. I would truly appreciate your generosity. Click the LINK and then the subscribe button in iTunes.
Do you need help with your podcast? E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s see what we can do.
The unexpected is amusing, delightful and memorable. Being direct assumes your listener cares about your marketing message. She doesn’t. Your listener cares about his or her needs, wants and desires. Attract their attention by doing the unexpected.
In his book “The Purple Cow”, Seth Godin says, “Cows, after you’ve seen one or two or ten, are boring. A purple cow, though … ow that would be something.” Phenomenal, counterintuitive, exciting and unbelievable.
If you want to get noticed, you need to stand out. You cannot afford to be a different shade of gray.
BJ Bueno in his book “The Power Of Cult Branding” describes the same. Oprah, Star Trek, Harley Davidson, Apple, Vans shoes. They are cult brands because they are incredibly different. They are not simply a percentage better or brighter or less filling. They are different.
Just a side note, if you would like to support the show, please use my affiliate links to both of these books.
Physical versions:
You can get a free audio book with a free trial to Audible using my affiliate link. CLICK HERE.
If you are considering either book, I’d love to have you use my link.
To engage your podcast listener and create a relationship, you need to be memorable. In order to be memorable, you must be unique. Be distinct, unusual, and unexpected. If you sound like every other show, you will not stand out and get noticed.
DISTINCT
Be unique. If everyone else is interviewing the popular clique in your niche, make your show different. Stand out. Interview different people. Interview the same people in different ways. Create a different interview style. Instead of interviewing, turn it into an expose or magazine style feature.
Jimmy Fallon is great at “not” interviewing people. He will do a lip sync challenge. Sometimes he will do a skit. He might turn it into a game show. It isn’t the typical interview.
UNUSUAL
Is everyone doing it the same way? Do it differently. You could add listener calls to the show. Don’t wait for them to call you. Reach out to people who e-mail you and ask if you can call and record them.
When I did episode 100 and 101, I didn’t hope people would call a voicemail number. I reached out and set up a call just like I would with an interview. Be proactive.
Apple is unusual. Wikipedia is unusual. Volkswagen is unusual. Stand out. Don’t be a different shade of gray.
There is a car dealer in Omaha that does things differently. Instead of being a little better or different, they have flipped the car buying experience on its head.
The dealership has a customer parking lot clearly marked. You are not attacked by 15 car salesmen the minute you drive on the lot. They hold the door for you. They help you find the person you need.
The dealer also understands that you have a lot of info from the web, so they don’t take an entire day to get the deal done. They have eliminated the games.
They just want to sell more cars. They don’t necessarily need to get every penny out of a deal. They more time they save, the more time they have to sell another car.
By doing things differently, this dealership has become the #1 Nissan dealer in the region. On top of that, they’ve only been open a few years.
UNEXPECTED
Another dealer took it over the top with my service.
My battery wouldn’t hold a charge. I figured it was my alternator. So, I took it to the dealership.
If you have ever had a battery replaced, you know how painful it can be to reset your radio, clock and other electronic features in your car.
When I picked up my car, they had reset my radio, clock and everything else. The first thing the mechanic did when he got into my car was write down my radio stations. Not only was it reprogrammed, it was back on the original station.
This dealership does the unexpected. They are also the #1 Ford F-150 pickup dealer in the country.
Dave Jackson does the unexpected when he interrupts his interviews with interesting asides. He drives the point home by interrupting himself. Who would think of doing that? It goes against every interviewing standard. Well, it adds unexpected surprised to his interviews.
Drop in some audio to surprise your listener. Take the show in a direction that your listener wouldn’t expect. If they think you are going right, go left.
If you can create unique, memorable experiences for your listener by incorporating the unexpected, you begin to create powerful, meaningful relationships.
Are you using cows?
I would love to help you with your podcast. E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.
You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.
Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.
What If I Get Too Much Engagement? (Listener Questions Part 2) – Episode 101
THANK YOU!
We have made it through 100 episodes. With your help, I have been creating this podcast for nearly two years. Thank you, thank you, thank you.
On this episode, I want to finish the special show we began last week. This is part two of the questions I have received from listeners.
NEW PATHS
I have never had another person on the show. Up to this point, I have simply been sharing my 25 years of broadcasting knowledge with you.
For the 100 episode milestone, I invited a few listeners to join me on the show to share their questions about podcast content and creation.
The response and questions were so great, I had to split the show into two episodes in order to keep it to about 30 minutes each. This week is part two. If you missed the first half, subscribe to the show and give it a listen.
A few questions allow us to dive into some new material. A few help us explore a few topics a little deeper. There are even a few twists along the way.
FRIENDS & INSPIRATION
Here are the people who join me on this episode and inspire me to do this each week.
Alex Exum – The Exum Experience
“What’s the one mistake podcasters are making?”
Rem Lavictoire – The Sci-Fi Movie Podcast
“How do I include listener feedback if I get too much?”
I truly appreciate all of the support you have given me over the past 100 episodes. This podcast would not exist if it wasn’t for you. Thanks for being part of this great community.
Next week, we will talk about defining your avatar and using that target listener as a filter for your content. Find that worksheet here.
-WORKSHEETS-
Do you have a question? I would love to help you with your podcast. E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.
Welcome to Episode 100. With your help, I have been creating this podcast for 100 episodes.
On this episode, I want to do something special.
NEW PATHS
I have never had another person on the show. Up to this point, I have simply been sharing my 25 years of broadcasting knowledge with you.
Today, I have invited a few listeners to join me on the show to share their questions about podcast content and creation.
The response and questions were so great, I had to split the show into two episodes in order to keep it to about 30 minutes each.
A few questions allow us to dive into some new material. A few help us explore a few topics a little deeper. There are even a few twists along the way.
FRIENDS & INSPIRATION
Here are the people who join on this episode and inspire me to do this each week.
Dave Jackson – School of Podcasting
“How do you get used to talking to the wall when doing a solo show?”
(I also do a podcast with Dave called “The Podcast Review Show”. Wanna get reviewed? Click HERE.)
Steve Stewart – Money Plan SOS
“The impostor syndrome seems to be creeping in. How does somebody get into the right mindset where they actually feel like they can bring some value even though they may not be the best in the industry?”
Megumi Takeda – Working on her first episode
“Do you have any advice to help smooth out the moments when interviews come to a dead end line of questions and need to transition into another topic?”
David Freeman – Authors Pay It Forward
“What is the most comfortable level of preparation for a podcast interview?”
Next week, we will hear from a few other listeners with more great questions.
Do you have a question? I would love to help you with your podcast. E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.
4 Ways To Make Your Podcast Different Starting Today – Episode 098
When you try to please everyone, you end up pleasing no one. Make people take notice. You are an expert at your opinion. Give it to people.
Take A Stand
Pick a side.
Some of the nicest people make the worst podcast hosts. They try to please everyone in the audience. Those people tend to blend into the background and go unnoticed.
I once coached a radio host who was one of the best storytellers I had ever met. When he and I would meet one-on-one for coaching, he would tell me some of the funniest stories I had ever heard. He would tell me stories of his dad that would have me crying from laughing so hard.
He once told me his dad was absolutely convinced the PT Cruiser was the best car ever made. As much as my host would try to explain that the PT Cruiser was basically an incarnation of the Dodge Neon, his father wouldn’t believe it.
The two of them would get in these heated arguments in public about this car. Of all the things in life you could argue about, this happened to be the PT Cruiser.
The way the story was told was full of fabulous details. The host really had the ability to make the stories come to life.
As much as I would encourage him, the host would not tell those stories on the radio. He didn’t believe the audience as a whole would be interested.
Instead, he played it safe. He only discussed vanilla content that would not upset anyone. Unfortunately, the show never took hold.
Ray Romano is a great example of success stemming from the stories of real life. Ray used stories of his family in his stand-up comedy. That routine eventually became the hit TV show “Everybody Loves Raymond”.
Upset Someone
If you are not upsetting someone, you aren’t trying hard enough.
I would much rather have half the audience hate me and the other half love me rather than the entire audience have no opinion one way or the other. If the audience doesn’t have an opinion, they don’t care. I’m doing nothing to stir their emotion if I’m not making them pick a side.
If you haven’t picked a side and really focused your topic, people won’t care. They will not be passionate about your show.
Speak your mind. Be different. Get noticed. Make people care.
4 Steps
Here are four ways to make your podcast different from other shows in your niche.
1. Be real. Be yourself. Do no simply try to be an imitation of another show or host. Above all, tell the truth. It is much easier than remembers a character you have created.
2. All people to know you through stories. The details within your stories will reveal who you are. People do business with those that they know, like and trust. This is the first step.
3. Pick a side. Stand for something. That is the only way to stand out.
4. Avoid shades of gray. Be drastically different.
I would love to help you with your podcast. E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.
When you want your listeners to stick around and listen to what you have to say, you need to give them a compelling reason. Your listener needs to anticipate what is to come later in the show. You need to excite them. You need to tease them.
Anticipation is a key feature to storytelling. Your story should build just like a good plot builds in a movie. You need to make your audience anticipate the content that is on the way.
Your story is similar to a vacation you are planning to take. The fantastic anticipation for the trip is almost as pleasurable as the trip itself. You can’t wait for the trip to arrive. You want your listener to feel the same way about your story.
When your listener can’t wait for the story to arrive, you have created some great content with an powerful tease. Your listeners will get more enjoyment from your show when they get the tease payoff more often. The pleasure of the “oh wow” factor will be increased. The joy of anticipation will keep your audience coming back for more.
There are three steps to creating an effective tease.
#1 – Intrigue Me
When you promote content that is coming up later in the show, you must give your audience an intriguing reason to stick around. It isn’t enough to simply say, “A great story about this weekend is coming up.” Few will stick around for the payoff. The tease lacks stickiness. It doesn’t hook the listener.
A creative tease produces anticipation. Instead, use something like, “You’re never gonna believe who I was introduced to this past weekend. My world is about to take a wild turn.” With that statement, your imagination begins to work.
Who could it be? Was it a celebrity? An investor? A mentor or hero? Imagination is the magic of a creative tease. Stir the imagination of your audience to truly engage them with your content.
When possible, intrigue by incorporating the listeners world. “This weekend, I discovered a way to save $100 a month on my grocery bill by changing one thing in the way we shop. I’ll tell you how you can do it too.” It answers “what’s in it for me” for your listener.
#2 – Give Them 80%
To create an effective tease, give your listener 80% of the story while leaving out the most important 20%. It is similar to giving the setup for a joke without providing the punch line. Lead your listener right up to the line, but make them wait to step over.
The key to an effective tease is to withhold the most important 20%. Let’s use our previous example of the attic weekend. I could say, “You’re not gonna believe it, but I found a $25,000 antique painting in the attic this weekend. I’ll tell you what’s on it coming up.”
This is a perfect example of withholding the wrong 20%. Who cares who is on it. If it’s worth $25,000, it could be a painting of the sky. It wouldn’t matter to me. I’d only be asking where I could sell it.
$25,000 is the most exciting piece of information in the entire story. That is the piece that I need to withhold to create some excitement. To properly tease, I need to say, “In the attic this weekend, I found an antique painting of Napoleon. You’re never gonna believe how much it is worth.” You are more likely to stick around to see if I can retire on my winnings when I set it up in this fashion.
Make it impossible to search online.
You want your listener to keep listening for the payoff to your set up. If I can simply search on Google for the answer to your tease, there is no reason to keep listening. I can just look it up and be done with it.
#3 – Make Your Tease Unsearchable
Let’s say I have a story about Joe Celebrity getting drunk at High Profile Bar in Las Vegas over the weekend where he got arrested for assault. I could say, “Another movie star got arrested this weekend after he got in a fight with a customer at High Profile Bar in Las Vegas. I’ll tell you who it is coming up.”
Celebrity name is part of the correct 20% I’m withholding. However, I can look this story up on Google in a heartbeat. If I search “Arrest High Profile Bar Las Vegas”, the chances are good that I will find the story in the first few search results. The tease isn’t effective. It is too easy to search.
To make the tease more powerful, make it impossible to search. “Another bar fight over the weekend landed another celebrity in jail. The story is coming up.” This tease makes it much more difficult to search. If you entered “celebrity bar fight weekend” in Google, 70 million results show up. It will be much easier to wait for my payoff than to begin searching 70 million Google entries.
The three steps to powerful teases will help you begin to engage your audience on the way to building powerful relationships. Use the three steps in your show recap to entice people to listen to the episode. Then, use them again during the introduction of the show to get listeners to enjoy the entire recording.
You’ve worked hard to create your content. A lot of effort has been exerted on your part while writing and recording your show. Make your content intriguing by using these three steps in the art of the tease.
When you use the art of the tease, your listeners will spend more time with your show. The increase frequency of the tease payoffs will help your audience enjoy your content more. When your show is more entertaining, it becomes more engaging. When you truly engage your audience with your content, you can begin building powerful relationships. That’s where trust and influence with your listener begins.
I would love to help you with your podcast. E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.
Thanks for all the e-mail over the past few weeks. Seems my four-episode series on interviewing really got you thinking. Such great questions have been filling my inbox.
We will talk about a few of the interviewing questions on the episode this week. We will also discuss how to remove crutches from your podcast.
Here are a few of the questions …
RELATIONSHIPS
Erik, as I am listening to WTF’s Thursday episode when he was recapping the behind the scenes of the President’s visit, I thought it coincided with your episode this past week cause he was talking about how long the process took.
(Marc) Maron’s producer said exactly what you said about keeping up great relations and communications even if the interview didn’t seem likely to happen.
Erik, quick note to say I’ve been enjoying your podcast on interviewing people. Will you be at Podcast Movement?
-David Hooper www.redpodcast.com (A podcast about Real Entreprenuer Development.)
WHY IS DUMAS SO SUCCESSFUL?
Erik, I just found your podcast, and heard two shows about how to interview. I agree with your concept, but I wonder how does a show like Entrepreneur On Fire –John Dumas–do so well? I listened to his show for a while, but I don’t find it interesting anymore. And yet he is doing so well and clearly successful. What do you think?
-Thanks. (Name Withheld)
REMOVE THE CRUTCH
Hi, Erik! Big fan of the show, sir! Best help out there for podcasters that want to be better broadcasters! I find myself saying “like” way too much. How can I stop?
-Mike Seay www.dorktownpodcast.com (A podcast with comedy, interviews, discussions and more.)
This week, we get into all of that and more.
Thanks for the great e-mail. Your questions truly help me shape the content of the show. Keep them coming.
I would love to help you with your podcast. E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.
Six Tips To Land Better Podcast Interviews – Episode 095
How do you land the big interview guests? This is part four of my series on interviewing.
In Episode 092, we talked about interview priority #1. We talked about making your guest look good. When you make your guest look good, everyone wins.
In Episode 093, you learned two steps to powerful interviews. To create unique interviews, be sure you ask creative, interesting questions. Then, be sure to actively listen to the answers.
Then, in Episode 094, we discussed the three skills of great interviewers. To create engaging content that stands out in the sea of sameness, great interviewers learn to lose the script, know their guest and not just the bio, and keep the interview focused on the guest.
Before we get into finding guests for your show, let’s talk a bit more about great questions. When you develop the ability to find engaging, unique questions, you are well on your way to creating a podcast that will stand out.
Turn Over The Interview Rocks
How do you find great questions for your guest during your interview? Look in unlikely places. If you want to truly engage your audience, you need to ask engaging questions of your guest.
The guest’s website or news release is a decent place to get familiar with your guest. However, if you only use these common sources for the basis of your questions, you will be asking the same questions every other interviewer is asking. Your interview won’t be different and will not stand out from the crowd.
One source I like to use is the people traveling with the guest. Ask your guest’s traveling companion if anything amusing has happened lately. It will sound wonderfully spontaneous when you ask about it during the interview.
Country artist Miranda Lambert once joined me on my show before her performance as opening act for Kenny Chesney. Before she arrived, I asked her record label representative what she had been doing lately. He told me she had injured her leg night hunting a few days earlier.
After Miranda and I exchanged typical interview pleasantries, I said, “It looks like you have a little limp in your step. What happened?” She really wasn’t limping and was a bit surprised that I had noticed.
Miranda now got the chance to tell me a great story about falling down a small ravine while night hunting with her husband Blake Shelton. It was a wonderful question that included a story about her well-publicized relationship with Blake without asking typical interview questions. I didn’t ask, “So, what have you and Blake been up to lately?” I’m sure she gets questions like that often.
Be unique. Be original. Make your interview engaging for your audience and guest. Turn over the interview rocks.
Fish For Interviews With Bigger Bait
How do you land that big guest for your podcast? Here are a few 6 useful tips.
1 – FIND THE INTRODUCTION
Find people that know your prospect. See if they will introduce you.
Just the other day, a radio colleague came to me seeking an interview with Taylor Swift. I have interviewed her a couple times. He knew I was able to make an introduction for him.
2 – THE GATEKEEPER’S FRIEND
There are times when big names have people that run their schedule. This could be a personal assistant. It might be a booking agent. You need to make friends with these people.
In the music business, I always go through the record label. I need to create a strong relationship with that person in order to be at the top of the list when interview opportunities come about.
3 – WHAT’S IN IT FOR ME?
To score a guest interview for your podcast, you need to begin by explaining how the interview will benefit your prospective guest. The fact that your audience will love it has no bearing. It really doesn’t matter to your guest if your show or your audience will benefit from the guest’s appearance.
When your guest makes the decision whether to appear on your show, they will only consider how the appearance will benefit them personally.
Are they promoting a new book? Do they have a new product available?
What is in it for your guest? Make it easy.
4 – SHOW THEM WHAT YOU’VE GOT
Provide your prospects some examples of your great work. If you have endorsements, share those as well.
Create a short sizzle reel containing some of your best work. Provide some social proof that they won’t be alone in accepting your invitation.
5 – SIZE ISN’T THE ONLY THING THAT MATTERS
Many podcast hosts use their audience size to lure guests. If you have a reasonable audience size, surely use it to your advantage. However, don’t stop there. You may be overlooking many other ways you could benefit your guest.
You could offer to give your guest exposure on your website. You may have visitors to your site that do not listen to the show. Promote your guest on the site with a link to their content. This will be an additional benefit.
Mention your guest and interview in your blog. Again, your guest will be reaching additional audience. You are helping them spread their message beyond your podcast.
Your audience for any one of these avenues may be small. However, when you combine the benefit of each distribution method, your proposal for the interview will be more appealing to your guest. Use every audience you have to your advantage.
Offer to promote the interview and your guest’s information to your mailing list. You may have many people that receive your newsletter who may never listen to your podcast. By including a link to your guests website in your mailing, your guest will reach additional people. Take credit for that.
6- DON’T TRIP OVER THE NAMES YOU DROP
Play to your guest’s ego by dropping a few names. If you have had other notable guests on your show in the past, let your guest know. Tell your prospective guest they will be among good company. They will feel more comfortable saying yes to your request.
Use these six tips to help land some of those elusive, big guests for your podcast. Before you know it, you will be chatting it up with some of the best.
If you have never subscribed to the Podcast Talent Coach podcast, please spend two minutes to do so. I would truly appreciate your generosity. Click the link and then the subscribe button in iTunes.
Do you need help with your podcast? E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s see what we can do.
(This is part 3 of a 4-part series on interviewing.)
So many podcasts sound similar. The same guests. The same questions. The same answers. The sea of sameness.
As a podcasters who conducts interviews, how do you stand out? How do you make your interviews different and unique when compared to the others in your genre?
Podcasters that create powerful, unique, engaging interviews possess common traits. After coaching radio talent for over 2 decades and conducting my own interviews for 25 years, I have learned the skills that are necessary to conduct great interviews.
There is good news. You can easily learn these skills and begin to rise above the rest of the vanilla interviewers.
Let’s go over all three skills.
Lose The Script
When you are interviewing a guest on your podcast, be real. Be present in the moment. Truly listen to the answers your guest is giving. Your next question may come from that answer, and the question many be nowhere in your notes.
As you prepare for your interview, don’t script your questions. When you have a script, you will be too focused on the script and less attentive to the answers of your guest. Lose the script.
Instead of scripted questions. follow bullet points. Be prepared for your interview by being familiar with the material. Have an idea of the questions you want to ask. Review your bullet points to the point that you are ready to ask various questions about a single topic that might come up during the interview.
Be sure to make your questions succinct. A long-winded question is hard to follow for both your guest and your audience. Ask one short question. Let it lead into another short question. It may take three questions to get to the same answer as it would with your one long question. However, three short questions will be easier to follow and digest by your audience.
If you are concerned with following a script, you won’t allow yourself to explore unexpected twists and turns presented by the answers of your guest.
Television hosts such as Jay Leno and David Letterman used a list of questions on their blue cards that were previewed and screened by a show producer. The host may have started with one of those questions. They would then let the interview flow on its own. If the discussion hit a lull, Leno and Letterman would revert back to one of the bullet points on the card to restart the conversation.
You will never saw either of these hosts ask the card questions in order, in full or in a vacuum. The interview became organic and developed according to the answers of the guest. Your interview should do the same.
Know Your Guest, Not Their Bio
If you are only familiar with the bio of your guest, you will ask the same questions every other interviewer has asked. Your guest will be bored. They will provide the same lame answers they have given on every other show. There will be very little content here to engage anyone.
Instead, do a bit of research on your guest. When searching for your guest on the web, don’t stop at the first page. When skimming articles about your guest, don’t just look at the first few paragraphs. Find the unique material deep within the article.
When you have discovered something of interest about your guest, don’t tell them about it. Let your guest tell you the story. Throw them the easy pitch that they can hit out of the park. You don’t want your interview to sound like the Saturday Night Live bit where Chris Farley interviewed Sir Paul McCartney, leaving McCartney the only option of answering “yes” to Farley’s question.
Let your guest shine. Just because you know the details of the story, you don’t have to reveal that you do. Ask the question in a way that sets up the story so your guest can tell it. You will both look great.
The bio of your guest will give you common information. If your listeners know anything about your guest, they will probably be familiar with the content of the bio. Instead, do your homework. Know the guest, not their bio.
Keep Yourself Out Of The Interview
When you have invited a guest to appear on your podcast, your listener is interested in hearing your guest. Your guest is the star.
If your listener wanted to hear what you think about the subject, there would be no reason to have the guest on your show. You could simply disseminate the information by yourself. There is no problem if you want to provide the information yourself. Just simply save your guest the time, effort and dignity by leaving them at home.
Many hosts want to show the guest how much they know about the subject. This will sometimes come in the form of long, detailed questions. The host will fill time with personal stories that display their knowledge.
Unless you have invited your guest to debate you on a topic, as an interviewer, your job is to make your guest look good. Don’t invite the guest if you simply want to show how smart you are. Ask your guest questions that will allow them to tell great stories.
David Letterman, Jay Leno, Jimmy Fallon and the other great talk hosts use their monologue to address any topics they want to discuss. When they bring their guests on the show, they ask questions that will elicit great stories. Then, they sit back and listen.
Do your homework. Ask wonderful, open-ended questions that set up great stories. Then, sit back and listen. Keep yourself out of the interview.
I would love to help you with your podcast. E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.
This week, I would like to share with you the two steps to take in order to create powerful interviews.
Over the 25 years I have been on the radio and coaching radio talent, I have had the opportunity to interview many, many people. More importantly, I have had the chance to discuss the art of interviewing with celebrities, managers, coaches, consultants, radio talent and many others in the industry.
Time and time again, I hear the same thing. There are two elements that create successful interviews. Now, you can use these two steps to create great interviews on your podcast.
Don’t Ask That Question
If you have a decent guest on your podcast, they have probably been interviewed many, many times about the same subject. Popular guests often get bored with the same questions being posed to them over and over again. To make your interview truly engaging for all involved, find unique ways to ask questions that serve the guest as well as the listener.
Often, you will hear a host ask their guest stale, typical questions. You know the questions. “So, how did you come up with the name of your latest project?” You may hear them ask, “What have you been up to lately?” Guests truly dread these questions. They serve no real purpose, yet everyone asks them.
I have had musicians confide in me off the air how much they hate doing radio interviews, because they are all the same. When I once asked a question taken from the band’s website, my guest said, “Oh, I see you’ve read my bio.” He called me out right there on the air. Most hosts take the easy way out and just skim the bio or news release and take their questions straight from there.
Using typical methods lead to stale questions. “When does your album come out?” “Where did you get the name for the band?” “How did you guys meet?” Pop group Ben Folds Five began making up answers for the question “Where did you get the name for the band?”. In fact, they almost had a different answer every time the question was asked. They had to make the interview interesting for themselves.
Every guest is looking to benefit in some way from the interview. Usually, they have come on a show to promote their latest book or new product. You can help them do that without asking painful questions.
Let’s say you are interviewing a musician who has a new album coming out on July 1st. You ask, “When does the new album come out?” Your guest will instantly think, “Didn’t this guy do any homework before he set up this interview?” Your guest will also be saying in his head, “Oh, not this line of questioning again.”
Instead, make your questions interesting. Ask, “When you album comes out on July 1st, what will you be doing to celebrate?” You could also ask, “The album is released on July 1st. Who have you slipped some advanced copies to?” How about asking, “When the album hits stores on July 1st, where will you go buy your first copy?” Believe me, every artist buys a copy of their first album in the store. They just want to see it on the shelf.
By asking creative questions, you’ve helped the guest promote their goods without sounding stale. You have also avoided the mistake of stealing their answer. Be unique.
Country artist Little Big Town was recently a guest on my show. By reading information about the band on the internet, I knew all four members have kids. I also knew all of the kids travel with them when they tour. I could have asked, “What are the names of your kids.” How about, “Is it fun traveling with the kids?” I’m sure they get asked all of the time.
By getting a little creative, I asked the members of Little Big Town, “When the kids travel with you guys, what is the craziest kid thing you have on the bus?” They had just purchased a new kiddie pool for the summer that would fit on top of their gear. They also have a pink pottie for toilet training. It gave them a great opportunity to talk about their kids without asking the same, lame questions.
Keep your interview engaging. Be creative. Find unique ways to ask questions that serve the guest as well as the listener. By all means, don’t ask that question.
Did You Really Hear That?
When you are conducting an interviewing on your podcast, really listen to the answers your guest is giving. Don’t be in such a hurry to move on to the next question. Engage with your guests in order to make your show engaging for your listener.
I’m sure you probably think you are listening. In reality, you are probably thinking about the next great question you can ask. Even if you aren’t asking it, you are preparing the question in your head.
Stop. Be in the moment. Really listen to the answer of your guest. Let the answer spark your next question. If you truly listen to the answer, you will then ask the next logical question your listener is asking in their head.
When you are more concerned about the next question rather than the answer coming your way, you will miss the magic. Your guest could be giving you great question leads that you won’t find in their bio, on their website or in their news release.
If you don’t make it through your entire list of questions, nobody will know but you. The goal of the interview is to engage your audience. It doesn’t matter if that takes three questions or twelve from your list.
In every interview, intently listen to the answers. Did you really hear that?
To create powerful interviews, ask unique questions and then actually listen to the answers. Your podcast interviews will improve and be better than most other interviewers in your niche. Using these two steps will help you create engaging content and a respected podcast.
I would love to help you with your podcast. E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.
I recently received an e-mail from Bill Frank. He discovered me at NMX2015.
Bill was wondering how my coaching may help him with his interview show. I thought you may be having the same question.
This week, with the hope of helping you improve your interviews, I would like to begin sharing some of what I have learned while interviewing guests on the radio for 25 years.
When you have a guest on your podcast, it is your job as the interviewer to make the interviewee look good. You are the professional. You know everything there is to know about your podcast. Your guest is new to your show. They may even be new to interviewing. Help them.
When you help your guest get comfortable and look good, you help them successfully promote whatever it is they came on your show to promote. They will be grateful for that. Your guest will see the benefit of being a guest on your show. You will develop a reputation. That success will help you book even better guests in the future. Word will spread.
There are a three steps you can take to help your guest look good.
No Yes/No
First, ask open-ended questions. This will allow your guest to convey the information they have come to share. If you ask yes/no questions, your guest will be stuck trying to figure out how to get his point across. It will also be easy for him to simply say “yes” and leave it at that. You will then be the one trying to find the next point to make. Open-ended questions allow your guest to elaborate on their subject.
What’s In It For Me?
Second, know why your guest is on your show and help them make their point. Do a short pre-interview before you start the show. Ask them about the important points they would like to hit. Then during the show, ask them questions that help them make those points. If your guest tells you their spouse really had a huge impact on their success, ask them about their biggest influences in their success. Make it easy for them.
Set Them Up
Lastly, get out of the way. You don’t need to show your guest or your audience how much you know about their topic. It is their topic. So many hosts ask long, elaborate questions proving just how smart they are and how much they know about the subject. If the host knows it all, there is really no reason to have a guest. (see “One Of You Isn’t Necessary“.) Ask great questions because you know so much. That ability will make you look much better than actually knowing.
Using our previous example of spousal influence, you do not want to say, “Your wife played a huge role in your success with her support. That must have been a real help to you.” You just stole his thunder. You’ve only left him the option to say, “Yes” and make some menial points.
Instead ask, “Who was the one person other than yourself most responsible for your success?” You’ve created some anticipation for your audience. You’ve also just thrown him a softball that he can knock out of the park with a fantastic answer about his wife. He looks great for having such a stellar answer. You also look great for asking such a brilliant question. Everybody wins.
Help your guest succeed. Allow them to answer great questions. Most of all, make ’em look good.
If you have never subscribed to the Podcast Talent Coach podcast, please spend two minutes to do so. I would truly appreciate your generosity.
Do you need help with your podcast? E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s see what we can do.
(These tools can be found on the resource page at PodcastTalentCoach.com. Most links on that page are affiliate links. I receive a variable commission for all purchases made using those links.)
We are coming up on episode 100. This podcast has been up and running for a little over 18 months. I thought this would be a good time to review the tools I use to in my business. This includes the tools I use to create my podcast, website and newsletter. We will also review the resources I use to learn, grow and develop.
I have been using most of these resources for at least 18 months. Some have been used longer. A couple tools are more recent. For the most part, I have been a long time user and have been quite happy with each of them. That is why I feel confident recommending them to you. You can find affiliate links to most of these online at PodcastTalentCoach.com.
COACHING RESOURCE
This list doesn’t include much technical information, such as mixers, processors and software. I leave that to Dave Jackson at the School of Podcasting. He is tech expert that helps me. If you are looking for help setting up the studio, Dave is your guy. He leads off my resources.
TECHNICAL TOOLS
A few technical tools from my studio include my mic, my mac and a few web tools.
My studio mic is an ElectroVoice RE20. This runs about $450. It is a high quality mic. This mic is probably much more than a beginning podcaster needs. However, if you are serious about podcasting, this is a great mic.
My backup mic is a Blue Yeti. It gets the job done, but is a condenser mic. This costs around $100. You might be better off with a Audio-Technica ATR-2100. It s a great USB mic for about $60.
For editing, I use Adobe Audition in the studio. I will occasionally use Garage Band for quick projects or when I’m traveling.
I use a Mac Book Pro 13” for the flexibility. I cost me $1,200.
My mp3s are tagged with ID3 Editor from PA Software. The price tag was $15.
I host my audio with Libsyn. It runs $20/month.
My URLs were purchased through GoDaddy. The price really depends on the URL. You can usually find a deal. After the initial deal, I pay about $45/year.
I have a website on Homestead and one on Host Gator with WordPress. Homestead is a stand alone site builder. Host Gator just hosts my WordPress site. Homestead is $20/month. HostGator is $135/year, just over $11/month. WordPress is free.
On my website, I use Paypal for my transactions. Most of my providers accept it. Plus, they have a card option for my customers.
I use Aweber for my newsletter. It is $196/year. Just over $16/month. I looked at Mail Chimp. Both are very similar services if you have a list under 5,000.
Canva.com is a decent resource for creating graphics. They have a decent photo library as well. Most photos are about $1/photo.
I self-published my workbook through Create Space, an Amazon company. You simply upload a .pdf. It is fairly simple to use. Not very expensive. They also sell the workbook through Amazon and converted it to Kindle.
I am in the process of creating a membership portal through WishList Member. $297. They have solid training videos. I am not yet complete with this one.
LEARNING TOOLS
Dan Miller and 48Days.com is where it all started. He has great tools to help you find your passion and the work you love.
Internet Business Mastery is a great podcast and course that has helped me refine my business focus. Jeremy & Jason have been there and done it.
Michael Hyatt has a great membership site with Platform University. It is based on his book Platform, which is a must read as you develop your podcast. There is great learning inside the community. He only opens membership a couple times a year for enrollment. I got in early on this one and haven’t looked back since.
Audible.com has turned my car into a mobile classroom. I am usually listening to a couple books a month on top of the podcasts. You can get a free book when you use my affiliate link on the resources page.
Most of all, I cannot say enough about Dave Jackson and the School of Podcasting. If you want to learn the technical nuts and bolts, check out his course, membership and training tools.
You can find affiliate links to most of these online at PodcastTalentCoach.com. I would appreciate the support if you choose to use any of these links and great products.
I would love to help you with your podcast. E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.
Four Essential Elements of Powerful Storytelling – Episode 090
Why should you use storytelling in your podcast?
Have you noticed a lot of the business interview podcasts sound the same? We are hearing the same guests answer the same questions time and time again. How do you become unique in this sea of sameness?
Use stories.
Storytelling can transform your podcast.
The power of storytelling can help listeners get to know, like and trust you. Through that knowledge, true friendships are formed. Stories help define you and your character and personality. Great storytellers create fans.
Don’t fit in, stand out.
In this episode, we discussed great storytellers in various genres, such as country singer/songwriter Lee Brice, pop singer/songwriter Jason Mraz, Walt Disney and Zig Ziglar. All are great storytellers in their own right.
In podcasting, you cannot afford to be boring. Interest in your story never remains constant. Your information can only become entertainment when interest is rising. A great story continues to develop the plot and raise the interest.
There are four elements to great storytelling.
Give your listener a reason to care, reveal the details, create a great resolution, and then ask what else?
Give Her A Reason To Care
Begin by creating an engaging introduction. What do you want the audience to feel? Begin your story there.
Your engaging introduction is the roadmap for your listener. This will tell your listener where the story is going.
Reveal The Details
Details are more believable than generalities. Be sure to use all 5 senses in your details. Put your listener in the moment by creating wonderful images in the theater of the mind.
Details help reveal specifics about your thoughts, beliefs and character. Listeners begin to know, like and trust you.
Powerful Resolution
Your powerful resolution is a reframing of your introduction. This is where you put the nice bow on the package.
What Else?
Asking “what else” will transform your show. This helps continue the conversation. “What else” will let your content live on long after the episode is over.
Let your story lead to something bigger. This is all part of your strong call to action. Get your community involved.
How Can You Be A Storyteller?
Ask yourself these questions:
What is the engaging set up?
How will your point be revealed in the story?
What is the power resolution?
What else can you do with the material?
Resources
Here are a few other episodes that can help you refine your storytelling:
At New Media Expo 2015, I met many podcasters that were weeks and months away from launching.
“I’m 30 days away from launching.”
“I’m about 90 days from going live with my podcast.”
“I’m still conducting interviews preparing for my launch this summer.”
What is holding you back?
I know what you feel. I was in your shoes when launching my podcast. Planning. Learning. Researching. Trying to get it just right.
Don’t let perfection keep you from launching.
We often let procrastination creep into our lives disguised as “planning” and “researching”. We tell ourselves we will launch right after we complete a few more steps on our “to do” list.
Here is the problem: The “to do” list keeps growing preventing us from launching.
When I was launching, I started with a blog. The blog grew slowly. I finally came to the realization that podcasters would rather listen to podcasts than read.
My podcast planning began.
I started watching videos on podcasting. Podcasts about podcasting filled my iPhone. Newsletter subscriptions hit my e-mail inbox. The NMX virtual ticket was my next purchase. I even bought books about podcasting. I consumed everything I could find.
I kept telling myself I was preparing. Truth is, I was just procrastinating.
Months into my learning and planning stage, Dave Jackson from School of Podcasting reached out. Dave found my blog and wondered why I didn’t have a podcast.
Dave, don’t you understand? I’m planning. I’m researching. I’m learning. Look at all the work I’m doing.
Dave wasn’t buying it. He had seen this movie before and knew how it ended.
During that 90 minute phone call, Dave pushed me. He challenged me. Dave had confidence that I could launch in a week or two. I simply needed to move.
That was the trick.
Start with the first step.
You’ve heard it before. Every journey begins with the first step.
Your first step may not be in the right direction. However, you make corrections as you go. Eventually, you reach your destination.
People often ask me how I can stand and speak in front of 15,000 people. I started with the first step.
Speaking in front of 20 people in speech class was tough enough.
To earn extra money in college, I began working as a wedding DJ. That job forced me to make announcements to groups of people every weekend.
One weekend it hit me.
People simply are not as interested in my speaking success and failure as I am.
If I mess us while speaking, there is a good chance I will be the only one to remember. People don’t care that much.
The same is true with your podcast. If you mess it up, few will notice let alone care.
Dave Jackson always uses a quote from Ryan Parker from FoodCraftsmen.com. “Nobody will punch you in the face.”
Are you letting self doubt keep you from launching? Is the Impostor Syndrome holding you back?
“Why would anyone care what I have to say?”
“What if I fail?”
“What if I make a fool of myself?”
All of the self doubt is natural.
We tend to make more of our mistakes than anyone else.
Don’t let the fears hold you back. Find someone to push you and hold you accountable.
We could surely work together where I can help that happen. You could also just find a friend that will push you to launch. Either way, push yourself to make it happen.
Now is the time to launch. Not 90 days from now. Not 30 days from now. Not after you have 8 episodes in the can.
Launch now.
Record an episode and get it out. Set some deadlines and take some baby steps.
Let’s make it happen. Pick a date and launch.
I would love to help you with your podcast. E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.
Lionel Ritchie is a class act and every bit of a gentleman you would hope he would be.
Do they remember?
When you consider the options podcast listeners have, the importance of creating a powerful brand really becomes apparent.
I searched iTunes for podcasts about hockey. There are hundreds of hockey podcasts available. Thousands and thousands of episodes exist that deal with hockey. You can find various topics, including drills, NHL teams, coaching, fantasy hockey and many more.
How do you stand out? How do you get noticed?
Your listener needs to remember your podcast, so they can return and listen again. That is the way to build a following. It really doesn’t matter how many people listen today. What builds a strong podcast is the number of listeners that come back the next time, and the next time, and the time after that. You build your audience slowly with more listeners this week than you had last week. Get your listener to remember to return.
Using your brand to create strong relationships with your listeners is critical to the health of your podcast. If you are bland, you will get lost in the sea of average. There are over 100,000 podcasts available for consumption. Most of them are average or worse. If you refine your content, turn your information into entertainment, and transform your podcast into powerful relationships, you will easily stand out from the crowd. It is a must not only for your success, but your mere survival. Begin your brand today.
When it comes time for your audience listening again, do they remember?
Be Yourself
A great podcast is a great relationship. It is just like creating a great brand. In order to develop that solid relationship, you must be yourself. You can’t fake it.
When you try to be someone or something you are not, you will not sound authentic. Eventually, the truth will come out.
Have you ever met someone you had admired from afar, only to have them do something that didn’t fit with your image of them? Maybe it was a baseball player, or a movie star, or a politician or a musician. You met them with great expectations of an encounter with your hero only to find out they were rude and average. It turned out they were only being who they thought they should be for the public when really they were someone completely different in real life.
Everyone has their flaws. That is what makes them human. Howard Stern has flaws. He makes his flaws part of his show. Domino’s Pizza admitted the errors of their ways with their cheap, low quality pizza. They laid it out for the world to see in their marketing. Your listener will accept your flaws. They will feel like you are “one of them” when you admit your flaws upfront. Don’t be afraid to expose yourself.
When your listener discovers you are something other than the character you portray, the bond of trust will be demolished. Your relationship will be forever damaged.
Build a solid brand. Be yourself.
Unique, Vivid, Mental Images
When someone tells a story, on the radio or in a podcast, it is theater of the mind. When you hear the old time radio show describe the dim light on in the servant’s quarters, the scenery is playing out in your mind in a unique way unlike the way anyone else could envision it. No other person is imagining the clothing of the characters the exact same way you are imagining them. That mental theater is unique to you. You are listening and imagining by yourself.
Podcasts make the one-on-one approach even more important. Podcasts are often enjoyed through headphones. Your audience is truly listening by themselves. The headphones block out all other sounds and distractions. You have multiple “one person” audiences at the same time. Yet, it is still one person.
Connect with your “one person” audience by creating a great theater. The theater will be different for each listener, because they are using their individual imagination. Create a movie and put the listener in it. Make the story an individual experience for the listener. Engage the listener with vivid details and a fantastic storyline. Make them forget they are listening to a podcast. Create great theater of the mind. Create unique, vivid, mental images.
I would love to help you with your podcast. E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.
Photo bombed by Mark Harmon. Rob Greenlee, Rob Walch, Erik K. Johnson, Seth Resler and Dave Jackson.
Before we jump in this week, can I ask a quick favor? If you have never subscribed to the Podcast Talent Coach Podcast, can you please take two minutes to do so and leave a review? It will help us get exposed to new podcasters and grow our community. Thanks a million. CLICK HERE.
New Media Expo 2015 wrapped up in Las Vegas last week. What an amazing event.
As Director of the Podcasting Track at NMX, Dave Jackson from the School of Podcasting put together an amazing line up of talent.
Though the sessions were packed full of great information, the relationships created at these events make it more than just a learning opportunity. I had the chance to connect with great people I have known for a bit. Here are just a few:
There were many others that I met and created valuable conversations. New Media Expo is such an incredible event for our podcasting community.
After I attend a conference like this, usually on the flight home, I like to review my notes to find the big points I can put to use as soon as I arrive home. This week, I would like to share with you my top 12 takeaways from NMX.
This list isn’t nearly exhaustive of the things I learned. Some are not even new, but great reminders. We dig into each one in this episode.
1. Schedule it, so it gets done.
2. If advertising is driving people away from traditional media, why are so many podcasters so anxious to add commercials to their show?
3. From Mignon Fogarty: E-mail newsletter is the #1 way to reach your audience. Make sure it has a personal tone.
4. From Chris Ducker: There seems to be a lack of originality in the online business space. Stop being lazy and come up with your own (stuff).
5. From Rob Walch: iOS usage crushes android devices 6:1 in download ratio. (In this episode, we also discuss a few tips for iTunes search he provided.)
6. From Lou Mongello: Don’t forget the importance of face-to-face contact and communication.
7. From Mark Ramsey: Beginnings matter. Radio listeners always come in somewhere in the middle. Podcast listeners always come in at the beginning.
8. From Pat Flynn: I’d rather live a life full of oh wells, than a life full of what ifs.
9. From Dave Jackson: When you wonder why anyone would ever listen to you, remember that you are special (neat). Then, embrace your uniqueness, and understand the bar isn’t set very high.
10. From Daniel J. Lewis: The description in iTunes does not help SEO, but does help the PERSON. Make your episode titles appealing, as if they are your portfolio.
11. From David Hooper: People aren’t paying you to podcast. They are paying you to help solve their problems.
12. From Cliff Ravenscraft: When growing your audience/community, connect to your existing audience and make the experience great for them. Get word of mouth to spread.
Thanks for spending another week with me. I truly appreciate your time.
I also want to thank Joshua and Mercy for the amazing feedback regarding the last episode about your “why”. Many of you sent feedback, which I greatly appreciate. I had wonderful exchanges with Joshua and Mercy that helped me create a great plan. Thanks for all you do for me.
If you have never subscribed to the Podcast Talent Coach podcast, please spend two minutes to do so. I would truly appreciate your generosity.
Do you need help with your podcast? E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s see what we can do.
I’ve been doing a lot of work on my business over the past few weeks. In “The E-Myth Revisited”, author Michael Gerber talks about moving your business forward by spending more time working on your business rather than in it.
That is exactly what I’ve been doing lately. Am I going down the right path?
I thought you and I could review my progress with the hope that it will help you with your process.
We all face the little voice inside our head telling us we are not good enough. Whether we have been doing this for six months or six years, we all need a little confidence boost every now and then. It is only natural.
I will be speaking at New Media Expo in a week. (Last week to save $100 HERE.) My review of my business was inspired by NMX. I want to be sure things are in place to make the most of the opportunity.
As I have stepped back to look at the big picture, I have been reviewing a few great books like “The E-Myth Revisited”.
START WITH WHY
Another book that has helped my review is “Start With Why” by Simon Sinek. The book is focused on the theory that people do not buy what you do. They buy why you do it. Turn your customers into fans by making them believe in your mission and purpose.
Have I sufficiently defined my why? I thought I had. Even after refining it a few times, I am not quite sure.
Podcast Talent Coach is just over 18 months old as a podcast. From the limited feedback I have received from you, I am not quite sure my “why” is clear enough to truly inspire you to create great work.
Podcast Talent Coach was launched to help podcasters gain more confidence in their content. When you open the mic, I want you to truly believe that your voice matters. I want to arm you with the confidence you need to beat back the butterflies and excuses in order to create powerful content episode after episode.
With the information I provide every week, you should be able to take your information and turn it into entertainment that is engaging for your audience and unique to you.
MY STORY
I have been in radio for 25 years. I have been coaching radio talent for 20 of those years. As I listened to podcasts, I realized so many podcasts could improve with a few tips I have learned and used over those two-and-a-half decades.
The coaching experience I have gained could easily be used to help podcasters create amazing content that could replace other entertainment sources if I could only reach those podcasters.
Eighteen months in, I have only connected with a handful of podcasters interested in making that amazing entertainment a reality.
As I step back and examine the progress, I come up with four possible explanations.
1. ALREADY GETTING IT
One reason could be you get all you need from this podcast and the free worksheets I offer. You don’t feel one-on-one coaching is necessary.
If this was the reason, I would see more downloads of both.
2. SPREAD THE WORD
Another explanation could be I haven’t done a good job spreading the word about the show.
When I launched, the show got a solid start. I hit a few hundred downloads quickly. Things slowed down quite a bit after that. A few hundred downloads is about average and nothing to sneeze at. I am grateful for each person that joins me every week. Thank you for being here.
As I continue to produce content for you each week, I am not seeing further growth. That concerns me.
3. PROBLEM SOLVING
A third reason I may not be seeing continued growth could be the market. Maybe I have not done a good job creating a solution to a problem my audience knows they have.
This is a likely reason. Most podcasters who have the confidence and ego to open the mic and create content every week believe they are good enough the way they are. They may not realize that there are steps they could take to create more powerful content.
It is also possible the problem I am trying to solve does not exist. As I help radio broadcasters improve their shows, many of them fear the critique then love the feedback and growth after the fact.
4. THE “WHY”
The final reason may be my “why”. It is very possible that I have not sold my “why” well enough.
I have defined what I do quite a bit. But have I really defined why I do it for you? Maybe not.
My love for great radio and creative podcasts drive me to do this show every week. I love being able to create great audio that people look forward to every week.
More importantly, I love sharing my knowledge of that process with others. You can create amazing visual images in the theater of the mind to inspire your listener with your podcasts. Inspire them in such a way that they cannot wait for the next episode.
That incredible anticipation of future episodes is what makes this medium so wonderful. Holding the attention of a listener to the point where they cannot get enough of you is an amazing feeling.
FIND THE GOOD
Dave Jackson and I do a show together called “The Podcast Review Show”. Each episode, we invite a podcaster on the show to have his or her podcast reviewed by the two of us. It takes a great deal of confidence to have two coaches review your show right in front of you.
Every guest is a little nervous coming on the show. They are not quite sure what we will say. They fear we are going to tear their podcast apart and affirm their belief that they are not good enough.
During the show, Dave and I look for areas of the episode that are really good. Our goal is to help podcasters do more of the good. In turn, that will replace the stuff that isn’t as strong. In the end, the podcast gets better.
Every guest fears coming on the show, but truly appreciates the actionable feedback at the end of the process.
JUMP THE HURDLE
Here lies my problem with Podcast Talent Coach. It is not easy to get you over the fear of being critiqued in order to get you the joy of the improvement. That fear at the front door is a pretty big barrier. It is very similar to the fear of getting in the roller coaster line in order to enjoy the exhilaration when you finally get off of the ride.
The anticipation and fear could be preventing Podcast Talent Coach from growing.
Then again, I am not sure what is holding me back. Maybe it is a bit of all four. My gut tells me it is probably the lack of communicating my “why”.
WHAT IS YOUR WHY?
Have you communicated your “why” well enough? Have you inspired your fan with the reason you create your content every week?
I haven’t come up with the answer to my problem quite yet. I’ll continue working on my business until I find the solution.
I would love your input. As a frequent listener to Podcast Talent Coach, what do you hear? What brings you back every week? What has prevented you from getting more involved with coaching?
E-mail me anytime you would like at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let me know what you think. How can I better help you?
Thanks for being here. I truly value your attention every week. You mean the world to me. I will help you any way I can.
7 Ways To Improve Your Podcast This Week – Episode 085
There are many ways to improve your podcast. This week, I have 7 ways for you that should be pretty easy to implement.
To help you in various ways, I have selected 7 different areas for improvement. You will feel the need to make different improvements at different times. The different areas should help.
Start with the one suggestion that interests you most. Then, work your way though the remaining tips.
Improve Your Audio
The easiest way to improve your audio is to begin using a pop filter. This is a simple screen that goes over or in front of your microphone.
A pop filter prevents puffs of air from attacking your mic as you speak. You can find inexpensive pop filters online. You can also make your own out of nylons and a wire clothes hanger.
To cut down echo, record in a smaller room. In the past, I’ve used a large closet. Not only does the small room cut down the bounce of the sound waves, the clothes hanging around you will cut down on any echo.
If you do not have a closet, find the smallest room you can. A smaller room equals less echo.
Once you have a small room, hang baffling to absorb the sound waves. You do not need to spend a ton of money for expensive baffling. I have used packing foam, sleeping bags and folded, corrugated cardboard covered with blankets. Find any soft material to absorb the sound.
Improve Your Content
To improve your material, you need to review your show. Professional athletes watch game film to improve. Learn to do the same.
Listen like a listener. Pick a show from a few weeks ago and listen on the way to work or while you are exercising. Make note of the pieces that jump out at you and those that need work.
Do more of the good stuff. Replace the rough parts with more good stuff.
You will only truly hear the good and bad when you listen like a listener.
Improve Your Show Notes
Make your show notes valuable for your fans. Incorporate links listeners can use.
Create beneficial links. Sure, link to your own content. Then, link to tools that you use. Link to great articles. Link to helpful resources. Create value.
When your listeners benefit from your show notes, they are likely to come back more often.
Improve Your Interaction
If you want your listeners to interact with the show, make it easy for them.
Focus your call-to-action on one thing. When you add more than one, you force your listener to make a decision. Decision making is too much work.
Decide what you want your listener to do after listening to this specific episode. Then, add that call-to-action at the end of the show.
Your call-to-action can be different for each episode. Even so, only include one per episode.
Improve The Value To Your Listener
What do you want your listener to gain by listening this week? Have a goal for every episode.
How will the listener benefit? When you know this before you begin recording, you can better ensure your listener gains something by listening.
The only way to know that you have achieved your goals is to prepare properly. You need to define your goals and listener benefits before you begin recording. This should be part of your show prep.
This particular episode of Podcast Talent Coach empowers you with seven ways to improve your podcast. That is how you will benefit. I defined that goal before I began recording. It was part of my prep.
Improve Your Consistency
Consistency builds trust. When your listener expects your show to be posted every Friday, you need to post every Friday.
Listeners are creatures of habit.
When your show does not show up, it is just like you have missed an appointment with a client. You are destroying the trust you have built with your fan.
To improve consistency, develop a show schedule and stick to it. Know when you will record. Know when you will post. Now, stick to it.
Improve Your Engagement
Engagement is different than interaction. A listener that cannot turn your show off is engaged. A fan that is providing feedback is interacting.
If you want to engage your listener, talk to that person as an individual. When you address your audience as a group, your listener does not feel special. Talk to one person.
When you talk to your listener as an individual, she feels special. She feels like you are having a conversation with her.
When you address your listeners like a crowd, your fan can get up and leave without feeling guilty. It would be just like walking out during a concert. Nobody is going to notice. No engagement.
Here is the checklist:
1. Improve your audio by using a pop filter, a smaller room and baffling.
2. Improve your content by reviewing your show like a listener.
3. Improve your show notes by incorporating links your fans can use.
4. Improve your interaction by using one, focused call-to-action.
5. Improve the value to your listener by defining the benefit before you begin.
6. Improve your consistency by developing a schedule and sticking to it.
7. Improve your engagement by talking to one individual.
Pick one of these improvements, and get to work this week. Your podcast improves little by little. The more steps you can take moving forward, the more improvement you will make.
Have a great week. Let me know how I can help.
I’d love to help you with your podcast. E-mail me any time at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.
You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.
Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.
The purpose of a show clock is to provide a consistent framework for your content. By using a framework, you do not need to reinvent the wheel for every show. You simply plug in your great content into the clock.
Using a clock and being prepared does not mean you need to be less creative. In fact, it allows you to focus on creativity rather than the length of your episode. You get to design within the framework.
You can see examples of a show clock by watching the evening news. A typical newscast may follow of framework of top story, weather headline, general news, full weather, sports, and a kicker story.
Late night shows will use something like a monologue, funny skit, benchmark (like letter bag), big guest, second guest, and musical guest.
QUESTIONS TO START
As you begin to develop your show clock, there are a few questions you need to determine for the layout of the show.
What is it that you want to include in each episode of your show?
What is the goal of your podcast?
Once you are ready to add the content for this particular episode, you will need to answer two more questions.
What will the call-to-action be at the end of the show?
What is the main idea your listener will take away and remember?
Let’s look at an example of a show clock. For this example, we will use a 60-minute show.
For our sample show, we want to include a show open, intro/tease, latest update on our business happenings, an interview, tip of the week, call-to-action and the show close. 7 items total.
The content will not be the same every week. However, the structure will remain constant. The episodes will include different interviews, different news, and different tips. However, our listener will know what to expect from each episode.
Now that we have the elements, how do we lay these items into a structure for our show?
First, we determine the length of each to fit our hour. Length of each bit should also be consistent.
Open – 1 minute
Intro/tease – 5 minutes
Latest update on our business happenings – 15 minutes
An interview – 25 minutes with intro and thank you
Tip of the week – 10 minutes
Call-to-action – 3 minutes
Show close – 1 minute
Next, we turn the elements into running time to keep us on track.
:00-:01 – Open
:01-:06 – Intro/tease
:06-:21 – Latest update on our business happenings
:21-:46 – An interview
:46-:56 – Tip of the week
:56-:59 – Call-to-action
:59-:60 – Show close
When you are recording your show, you can use this layout to keep you on time.
CLOCK PITFALLS & EXCEPTIONS
You also need to keep an eye on edits and timing. Edits will lengthen the recording that will become shorter once you edit the episode. Therefore, record more than you need. You can always remove audio. Finding additional audio to add to extent your episode to 60 minutes is difficult.
If you hope to include a 20-minute interview in the episode, you should record a 30-minute interview. You can then edit it down to the best content for a solid 20-minute piece in the show.
There are always exceptions to the rule. You do not need to be exact with times. This show clock is to keep you on track. If your 5 minute segment turns into 7, you will still be ok. You will simply need to shorter your 20 minute bit to 18. It will ebb and flow.
Be consistent. If your listener expects a 60 minute show, they will accept 55 minutes. However, 45 will feel short. 1:15 will feel like you are overstaying your welcome. Use the clock to get close.
You can also have the occasional special show that breaks format. Just ensure the show is special. If you are going to break your brand promise, you better make sure it is worth it.
You can get sample clocks and blank clocks on the Worksheet Page online at PodcastTalentCoach.com. Find them HERE.
I’d love to help you with your podcast. Post any questions or comments you might have, or e-mail me at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.
You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.
Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.
5 Ways To Use Social Media To Drive Engagement – Episode 082
Using social media to drive our businesses is nothing new. However, there are a million different philosophies about how to properly use the platforms.
At the Country Radio Seminar in Nashville recently, social media was the topic of quite a few panels, presentations and discussions. I gathered some facts and quite a few tips and tricks for you to use.
There is quite the difference between Facebook and Twitter. Many see the two platforms as similar and equally important. That couldn’t be further from the truth.
83% of people use Facebook everyday. 17% use Pinterest. 12% use Instagram and only 8% use Twitter on a daily basis.
Facebook is personal. The platform is used to connect with family and friends to share life. This is often the first thing people do when they wake up in the morning.
Twitter is interesting, real time communication. The platform allows you to interact with others. Twitter is a discussion when used effectively.
Facebook and Twitter should be used differently. Content lives and is relevant longer on Facebook. Twitter is the here and now.
Here are five ways to use social media more effectively to drive your podcast engagement.
ACKNOWLEDGE
To create community and engagement using social media, make those that follow you feel interesting. Retweet their content. Acknowledge them. Get involved in the discussion.
STOP YELLING
Use social media like you are a fan instead of a marketer yelling at people. Get excited about the things that get your fans excited.
Use the 90/10 rule. 90% of your content should be entertaining and helpful. Only 10% of your posts should be selling anything.
BE PURPOSEFUL
Keep three goals in mind when you are using social media to engage your tribe. Seek to either inform, entertain or appreciate. “Hey, buy my book” is none of the above. You can promote your book while accomplishing one of the three goals. You simply need to be creative.
Most people unfollow someone because of uninteresting content.
STIR EMOTION
Stirring emotion within your tribe will get them excited. Play to their heart instead of their head.
Use positive feelings most of the time. Stir a mix of motions, but always bring it back to a positive, happy ending or hope. Finally, surprise your tribe.
YOU ARE ON CAMERA
Video is really driving engagement on social media. Figure out how to incorporate a little of that into your strategy. Inform, entertain or acknowledge using video once in awhile.
Make personal connections and interactions to drive your engagement. Social media is a great way to accomplish those connections.
The Country Radio Seminar taught me so much. It is also an amazing way to meet new people and make connections. You can do the same. Join me at New Media Expo April 13-16 in Las Vegas. I would love to see you when I present my session on powerful storytelling.
Learn how to use stories to create that engagement and powerful call to action. Meet a ton of new people to help you move your business forward. Use my affiliate link and promo code to save $100 on your registration here.
I’d love to help you with your podcast. Post any questions or comments you might have, or e-mail me at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.
You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.
Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.
Many podcasters conduct interviews as part of their show. If you fit that category, and you are like most of us, you probably struggle to convince those top shelf names to make an appearance on your show.
What is the trick? How do you land that big guest for your podcast?
Let’s face it. Asking a busy, successful entrepreneur to give up an hour of their time to give you an interview is a tough ask. Their time is money. How can your podcast be more valuable than their other options?
Here are six useful tips to help land those big names.
FIND THE INTRODUCTION
Find people that know your prospect. See if they will introduce you.
Just the other day, a radio colleague came to me seeking an interview with Taylor Swift. I have interviewed her a couple times. He knew I was able to make an introduction for him.
Use the same process to help yourself.
THE GATEKEEPER’S FRIEND
There are times when big names have people that run their schedule. This could be a personal assistant. It might be a booking agent. You need to make friends with these people.
In the music business, I always go through the record label. I need to create a strong relationship with that person in order to be at the top of the list when interview opportunities come about.
WHAT’S IN IT FOR ME?
To score a guest interview for your podcast, you need to begin by explaining how the interview will benefit your prospective guest. The fact that your audience will love it has no bearing. It really doesn’t matter to your guest if your show or your audience will benefit from the guest’s appearance.
When your guest makes the decision whether to appear on your show, they will only consider how the appearance will benefit them personally.
We were able to help a very sick young girl meet Taylor Swift … from her hospital bed.
Lolo was a young 11-year-old girl. Her wish was to see Taylor Swift in concert. She was getting tickets for Christmas. However, when Taylor came to town, Lolo was in the hospital fighting for her life. She was in Children’s Hospital fighting leukemia.
I passed along Lolo’s wish to Taylor’s record label. It wasn’t only the story that got Taylor. I know she loves giving back in very special ways. The Taylor Swift tour was coming through town for two days. I knew there would be some down time the day of the second show.
I made it as easy as possible for Taylor to make Lolo’s dreams come true. That is exactly what happened. You can see the story here:
What is in it for your guest? Make it easy.
SHOW THEM WHAT YOU’VE GOT
Provide your prospects some examples of your great work. If you have endorsements, share those as well.
SIZE ISN’T THE ONLY THING THAT MATTERS
Many podcast hosts use their audience size to lure guests. If you have a reasonable audience size, surely use it to your advantage. However, don’t stop there. You may be overlooking many other ways you could benefit your guest.
You could offer to give your guest exposure on your website. You may have visitors to your site that do not listen to the show. Promote your guest on the site with a link to their content. This will be an additional benefit.
Mention your guest and interview in your blog. Again, your guest will be reaching additional audience. You are helping them spread their message beyond your podcast.
Offer to promote the interview and your guest’s information to your mailing list. You may have many people that receive your newsletter who may never listen to your podcast. By including a link to your guests website in your mailing, your guest will reach additional people. Take credit for that.
Your audience for any one of these avenues may be small. However, when you combine the benefit of each distribution method, your proposal for the interview will be more appealing to your guest. Use every audience you have to your advantage.
DON’T TRIP OVER THE NAMES YOU DROP
Play to your guest’s ego by dropping a few names. If you have had other notable guests on your show in the past, let your guest know. Tell your prospective guest they will be among good company. They will feel more comfortable saying yes to your request.
If you conduct interviews as part of your podcast, use these six steps to land the bigger names. It will not happen overnight. However, consistent fishing with this better bait will surely land you some larger fish.
I’m speaking at NMX 2015. Save $100 on your registration with coupon code Ejohnson20 when you use my affilate link HERE.
I’d love to help you with your podcast. Post any questions or comments you might have, or e-mail me at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.
You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.
Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.
How To Turn Overwhelm Into Focused Power – Episode 079
(photo by Albo)
This week, I received an e-mail from Cynthia Davis from CynthiaDavis.net and her podcast “Home Front”. She is finding herself overwhelmed by everything she hopes to accomplish with her podcast. In this episode, I offer a few suggestions to defeat that overwhelming feeling and find focus in her work.
Here is the e-mail …
I am still struggling on the bottom rung of the ladder and have no idea how to implement everything you suggest without having staff to help with this effort.
It’s my own fault because I could spend more time on this than I do, but I am at my maximum capacity with all the other responsibilities I have to juggle.
I have been doing the podcast for over two years, but it’s not growing. In fact, the e-mail list I have used to make people aware of a new podcast coming out has been shrinking. I wish my show would grow organically and that my super-fans would promote it, but that’s simply not happening.
The only conclusion I can come to is that the world doesn’t like my message. I am overwhelmed. I am about to record my 100th episode and I believe the content is as good as I can make it, but if no one wants our message, what can we do?
-Cynthia
Overwhelm is natural. I think we all face it at some point in time. We all want to accomplish so much, yet we have limited time in the week. Let’s find those tasks that will really move the needle and make a difference for us.
Here are Cynthia’s primary questions with six steps to turn the overwhelm into focused power.
SO MUCH TO DO
“no idea how to implement everything you suggest”
-Don’t feel like you need to do it all. Focus on one or two things that will move the needle.
FINDING TIME
“I could spend more time on this than I do”
-Spend your time wisely. Instead of two hours on one day, make it 30 minutes each night before you go to bed.
NOT GROWING
“I have been doing the podcast for over two years, but it’s not growing”
-Find two or three ways to grow your podcast that utilize tasks you already do or enjoy. If you’re on social media, make that part of your growth plan.
SHRINKING LIST
“the e-mail list I have used to make people aware of a new podcast coming out has been shrinking”
-Be consistent in your e-mail. Send it on a regular basis. Make content that is anticipated. Add content that helps people solve their problems. Be giving.
NO ORGANIC GROWTH
“I wish my show would grow organically and that my super-fans would promote it”
-Give fans a reason to share it. Make your content sharable. Lists, tips, recipes, photos, jokes, and recommendations are all sharable.
NOBODY LIKES ME
“The only conclusion I can come to is that the world doesn’t like my message”
-Find the people that want your message. Do outreach. Find the communities where your kin congregate. Get involved.
Follow these six steps and you are sure to find more focus in your work. These tips will help you decrease the overwhelming feeling in your life. You can find the area that move the needle and truly work smarter rather than harder.
I’m speaking at New Media Expo 2015 in Las Vegas. You can save $100 on your registration. Use the coupon code Ejohnson20. Find all of the details by clicking HERE.
I’d love to help you with your podcast. Post any questions or comments you might have, or e-mail me at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.
You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.
Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.
Whether you are a seasoned podcaster or brand new to the game, refining your podcast focus is always an important step to keep your listener engaged.
Brand new podcasters can use these five questions to refine the focus of their podcast idea.
Podcasters have been doing it for awhile can use these though starters in order to step back and assess the quality of their content and determine if they are reaching the goals established.
These questions will help you find content that your listener desires, solve a problem your listener encounters often, and find topics that make it easy for you to create that sticky content.
Sharpen your podcast focus using these five questions.
What are you passionate about?
– You will find it much easier to create content on a regular basis if you are discussing something that stirs your passion.
What are your unique qualities?
– Your unique qualities will separate you from the other podcasts in your niche.
What topics tend to occupy your conversations?
– If you find it easy to often discuss a topic in conversation, you will find it easy to discuss it regularly on your podcast.
What do you like to do in your spare time?
– Your passions usually occupy your spare time. If you find those things that occupy your spare time, you may have a solid topic for your podcast.
What topics do people ask you about most?
– If people are asking you about particular topics, that is usually a good signal there is a problem there along with some interest.
Make your content more engaging. Use these 5 questions to sharpen your podcast focus.
I’d love to help you with your podcast. Post any questions or comments you might have, or e-mail me at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.
You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.
Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.
My daughter took a group of us to the Katy Perry show. Now that’s a unique brand.
A memorable brand that becomes a household name. It is like the Holy Grail. So many companies strive for it, but so few achieve it. Why is that?
A brand is a type of product manufactured by a particular company under a particular name, a brand name, a particular identity or image regarded as an asset, or a particular type or kind of something.
But, when we think of a brand, we think of so much more. There is so much more emotion in a powerful brand.
Each of those iconic brands were available at the same time their counterpart was making a name for themselves. Yet, the iconic brands became huge, powerful, valuable names. That’s not to say the other brands were not familiar or valuable. Those competitor brands simply did not become the astronomical brands of the segment leaders.
Why is that? What can you learn from these iconic brands that can help your podcast become a name, identity or image, but a name that evokes powerful emotion from your listener. How can you create fans instead of a casual audience?
Here are six steps you can put into use this week to begin to develop your unique brand.
Develop Your Style
Create everything you do in your own style. Powerful brands have a style all their own.
Your style is your way of doing something. Are you friendly? How about challenging or argumemtative? Maybe you are the Everyman. Is your podcast a narrative or instructional? Are you explosive, soothing or euphoric? Do I hear sarcasm in your show? Are you a friend to everybody or the guy they love to hate? Do you take risks or play it close to the vest?
Each piece plays into your style.
You can only stand out among all other shows when you create your own unique style. You must then make sure everything you do is consistent with that style.
Many new broadcasters try to emulate the style of their hero or mentor. They attempt to imitate the styles they hear from other broadcasters. Unfortunately, copying doesn’t create a unique style. Copying typically creates a watered-down version of some other style. When creating your content, be yourself and find your own style.
Some of the greatest broadcasters didn’t start the ascension to the top until they abandoned the attempts to broadcast in the style they thought others desired and began being true to themselves.
Oprah Winfrey quit trying to be a traditional news anchor. She also quit doing the typical tabloid, daytime talk show like Sally Jessy Raphael was doing at the time. When she began to create the show she always desired, she went to the top of the game.
Howard Stern began as a radio DJ sounding like every other radio DJ. He was playing the records and spouting the lines written by management while going nowhere. If you watch “Private Parts”, Stern’s autobiographical movie, one of the classic scenes is Howard trying to recite “W-N-B-C” just like his boss wants everyone to do it.
When Stern decided he was going to do radio his way, he began to make a name for himself. He also went to the top.
Rush Limbaugh followed a very similar path. His bland radio name was Jeff Christie. He followed the format designed by somebody else. Limbaugh made every attempt to fulfill the typical radio DJ stereotype.
He also got fired again and again. When he decided to broadcast in his style and true to his beliefs, he began his rise to the top.
Adam Corolla made his climb when he took full control over his style and show. He was climbing the DJ ladder in Los Angeles. Corolla had some decent television work. He then decided to create his own show in his own style via podcast. That began his rise as one of the biggest podcasters in the world.
All of these broadcasters made the decision to stop copying others. They all created shows that were true to their style.
They each also stay true to their style in everything they do. You will never hear Rush sound like Howard. You’ll never mistake something Oprah says as something Adam might say. Being true to their style isn’t something that takes conscious effort. It comes easy to each of them, because it is true to who they are as people.
Be true to yourself. It will make it easy to create everything you do in your style.
Define Your Character With Stories
I’m not simply talking about your integrity. By character, I mean all of the attributes that create you, as in character in a play.
The purpose of your show is to attract an audience. Whether you want to monetize that relationship, encourage a call-to-action, or simply create an audience for your ideas, creating the audience is where you begin.
The stories you choose to tell reveal how open you are to others. Your openness is a sign of trust. Trust is a big piece of a relationship. Reveal things about yourself through your stories and you’ll begin to build trust with your listener.
The details you include tell your listener what you value. If the listener feels you value things they too value, you solidify the relationship. People like to hang out with similar people. If your values are opposite of your listener, you may also attract them. It is like a love/hate relationship. They may dislike it, but they continue to listen. This often happens when talking politics.
What you find entertaining will be evident by the stories you tell. Since people like other people who have similar tastes, revealing those things you find entertaining will also build the relationship.
Stories also have the power to demonstrate your vulnerability. Stories can show that you are a real person. Your listener will see you as approachable. They also may begin to see you as a friend. That is when true relationships begin to form.
Iconic brands use their story.
Oprah uses her story of her upbringing and career building by breaking down barriers. Her weight loss. Her struggles to cut a new path in daytime talk.
Howard’s story of defying “The Man” and doing it his way inspires others. Rush was told he would never make it on the air and should consider radio sales.
Harley Davidson was a joke in the motorcycle industry. Harley owners had two bikes … one to ride and one for parts. Harley now stands for independence and “take no flack” attitude.
Foster a relationship with your listener by revealing things about yourself through stories. Stories will define your character.
Don’t Just Fill Time
You never catch Oprah just going through the motions. She would never have typical guests on her show. When others were interviewing the co-star of some moving, Oprah would interview the President of the United States. Oprah has Tom Cruise jumping on her couch. You never knew what was going to happen on Oprah’s show.
When you fill time, you waste time. Your listeners have come to your podcast, because you have made them a promise with your brand. They believe they will receive some sort of information and entertainment from your show. Your listener will only give you a few minutes to begin delivering, or they will be headed to the next podcast.
Consistently add value for your listener at every opportunity. Either make the show shorter, or prepare better. It is usually a solid rule of thumb to prepare more content than you will need. This will allow you to always deliver valuable information.
Seth Godin does a fantastic job delivering brief bits of valuable information with his blog. He even carries this through to the manifestos published by his Domino Project. Seth wastes very little time. Once he has made his point, he wraps it up.
Your listener is expecting something from your podcast. Deliver continuously on the promise of your brand. Don’t just fill time.
Be Memorable
When other shows would give away a television, Oprah would give a television to everyone in the audience. Now, everyone does it.
If you want to keep your listener coming back show after show, you need to make them remember to come back. You need to remain top-of-mind for your listener. That is the purpose of audience engagement. Make your listener remember you for something specific about your show.
As you build your show, make it about one thing. Find one particular thing that will be remembered. If you try to be all things to all people, you will water down the show. Everything will be nice. However, isn’t usually truly memorable. You will get lost in the millions of messages your listener receives on a daily basis.
Find the magic. Your listener should remember one thing about your show this week. What will that be?
Stir emotion. Make it amazing. Bring your listener back. Be memorable.
Move Beyond Information
Make your show emotional. That deep connection creates relationships.
The goal of our podcasts is to create strong relationships with our audiences. We can take those relationships and move our listeners with a call to action. To achieve that strong relationship, we need to move beyond information to engaging entertainment.
Dan Miller, author of “48 Days To The Work You Love” could simply explain how you might find a new job. Instead, Dan instills the belief in his listeners that there is more to work than a paycheck. He stirs emotion describing how you can turn your passion into your career. Dan uses that emotion to turn his job finding information into engaging entertainment.
Financial information is turned into entertainment on “The Dave Ramsey Show” when Dave turns debt into the enemy. He doesn’t simply walk you through the steps to become debt free. Dave helps you find that burning desire to escape the shackles of debt. He makes you envision the possibility of “living like no one else”. His help becomes engaging entertainment. That is the reason his show is extremely popular and he is very wealthy.
Our shows can be powerful when we build relationships and move our listeners with a call to action. Those relationships happen when we move beyond information to engaging entertainment.
Risky Stands Out
It was a risk for Rush Limbaugh to step out and be incredibly opinionated regarding politics. Now, there are hundreds of shows that do the same thing.
It was a risk for Harley Davidson to embrace the bad ass lifestyle. Today you can see middle aged guys riding their bike to the office.
It was a risk for Oprah to walk away from the standard daytime tabloid drama that made her successful. You cannot flip through the stations today without finding a dozen copycats of Oprah’s style. However, none of them achieved the success of Oprah.
As we develop meaningful relationships with your podcast, we in turn build credibility that will support our call-to-action within your show. To develop strong relationships, you need to create engaging entertainment that will get you remembered by your listener. To be remembered, you must stand out.
You stand out when you are loved. You are remembered when you are hated. You fade into the background when you are plain, vanilla and trying to not upset anyone. If you don’t stir strong emotions, you are easily forgotten.
When we create, we expose our perspective. We open ourselves to criticism. It is natural to want your thoughts, views, art and creation to be accepted by everyone. To avoid being disappointed, we often play it safe.
Those fantastic, memorable personalities are usually both loved and hated. Rush Limbaugh is loved by the conservatives and hated by the liberals. Dave Ramsey is loved by the conservative investor and hated by credit card companies and whole life insurance salespeople. Dr. Laura would consistently be critical of her callers. Yet she would receive more callers than she could handle on any given show.
Safety lacks creativity. It is risky to be truly creative. However, that is really the only way to get noticed. Safe blends in. Risky stands out.
I’d love to help you with your podcast. Post any questions or comments you might have, or e-mail me at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.
You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.
Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.
Seven Things Your Guest Won’t Tell You (And How It Can Save Your Interview) – Episode 075
Posing with Lady Gaga after our interview
If you conduct interviews on your podcast, a solid reputation as an interviewer is critical to the health of your show. Your guests will share information about you and your show. Today, I would like to share with you seven things your guest will not tell you. In the long run, these tips could save your interview and podcast.
Our world of Podcasting is not that big. There is a good chance the big players in your niche know each other. Your reputation will typically precede your interview request. Work to make it great.
As podcasting continues to grow, booking services will become more and more prominent. These are people that work as the liaison between podcasts and guests. Agents like this are wide spread in radio. They are just beginning to get used in podcasting.
Your reputation to these individuals will be critical if you hope to continue to attract great guests.
When you send a request for an interview dropping some names of past guests, your prospect will do a little research to see if your request is worth their time. Your past actions will speak louder than your words.
Over 25 years in radio, I have had the pleasure of interviewing Mariah Carey, Jason Aldean, Sarah McLachlan, Big & Rich, Lady Gaga, Carrie Underwood, and so many others. With each interview, I have learned something new. I get a little better each time.
A few interviewing lessons have been learned the hard way. There have been times I have made a fool of myself. I am hoping I can save you the trouble.
Here are seven things your guests won’t tell you.
Introduce Me Like You Know Me
When you bring your guest on your show, your introduction sets up the entire interview. Your knowledge of your guest gives your guest credibility and tells your listener why they should care.
By opening the interview with “tell our listeners about yourself”, you are basically saying, “I did not care enough to learn a lot about you, so why don’t you handle this part.”
Open the interview with a quick elevator speech that tells your listener why they should care about this particular guest.
A Quick introduction does three things. First, it tells your guest that you care about them. Next, it doesn’t waste the time of your audience or guest. Finally, it sets the tone and direction of the interview. Hit the primary points you want to discuss in the interview to guide the interview.
Don’t Simply Refer To My Bio
Make your guest feel special. Do more research than their About page on their website.
Your listeners can read the website of your guest. Take time to go deeper and find other great information about this person that has taken time to appear on your show. Create unique questions.
This will keep your audience and guest engaged in the interview. It also shows you are truly interested in your guest, what they have done and what they have to say.
Benefit Me As Much As I Benefit You
Your guest has come on your show, because there is something in it for them. They could be pushing a new product or book. Maybe they are feel they can gain new audience.
The interview does not need to be one big commercial for your guest. However, it should benefit your guest in some way. If your guest gets great value from appearing on your show, word will get around.
The benefit you deliver doesn’t need to end with the interview. Benefits could include your newsletter, your website, social media and many other possibilities.
Don’t Ask The Same Questions
If you are asking the same questions your guest has answered on every other interview, your interview will most likely be less than engaging. Uninspired questions receive uninspired answered. Build the reputation of asking unique questions that excite both your guest and audience.
Actually Listen To My Answers
Listening is an art. By listening to your guest’s answers, you can ask fantastic follow-up questions. It becomes an engaging conversation for your guest.
When you simply ask the list of questions you have written down, your guest doesn’t feel valued. You are not listening to anything they say. This would be similar to asking someone a question and then going in the other room while they answer, only to return to ask another question. Incredibly frustrating.
Your list of questions is only a tool to guide the interview when necessary. Let the conversation ebb and flow. Find great nuggets in the answers of your guest.
Value your guest by intently listening to their answers. You can always edit.
If you Say 30 Minutes, Stick To 30 Minutes
Keep your promises. Nothing is more frustrating than overstaying your welcome.
Your guest is busy. They have planned out their day. When you delay them and negatively affect their schedule, your reputation will suffer.
If you need a 30-minute interview, as for 45 minutes to conduct the interview. Leave yourself a little time for small talk at the beginning and a wrap up at the end. If you can end your 45-minute block in 40 minutes, you will get the reputation of being respectful and courteous.
Don’t Make Me Jump Through Hoops
Your guest is doing you a favor by appearing on your show. When you demonstrate the benefits they will receive, the playing field becomes level. This is the ideal situation.
If you make your guest do a ton of work before they can be on your show, you are using up any goodwill your benefits may have created.
Things that make it difficult for your guest to be on your show are inflexible scheduling, lots of questionnaire paperwork to complete before the show, difficult technology necessary to conduct the interview, the need to provide a lot of background information before the show, and requiring your guest to visit a website to complete forms, upload data or do anything else that takes up their time.
The more you conduct interviews, the more your reputation will spread. Become known as the interviewer that is respectful, engaging and caring. When you ensure you have avoided these seven pitfalls, you will on solid footing to attract better guests in the future.
I’d love to help you with your podcast. Post any questions or comments you might have, or e-mail me at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.
You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.
Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.
How To Take The Headache Out Of Show Planning – Episode 073
Where is your podcast going in 2015?
If you don’t know where you are going, how will you know if you get there.
So many shows discuss goals around this time of year. It is only natural with a new year comes reflection. This is a perfect time to assess your previous year and decide what you want the next twelve months to look like.
A goal is a simply a dream with a deadline. What are you dreams for the next year? If you don’t have a map & destination, you’ll only wander. You’ll never get anywhere. Let’s be specific and set some deadlines.
You and I discuss goals quite often. We talk about having an objective for each episode. What is it that you want your listener to take away from each episode. Once you answer that questions, you will know where to take your content in that episode.
We also need to answer that question on a larger scale. What is the purpose of your show? How are you helping people? How do you serve your listeners?
Once you create the mission for your show, you will have a filter for all of your content. When it comes time to plan an episode, you can ask yourself, “How will I serve my listener this week?”
My show is designed to give you more confidence in your content. I want to help you defeat that little voice in your head that is saying, “I hope I don’t make a fool of myself this week.”
Each week when I sit down to create my show notes, I ask myself how I might share with you a bit that I have learned over the past 25 years in radio that will give you confidence in your content and be more engaging with your listener.
MISSION
Let’s start with the mission of your show. Write down the sole focus of your show. How do you help people?
2015 GOAL
What is the one big thing you want to accomplish over the next year? We want to develop little steps to get there. Let’s break the big goal into bite-sized pieces.
If you create a weekly show, you only have 52 shows over the next 12 months. It may sound like a lot. However, you need to be intentional to reach your goals.
Break your goal into milestones. Keep in mind that your progress might not be a straight line. It may ramp up like a curve. Write down those milestones.
EPISODE GOAL
As we develop each episode, what do we hope to accomplish in each show that will help us move toward our 2015 goal? More importantly, how will that episode goal help us get closer to our milestone on the way to the yearly goal?
Each episode should have a strong call-to-action that helps us get closer to our milestone. What is your call-to-action within your podcast? How can we make that call-to-action more effective? Where are you sending your listener each episode to get more info? Be specific and write it down.
Are you effectively planning each show before you begin? Sometimes it is difficult to get motivated to record your show on a regular basis. Plan ahead. Download the planning worksheet at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com. When you lack motivation, revert to the plan you’ve already created.
Do you interview guests on your show? Create a list of guests you’d like to get on the show. Be brave and reach out to those people. Let’s get them on the show. Give yourself a goal with a deadline. Let one guest lead to another. Always ask for leads.
GET BETTER
To improve, you need to review the game tape. Are you reviewing your show on a regular basis?
All great sports teams review tape of previous games. You should do the same. Again, get the worksheet at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com. Finding someone that can help you honestly review your show will help as well.
BUSINESS
You should step back from your podcast to look at your overall business. If you are monetizing your podcast, we need to schedule time to help reach that goal as well. Baby steps and milestones.
There are many business possibilities stemming from your podcast. These could include books, speaking engagements, seminars, affiliates, products and more. If you have yet to monetize your podcast, schedule your time to create something powerful. Be sure to include deadlines.
The next year can be huge for you if you plan. Set deadlines to turn your dreams into goals. Be sure to find balance in all areas of your life.
Take some chances. Go for the big interview or launch a product. Dream big. You might just reach your dreams.
I want to thank you for a fantastic 2014. It has been quite a success for me.
I have met many amazing podcasters. You have given me your time each week as we grow together. I can’t thank you enough for that.
Podcast Movement invited me to share my knowledge at their event in Dallas. This coming year, I will present at New Media Expo as well.
Many have downloaded my worksheets and purchased the Podcast Talent Coach workbook. It has been a blast. I couldn’t do it without you. Thank you for being part of this journey.
Have an amazing 2015.
What would you like me to cover in the upcoming year? How can I better help you? E-mail me at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.
You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.
Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.
How do you create a show that people remember? My theory is simple. If you want word of mouth do things worth talking about.
That particular phrase is one I learned from Seth Godin. However, I learned that theory years and years ago.
Learning From Radio
When I started in radio 25 years ago, my goal was to make every break a home run. Creating a show that creates buzz appears to be a daunting task.
A typical radio show is four hours. With an average of four talk breaks or bits an hour, a daily show would include sixteen bits a show. At three minutes a bit for a morning show, we talking about 48 minutes of material. That would roughly equal to an average podcast.
After a few years in radio, I realized that creating sixteen different pieces of content that are stellar and buzz-worthy is nearly impossible on a regular basis. It is also unnecessary. Your listener will not remember all sixteen things you do on the show this week.
People remember one big thing. Create the one killer bit that will create some buzz.
You can’t manufacture marketing and make people talk. The buzz is created when you do something amazing. To discover what is amazing, you need to continue to try different things.
You will be surprised by what moves people. People will mention hearing things on your show that you never dreamed would make a connection. The more you receive that feedback, the more you will be able to recognize it when it happens.
Be occasionally great rather than consistently good.
You don’t win by removing mistakes. You win by giving your audience a reason to listen. Occasionally great bits will give your listener those reasons.
If you conduct interviews on your show, you do not need to make every question Earth shattering. You need one or two great questions that people will remember. Your listener will say, “Did you hear what she asked her guest?” The answer will be one great question, not the entire interview.
Make your listener remember one thing. Consistently good is admission to the game. Occasionally great wins.
Examples of Occasionally Great
Let’s looks at some examples of both.
In baseball, who are some of the players that come to mind?
How about Willie Keeler and Jimmy Rollins? They hold the record for most Major League Baseball consecutive games with a hit.
Willie Keeler is #2 with 45 hits in 1896. Jimmy Rollins is #8 with 38 in 2005.
This means they consistently get on base. Valuable to the team. But hardly memorable.
How about Barry Bonds, Hank Aaron, Babe Ruth, Willie Mays, and Alex Rodriguez? These are the Top 5 of the list of players with the most Major League Baseball home runs.
Other than Babe Ruth at .342, the other four had batting averages between .298 and .305. In comparison, Keeler hit .341 in his career.
These home run guys got a hit less than one out of three tries. Less than stellar, yet memorable. Occasionally great.
Maybe American football is your sport.
Would you consider Chad Pennington one of the most memorable quarterbacks to every play the game? He holds a 66% career passing percentage in the National Football League over 10 seasons playing for 2 different teams. That puts him at #2 on the list.
Pennington completed 2 of every 3 passing attempts. Pretty consistent. Not quite memorable.
Bart Starr was the QB of Superbowl 1 & 2. Joe Namath was also a Superbowl quarterback. Their stories are legends.
Starr is #71 on the passing percentage list at 57% over 15 seasons. Namath is #163 on the same list at 50% over 8 seasons. Less consistent, but memorable.
Let’s talk acting.
Christopher Lee has made 276 movie and acting appearances. He has been in Dracula and The Lord Of The Rings.
Robert Loggia was in Scarface and made 223 other film and acting appearances.
You saw Ernie Hudson in The Crow. If not there, he was in 190 other movies and productions. You wold probably recognize him if you saw him.
All three are solid, consistent actors. They are hardly household names.
Every heard of Tom Hanks. He has only made 37 films and other appearances. Less than 20% of the number Hudson has appeared in. Less than 14% of Lee.
On the other hand, to date, Tom Hanks’ films have averaged $96.3M per movie. A few have been occasionally great and won Oscars. Not nearly the number of appearances. His home runs make up for it.
Will Smith has made 29 theatrical appearances. His movies average $127M. Fewer films. More blockbusters.
Will Smith is also known as a hip hop star. However, he has only released 4 solo albums. Two of his albums went gold. One is 2x platinum. One is 9x platinum.
Will Smith actually released more albums as half of DJ Jazzy Jeff & The Fresh Prince. That act released 5 albums. Three of those reached gold, one platinum and one 3x platinum.
These guys are all huge, because they are occasionally great.
Find Your One Thing
Don’t try to be everything to everyone. Be the best at one thing.
What are you known for? What is the one thing you can do on the episode this week that your listener will remember?
Find your one thing. Create word of mouth. Be occasionally great.
I’d love to help you with your podcast. Post any questions or comments you might have, or e-mail me at Erik@PodcastTalentCoach.com.
You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.
Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.
Why would you ever pay for feedback? Can’t you get that for free from most of your fans/listeners/family?
I was reading the comments on a blog post the other. As a disclaimer, I rarely do this. Most trolls that comment on blog posts do so anonymously. They are rarely knowledgable about the subject. And they typically offer little constructive criticism.
This particular blog post was in reference to a colleague. The commenter questioned why anyone would ever pay for feedback (coaching) when they could get plenty of it for free.
This misguided individual obviously doesn’t understand the value of coaching.
Believing your listener can give you quality feedback on your podcast is like believing David Ortiz, home run leader of the Boston Red Sox, can get feedback on his hitting from the guy with a Bud Light in his hand sitting three rows up behind the on deck circle. Is Tiger Woods getting advice on his swing from the two duffers sitting beside the 3rd green? I don’t think so.
So, why pay for podcast feedback? Here are five myths about coaching along with the real truth.
1. I’ve Never Heard Of You
Myth: There is no value of an opinion from someone nobody has heard of.
Truth: You’ve never heard of some of the most powerful, well-paid coaches in the world. How about Hank Haney or Sean Foley or Notah Begay? All three have served as a swing coach for professional golfer Tiger Woods.
How about Jim Presley or Einar Diaz? They are the hitting coaches for the Major League Baseball Baltimore Orioles. Baltimore had 211 home runs in 2014. 25 more than the 2nd team.
The Major League Baseball Detroit Tigers hit .277 as a team in 2014. Ever heard of Wally Joyner or David Newhan? Both hitting coaches.
Would you pay Brett Manning to coach you? Taylor Swift has. Keith Urban and Haley Williams of Paramore have as well. Most people have never heard of Brett Manning.
Just because you have never heard of the coach, that does not mean they are not able to offer you valuable input and advice.
2. I Can Do It Myself
Myth: I know what I am supposed to do, so I can do it myself.
Coaches are everywhere. Unless you are in the industry, most people have never heard of these coaches. These instructors are well educated and experienced in the profession. They help the greats become even better.
3. Coach Just Wants Money
Myth: The coach is only in it for the money.
Truth: No coach does it simply for the money. Most every coach loves to teach. They get great pride by seeing their clients succeed.
Coaches who coach only for the money rarely last. If clients are not improving and succeeding by using the coach, words gets around.
Do you homework on a coach. Find people that have used their services. If the coach has helped others succeed, there is a good chance they can help you as well.
4. Positive Feedback = More Money
Myth: The coach will only give you positive feedback, because they want you to come back again and again.
Truth: Constructive criticism is really the only way to improve. A Pollyanna view will never get results.
A coach that only gives you positive feedback is rarely helping you get better. If you are not getting better using a coach, you should stop using those services.
Tiger’s swing coach doesn’t stand next to Tiger saying, “Great swing. Keep it up.” I can get my nephew to do that for me. If that is the sort of feedback you want, then by all means use your fans and family. If you truly want to improve, hire a coach.
When I coach my clients, I typically look for 3 things they are doing right and 3 things they can improve upon. You cannot improve your show by simply removing the bad stuff. You need to replace it with good stuff. Let’s find the good stuff, so we can do more of that. That content can replace the areas that need improvement.
5. Who Pays For A Bad Review?
Myth: Nobody wants to pay to hear they are horrible.
Truth: Sometimes the truth hurts, but it is necessary.
If you want to improve, you need to know where the rough spots are. You are not paying for a bad review. You are paying for the truth.
If you don’t want to know if you look fat in those jeans, don’t ask. However, if you are truly concerned about your look, and you don’t want to go out of the house wearing a bad Christmas sweater, find someone who will tell you the truth.
A good coach will give you an honest assessment of your show. Someone who has worked with various shows over many years will know the pieces that make a successful show. That coach can help you implement ideas and tactics to reach your goals. Nothing beats the experience of a winner.
So, why pay for podcast feedback?
A good coach is a powerful tool for you. Most people don’t know what they don’t know. A solid coach can help you identify areas that will help you propel forward.
Some people are not comfortable jumping headfirst into the coaching pool. It is a big step. Maybe that is you.
If you would like to dip your toe in water, Dave Jackson and I do a show together called “The Podcast Review Show”. Take a listen to the show to see how our coaching styles differ. You can hear how we both work with our coaching clients.
Whether you use one of us or another coach, the important part is that you get some objective feedback to help you improve. Find someone with experience to mentor you through your creative process. You will be amazed at the progress you make with your art.
I’d love to help you with your podcast. Post any questions or comments you might have, or e-mail me at Erik@PodcastTalentCoach.com.
You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.
Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.
It never ceases to astonish me how our podcasts create friendships with people we have never met.
My family and I were at a hockey game a few weeks ago. A couple came up to us and started chatting about the game as if they knew us. We had a great conversation with them as if we had been good friends for years.
When the couple moved on, my wife was a little irritated with me when she asked why I didn’t introduce her. I told her I didn’t know who they were.
These people knew me from being on the radio. I am part of their lives on a daily basis. I share things with them everyday on my show. These people feel like they know me and we are good friends even though we have never met.
This happens all of the time. As podcasters and broadcasters, we have a strange friendship with our listeners. That friendship give us influence.
How can we develop those friendships with our podcast?
Here are five tips.
1. Reveal Things
Reveal things about yourself on your show as you would to your good friends.
2. Include Your Listeners
Make your listeners part of your show. Don’t distance yourself from your listeners with e-mail and text messages. It is much more compelling to hear the words of another individual in their own voice than it is to hear someone else tell the story (or ask the question).
The passion of the message, story or questions isn’t contained in the e-mail. Inflection and meaning are always different when read by another individual. A scripted e-mail lack spontaneity.
I believe this is why interviews are so powerful. You can talk about a book, or you can interview the author. Which is more compelling?
3. Make Your Listener Feel Something
Emotions are powerful.
4. Be A Companion
Make your listener feel comfortable, as if they are spending time with a friend. They will come back time and again. You are their companionship.
5. Help People
Helping others should be your first priority.
I’d love to help you with your podcast. Post any questions or comments you might have, or e-mail me at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.
You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.
Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.
Do you have a podcast that involves multiple people? This week, I’ll answer two listener questions to help with podcasts that involve interviews or co-hosts. You can always e-mail your questions to Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.
We discussed interviews a bit in Episode 059 – Solution to Boring Guests. I offered ideas to salvage an interview that lacks any entertaining value. That content was focused on the guest. Our questions this week focus on you the interviewer. We will discuss podcast interview and co-host tips.
Interview Nerves
I would love to know if you have any tips on how to curb anxiety when you’re getting ready to interview a big personality. While my big personalities can’t touch yours, I’ve noticed that it takes me a while to loosen up and relax sometimes. Sometimes if I chat with them a little before the interview starts, that helps. But I never want to waste their time, and sometimes you just get the feeling they want to get to it so that they can go about their day. Am I still talking? Thanks, Erik! -Patrick Keller – BigSeance.com
This is a great question from Patrick. In fact, it is one question I get quite often.
First, understand that interview butterflies are natural. Find some comfort in knowing that most every interviewer feels some nervousness the minutes before the talk begins. It is very similar to public speakers.
You’re not the only one.
There are four things you can do to get over the jitters. These should help you a bit to calm the nerves before the interview.
Prepare
Make sure you have your interview plan ready. Be knowledgable about your guest. Have at your fingertips any details that you will need. Create a map and know where you are going. Ensure you know what you hope to achieve with this particular interview.
Preinterview – Explain the process
Before the interview, have a quick chat with your guest. Let them know exactly how the interview will run and what they can expect. This will not only put you at ease, it will make your guest more comfortable and open.
Understand you are helping them
Your guest is on your show, because there is some value to them. Guests typically do not appear on podcasts out of the goodness of their heart. They are interested in expanding their brand by being on your show.
You have something to offer your guest.
Podcast guests are marketing their goods or services to your audience. You are putting them in front of a group of people that can expand their reach. This is a huge opportunity and benefit to them. You aren’t simply taking from them. Find comfort in knowing that you are helping each other.
Really listen and be involved in a conversation
Many podcasters get wrapped up in thinking of the next question and fail to listen to the current answer. Have a dialog instead of a lecture. Truly listen to the answers your guest is offering. Those answers tend to lead to amazing follow-up questions.
By getting heavily involved in the conversation, you will take your mind off of your nervous butterflies.
Bumping Co-Hosts
Our next questions involves co-hosts.
Hi. On any of your podcasts do you have guidelines on how to stop hosts talking over each other? Cheers – Brian
This is another question I hear often. It takes a lot of practice to avoid stepping on your guest or co-host. I have five tips to help you clean up the discussion.
Develop hand cues
When one host wraps up their thought and is ready for the other to jump in, a simple hand cue can help make a smooth transition.
Be aware of each other
If you are truly listening to your co-host speak, you will be less concerned with jumping in to offer your point of view. Allow your co-host enjoy the limelight until they are ready for you to speak up.
Know who will serve as the director
On a podcast with multiple hosts, it is critical that one host drives the bus. With a director, all members of the show know who will call the shots to keep the show moving in the right direction.
The Sci-Fi Movie Podcast is a great example of this. Even though all three co-hosts have equal roles on the show, it is obvious that Rem is directing the show. Give it a listen. You can see how smooth their podcast typically runs.
Know who is leading
If you use a intriguing introduction as I describe and teach with my storytelling worksheet (available at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com), your co-host will know exactly where the story is headed. This leads to fewer interruptions by co-hosts. Respect the story.
Respect the mic time of each other
Everyone will receive their fare share of mic time. Try to be less concerned with offering your viewpoint and allow your co-host to enjoy the spotlight. Your time will come. If your co-host is on a roll, let them roll. When the podcast is entertaining, you both win. It doesn’t matter which host offers the punchline.
I hope those tips help clean up the flow of the show. There are many other ways to calm your nerves. When it comes to talking over each other, it comes down to finding a process comfortable for you and your partner.
I’d love to help you with your podcast. Post any questions or comments you might have, or e-mail me at Erik@PodcastTalentCoach.com.
You can find my podcast and other tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com. Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.
Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.
7 Common Podcast Mistakes That Drive Listeners Away – Episode 060
Listeners have many, many options for their entertainment. When you create your show, you are not simply competing with all of the other podcasts in the space. You are competing with all of the other entertainment options available to your listeners.
TV, CDs, radio, satellite radio, on demand video, Youtube, audiobooks. The options are endless.
It is only a start to create great content that attracts your listener and is better than every other options available to your listener at that time. You also need to ensure that the things you do within the episode do not drive your podcast listeners away. Many podcasters give their audience reason to leave without even realizing it.
This week, we will discuss 7 most common podcast mistakes that drive listeners away. There are many others. See how many of these 7 common podcast mistakes you recognize from your show. Then, let’s figure out how to fix them to make your show even stronger.
You Focus On Yourself
You can have anything you want in life as long as you help enough other people get what they want. Make your show less about you and more about helping your listener. You can tell your story and then frame the result around the listener’s perspective.
You Are Not Engaging And Use No Stories
Stories are powerful. We discussed this power in the past few episodes. Pull you listener into your content by making it personal. Then, turn the mirror on them. How can your stories help your listener?
You Are Talking At Me, Instead Of To Me
Treat your listener as an audience of one. Audio is a personal medium. People listen by themselves while creating personal visions in their own head. Have a one-on-one conversation with your listener. Talk to your listener and not at them.
You Are Unfocused & Unprepared
Know your goal. You cannot get to your destination unless you know where you want to go. Develop your goal. Then, be prepared. Gather your material and information before you begin recording.
You Open The Door
Let your content flow from one topic to the other like a conversation. Avoid “now it’s time for …” When you are having a conversation at a party, you don’t say, “… and that is what my kids are doing. Now, it’s time to talk about my golf game.” You just flow into the next topic organically. Also, be sure to take the first exit so you do not overstay your welcome.
You Are Not Interested
Be interesting by being interested. Get rid of the stale questions and content. Make your self unique by being curious.
You Lack Show Biz
This is show business. Use theater of the mind. Make your audio powerful by transporting your listener to another place and time. Add some flavor with creative sound effects, powerful production elements and some audio magic.
Let me know how I can help you with your podcast. E-mail your questions to Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.
You can also find other tools including worksheets, a workbook and videos to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.
Let me teach you how to turn your information into engaging entertainment.
Thank you so much for all of the great feedback recently. I am happy to hear this content is having a positive effect on your show. You are truly beginning to transform your information. Congratulations.
This week, I would like to share two notes with you hoping you can use the information and answers as well.
JOURNALING
Hi Erik,
Just a quick note of thanks for your latest episode of ‘Podcast Talent Coach’ where you talked about story telling and using a journal as a tool. Somewhat skeptical that it was something I needed, I sat down yesterday and gave it a shot, using the 5 minute time limit you mentioned and writing my thoughts out using a pen and paper. I did this to capture something personal that I could use in my next episode of ‘Evolution Talk’. I am extremely happy to say that it worked. I was able to produce a couple of powerful thoughts for the show that I am certain I would not have captured otherwise. Suffice to say, it’s now going to become part of my show preparation for every episode going forward.
Just wanted you to know that you are making a difference.
If you missed the past two episodes, you may want to check them out as a series. In Episode 057, we discuss the four elements of storytelling. In Episode 058, we explore how to explore your personal connections within your stories and use those connections to build trust with your listeners.
It is a common feeling of skepticism. When I first learned the method of journaling to discover my own personal connections, I found it a bit hokey and beatnik. After journaling for a bit of time, it became natural. There is true power in discovering your personal connections.
If you would like help creating your journal entries, mining them for personal connections and turning those connections into powerful, engaging content, shoot me an e-mail at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.
BORING GUESTS
Hello Erik,
I have a question for you about interviews. I’m sure you have had the opportunity to interview many popular music artists over the years in your radio career. Have you ever had to deal with someone who was not very cooperative? Comes across as a bit annoyed or just doesn’t put any effort at all into the conversation?
Is there anything you can do to get them to actually give a substantial answer without coming across as being rude? Especially when it is an artist that you may be a fan of?
This is a common problem with podcast guests. There are times when we have such high hopes for and expectations of our idols. When we finally meet them, they simply are not as amazing and flawless as we had built them to be.
When you get a podcast guest on your show who is less than excited, there are a few possible reasons for their sourness. They could be having a bad day. Maybe they just got off a bad interview. It is possible they don’t enjoy being interviewed.
One thing to remember is that it is your show. You are in control of everything. It is your responsibility to make sure the content on your show is the best it can be. Make your podcast guest the star. Set them up to look good and everyone wins.
Here are six suggestions to improve an interview with a troublesome podcast guest.
1. Make sure your interview style is top notch so they see you as a professional. This includes before, during and after your interview.
2. Be sure you are asking unique questions. Know the hot buttons of your guest. Talk about things that stir their passion.
4. Ask your guest “list” questions. For instance, “What are the three most important things to remember when booking a gig?”
If your guest simply won’t cooperate …
5. Don’t use the interview on your podcast as a traditional interview. Create a narrative and insert drops from the interview, similar to the news shows like “60 Minutes” or “Dateline”.
6. Cut your losses. Sometimes people have a bad day and just need to move on. Cut the interview short, thank your guest for their time, and find a better interview.
Let me know how I can help you with your podcast. E-mail your questions to Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.
You can also find other tools including worksheets, a workbook and videos to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.
Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.
Podcast Movement 2014 was held in Dallas, Texas August 16th & 17th. For an inaugural event, PM14 was well run and full of great information. The guys did an amazing job putting it together.
Earlier this year, Dan Franks reached out to me and asked if I would present a session at PM14. I was truly honored. My session on the power of storytelling went over very well. Many people came to the stage after my session to tell me how useful they found the information. I really appreciated the feedback.
I am already looking forward to Podcast Movement 2015 in Fort Worth, Texas.
My notebook filled with great notes from PM14. On this episode, I want to share with you my 11 top takeaways from the event. I hope these spark a little something in your to move your podcast forward and transform your content.
1. Have a plan to make money.
This came from Chris Brogan’s Keynote “Podcasting As A Business Driver”. If you want to support your habit/hobby, have a plan to generate income. This could be from your product, service or other income stream. Figure out how to cover your cost at a minimum.
2. Copy = Pale Imitation = Ignored.
Srinivas Rao offered this insight in his Keynote “Genuine Curiosity – The Fuel Behind The Fire”. Chris Brogan said, “No one ever won a race looking sideways.” Be brave and have the courage to be unique. Tell some great stories.
3. What is your brand personality?
Who are you really and who do your clients need you to be? Kristin Thompson asked these questions during her session “Rock Your Talk & Profit Big … Beyond The Podcast”. Define your brand personality. Then, thread it through everything you do.
4. Don’t use white in your logo.
This was mentioned during “Top Podcasters Share Three Success Secrets For Podcasting”. It was a panel discussion with Michael Stelzner, Cliff Ravenscraft, and Chris Brogan. If you want it to stand out in iTunes store, get rid of the white. Make your logo pop.
5. Involve others.
During his session “10 Ways to Take Your Podcast From Average To Amazing”, Daniel J. Lewis suggested you use interviews, conversations, and shared presentations to get others involved with your show. Empower your audience to share your content. Delegate others to help you achieve tasks.
6. #1 goal of podcast marketing is opt-in.
Tim Paige mentioned this in his session “The Top 7 Ways To Grow Your Podcast And Turn Listeners Into Leads”. We’ve heard it many times that the money is in the list. Use your podcast to grow your list every opportunity that you get.
7. Think of your avatar in the car or excercising. What can you provide to make the experience better?
This was a great piece of advice from Jaime Tardy during her Keynote “The Future Of Podcasting”. If you want to connect and engage with your audience, put yourself in their shoes.
8. Learn what the knobs do.
To learn your equipment and what it does, press record and narrate your actions as you turn knobs. Hear how it sounds. This was a tip offered by Dave Jackson in his session “The Art Of Editing Audio – Finding The Diamond In The Rough”. What better way to figure out what all of those knobs do other than tinkering with it.
9. Ask your tribe questions about what they struggle with.
Jessica Kupferman’s session was titled “Your Commmunity Of Kindred Spirits: Why, How and When To Build One”. She offered this tidbit while helping us discover the power and connection of a community.
10. Give your guests resources to promote your show after they are on.
This came during a panel discussion called “Promote Your Podcast The Right (And Unique) Way”. If you want your guests to promote your show after they appear, make it easy for them. Give them graphics, quotes or audio clips they can use to help spread the word.
11. Comfort and awesome usually do not overlap.
I loved this line. It was another from Chris Brogan during his Keynote “Podcasting As A Business Driver”. Be brave. Try something new. Be unique. Have the courage to step out and tell personal stories that cannot be copied. That’s when you’ll get noticed. Don’t be comforable. Be awesome.
I’d love to help you with your podcast. E-mail any questions or comments you might have to Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.
You can also find other tools including worksheets, a workbook and videos to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.
Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.
I received a piece of feedback from Kenn Blanchard the other day. He said he was inspired so much by my “chit chat” episode that he went back into the studio to completely rerecord his latest episode.
We talk a lot about the help you provide people with your podcast. As you create your content, keep in mind that you never know who you might be helping or how much that help may mean.
Gary Vaynerchuk has an entire chapter in his book “Crush It” devoted to care. It is probably the easiest chapter you will ever read. It is also possibly the toughest chapter to execute well.
Extra Mile
It is unfortunate in business today that “going the extra mile” isn’t even necessary to stand out most of the time. Being consistent and delivering on your brand’s promise will usually make you better than most of the competition.
It amazes me that delivering a simple recap after the job is complete to one of our clients can create astonishment on their part. They are so numb to the average lack of care from their other suppliers that any sense of attention will get them to take notice.
I’ve seen many, many bands go through the motions. I am not trying to make excuses. However, It’s like a couple trying to get back together after a breakup. The relationship ended for a reason the first time. Getting together again may be good for a beer. Any longer will probably only make you realize why you broke up in the first place … even when you’re making hundreds of thousands of dollars to do it.
Trust Circle
You can’t shout your way into a person’s trust circle. They only way to gain trust is to add value. Give them something they can use. Building trust is the foundation of revenue generation for your podcast.
As you build trusting relationships with your podcast, continue to ask yourself, “How am I helping my listener?” Continue to give, and the trust will develop over time.
When you begin every discussion with your product, needs or wants, people will tune you out. You will begin to sound (and be treated) like advertisements for used cars. Shouting doesn’t work. Your listener won’t care and will rarely return.
Serve first, many times over. Then and only then can you effectively sell.
Shows like the 48 Days To The Work You Love, School of Podcasting and Internet Business Mastery are all designed to help their listeners first. Sure, they all have products to sell as the end result. However, they never begin with their product. The discussions on these shows always begin with the listener’s needs in mind first.
As you prepare for your show, find great ways to help. Your help may come in the form of entertainment. You may serve as companionship for your podcast listener. Help them find other forms of companionship as well. If your podcast is only one hour per week, there are 167 more hours in the week that aren’t occupied by your show. Your listeners will surely need more companionship to fill a few of those hours. Help your audience fill those hours, too.
Let’s Help Each Other
I would love to answer any question you might have. I have been in broadcasting for well over 20 years. Coaching on-air radio talent has been part of my day-to-day role since 1995. Studying and developing marketing and promotional campaigns for our radio stations and clients is also something I do on a regular basis.
If you could use some help in any of these areas, please shoot me an e-mail at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.
Your questions will help me refine my show. You will help me select topics. It will also make the show much more enjoyable for you. I would love to hear your questions and offer you podcast help.
If you could take a minute to shoot me an e-mail, or even comment on any of my posts that may have helped you, I would truly appreciate it. Making this show better is always my goal.
Let me know how I can help you. In turn, let’s help each other.
I’d love to help you with your podcast. E-mail any questions or comments you might have to Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.
You can also find other tools including worksheets, a workbook and videos to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.
Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.
As I was grabbing a quick bite to eat at the local fast food restaurant earlier this week, I was reminded we are all an expert at something to someone.
After ordering my food, I pulled up to the drive thru window of the fast food restaurant to pay. My total came to $4.38. I handed the kid in the window $5.38. The amount completely puzzled him.
He looked at the currency for quite some time. I was beginning to think he didn’t realize I needed change. After what seemed like two minutes, he looked around for his manager.
When he realized his manager was helping another customer, he looked back at the money trying to devise a plan B.
The kid finally stuck his head into the window and asked, “Are you good at math?”
I said, “The total was $4.38, right?” He replied with, “Yeah.” I said, “You owe me a dollar.”
“Oh, that’s what I thought,” he replied with relief as he ducked to the register to retrieve my dollar.
At that point, I realized we are all an expert to somebody. Even people who do not normally deal in American currency could probably guess that $5.38 minus $4.38 equals $1. To this kid, I could have been Newton or Archimedes or Pythagoras.
You may not feel you are an expert in your field, because you don’t have the experience or success equal to others. On the other hand, realize you have more experience than the beginner.
If you think about where you were two years ago, you are much more experienced than a person in that position now. Help those folks make the two-year journey to get to the point where you are now.
Six Ways To Demonstrate Your Expertise
Help people learn what you know.
Help people find the tools you have discovered through your journey.
Help people find the right people in the industry where they can learn more.
Find people who are in a position that you have conquered.
Share your stories of triumph and woe to encourage those following behind you.
Help those that do not have quite as much knowledge and experience that you have.
If you have been in your field for any length of time, there will always be somebody with less experience than you. Find those people, and help them succeed.
You may not be number one in the field. That doesn’t matter. You can always be seen as an expert in the eyes of someone at some point. You simply need to find them. Then, help them in your expert sort of way. Who knows, maybe you are good at math.
I’d love to help you with your podcast. E-mail any questions or comments you might have to Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.
You can also find other tools including worksheets, a workbook and videos to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.
Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.
Chit Chat at the beginning of your podcast has long been discussed. Is it appropriate? How much is too much? When are you wasting the time of the pirates listening?
I was listening to a marketing podcast once. I just about gave up and moved onto another show. I had to force myself to stick with it. You would have thought they may have uploaded the wrong show.
Here is the opening of the podcast. I’ve eliminated the names and other identifying parts. I really don’t intend to call out anyone. I simply want to show you how chit chat can destroy your engagement.
Show host: Welcome to (marketing podcast). I’m your host (host name). (website). We’ve got a couple people hangin’ out in the live chat with us. (chat link) And you know, I shouldn’t say that, because I’ve taken the link down from the site. But if you’re listening and wanna see the schedule, it is fairly current. Although, not exactly throughout the summer. I am joined today, as I frequently am lately, by (co-host name) of (other show name). How’s it goin’ (co-host name)?
Co-host: It is wonderful up here.
Show host: Is the … uh … now you guys probably didn’t have a lot of snow like we didn’t have a lot of snow, which I’m still bummed about. But, I’m trying not to talk about it. How’s your … how’s your weather in ____?
Co-host: It’s pretty good. It’s, uh … it’s been a pretty warm winter.
They proceeded to discuss the Celsius to Fahrenheit conversion for the first 10 minutes of the 30-minute show. At 10:45 into the show, host says, “Should we get into some questions?”
This is a show designed to coach businesses to attract more customers.
How did we get lost down some path about temperature conversions?
I’m not even sure I can say it got lost. The show never laid out the expectations of the show. Neither does the show title. As I’ve written before, the opening of the show must tell your audience what the show is all about right at the beginning. Let your listener know what to expect. Assume they are listening to the show for the very first time.
Six minutes into the show, they actually say, “You’re safe by now skipping over the first 10 minutes” of the show. What!?! You’ve got me, now you’re actually telling me this isn’t worth my time?
At this point they aren’t really lost. They are well aware they are wasting my time. There are over 100,000 podcasts available. These shows are all trying to attract me. These guys actually have me paying attention (the tough part) and are wasting the incredible opportunity. What are the chances I’ll actually be back?
In addition to the chit chat that has absolutely nothing to do with the topic, they gave you info at the open of the show that you can’t even act on. They gave you a chat link that isn’t even active anymore. They gave you a schedule which is “fairly” current, “although not exactly”. Then, they tell me I can skip over this part of the show.
This sort of chit chat destroys your credibility and trust. People have come to hear you deliver on your promise of your topic. Talking for ten minutes about the weather does not accomplish that, unless you are the Weather Channel podcast.
Your show must deliver on the brand promise right out of the box. That is the key to audience engagement. Your listener has come to your show for a reason. If you get lost on some tangent, your audience will be gone in a heartbeat.
In this case, there are many podcasts available dealing with marketing. Instead of continuing to listen to this podcast, I moved on and found the “Unpodcast” with Scott Stratten. Scott was one of the keynote speakers at NMX2014. Scott has a bit of chit chat in his episodes. The difference is the relevance of Scott’s chit chat to his topic.
Chit chat during your show is appropriate if you can link it back to your topic. Let’s say you open your show with, “My local television news did an amazing marketing job getting in front of 100,000 people this weekend at the sporting event simply by keeping fans up to speed on the weather.” If you follow that with some chit chat about how crazy the weather has been and how the station used that to their marketing advantage, you have linked it to your topic.
Chit chat here is perfectly acceptable. It makes sense.
If you are talking about the new studio you have built on a show about podcasting, that would be completely understandable.
If you are talking about your weekend fishing and have no way to link it to your podcast about automobile parts, you are wasting time.
It is a fine line. If the information supports your topic, you are on the right path. If it does not fit with the subject matter at hand, find another story that does.
Lay out the expectations in your introduction. Deliver on those expectations immediately. If you find you’re getting off on a tangent, get back on track as soon as possible.
You will quickly find you are talking to yourself if your listener says to themselves, “I think we’re lost.”
Intriguing Introduction
Use a great, personal story to lead with an intriguing introduction. This is where chit chat comes in handy. It is a personal, chit chat story that will engage people. Your chit chat brings them into the topic for this episode.
This is true for your podcast in general as well as each individual topic. Your intriguing introduction should hook your audience, let them know exactly what to expect, and allow them to enjoy the story.
What do you hope your audience will take away from this particular discussion? Your introduction should spell it out. It should set up what is to come.
If your goal is to make your listener laugh at your misfortune over the weekend, lead with it. “This weekend was so disastrous, I wouldn’t have had time for anything else to go wrong even if I tried.” The audience will now have time to enjoy the vivid details of your horrible weekend rather than trying to figure out what point you are trying to make.
When you begin your story with the details, your listener spends energy trying to determine the point you are trying to make. They are trying to figure out what the story is about.
Have you ever been stuck listening to someone tell a story while you’re thinking, “Will he ever get to the point?” That is what we are trying to avoid.
Here is an example of a story you might hear. “This weekend we went to the mall. It was just the two of us. We were looking for a gift for my dad.” Are we telling a story about finding gifts? Is this story just recapping the weekend? Maybe it is about my dad. You don’t know. I haven’t told you. There is no lead to this story.
To hook your audience and allow them to truly enjoy the story, lead with an intriguing introduction.
I’d love to help you with your podcast. E-mail any questions or comments you might have to Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.
You can also find other tools including worksheets, a workbook and videos to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.
Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.
Why I Ignore Podcast Critics (And Maybe You Should Too)
PTC Episode 051
There are a few reasons why I ignore critics, and maybe you should, too.
I was listening to Pat Flynn’s “Smart Passive Income” podcast today. Pat received some feedback that was crtical of his style and motivation. The critic felt Pat was putting on a unauthentic persona in order to sell affiliate programs.
Pat spent a bit of time at the beginning of the episode explaining his approach and defending his character. He didn’t get defensive. His comments were positive toward his critic. Some great points were offered which made me like Pat even more.
I love Pat’s show. He sounds like a great guy. I just think he is wasting his time trying to persuade a critic to change his mind.
There are five reasons I tend to ignore critics like this.
Mic Time
By spending time on negative comments, you’re just giving the trolls exposure. The time on your show is valuable. Use it for great content. Do not let the trolls hijack your podcast. You’ve worked hard to attract the attention of your audience. Trolls do not deserve the attention.
Constructive Criticism
Yes, I find constructive criticism valuable. However, critics are rarely motivated to help you. They typically have the desire to tear you down to their level. If they cannot have success, they do not want you to succeed either. Giving them attention just feeds their appetite to be critics.
Representation
One person is not representative of your entire audience. It is so easy for us to get derailed by a negative comment. We can receive 40 compliments. Then, one negative e-mail will completely destroy our confidence. Remember, one e-mail only equals one e-mail. It is one person.
Self Doubt
We all fight the impostor syndrome. Am I good enough? Will anyone take me seriously? Who am I to be an expert on this topic? It is common to battle that everyday.
Critics just feed that syndrome. You already have enough self doubt. There is no need to allow critics to feed that fire. Beat them down. Ignore them.
Your Target
Critics will never be your target audience. If you are selling an idea or product, critics will never be the group that buys what you are selling. No matter how hard you try to convince the critic that you are correct, they will always be skeptical. You are wasting your time on the critic. Focus on the people that love what you do.
Jeff Walker addresses this topic in his new book “Launch”. He says, “All of us have people we want to connect with better than others … The last thing you want is a lot of prospects and clients who aren’t a good fit for you … You want to be sure you attract YOUR people into your business.”
Maybe You Should
On the other hand, maybe you should give your critics some attention. If you have thick skin, giving your critics some attention can strengthen the support of your fans. When you read some negative feedback, you fans will step up to support and defend you.
I am not talking about trying to attract attention to yourself or manipulating your audience. However, if you have a strong, supportive community, you may find them defending you before you even have a chance to mention the critic.
Dave Ramsey does this on his show quite often. He makes it quite entertaining, and it strengthens the support of his tribe.
You really need to have strong self esteem to make this happen. You need to be strong in battling the impostor syndrome to try this approach. If you truly believe in what you do, you can use critics to your advantage.
If you find yourself creeping into self doubt, remove the trolls from your life. Don’t let them bring you down. You are great at what you do. Superserve your fans. Let the critics seep back into the darkness and feed on somebody else.
I’d love to help you with your podcast. E-mail any questions or comments you might have to Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.
You can also find other tools including worksheets, a workbook and videos to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.
Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.
Today, we discuss how you can follow 8 questions to better podcasts.
On the Podcast Review Show the other night, Dave Jackson mentioned he was reviewing his own episode and discovered something he could do to make his show better. I’m a big proponent of show reviews in real time in order to get better. One of my free worksheets at PodcastTalentCoach.com is dedicated to reviewing your show. Here are eight of the questions on that worksheet that can help you improve your podcast.
Pick an episode from a few weeks back. Listen to it in real time. Then…
Ask yourself these questions
Did you accomplish the goals you set for this episode?
How did you make the audience care?
How did you include the listener, making them part of the story?
Where were the “oh wow” moments?
What was memorable about the show?
At what points did you introduce and reset the show/topic?
What stories did you tell?
Where did you use active language? (walking instead of walked, eating, not ate)
How do I get more podcast traffic? I hear that question all of the time. I recently conducted a survey of my subscribers. The question asked most often had something to do with traffic and engagement with their podcast. “How do I get more podcast traffic?”
I knew the subject was a hot topic, because I see discussions everywhere. How many product launches have you seen that promise to teach you how to get more traffic?
In 1962, Time magazine called David Ogilvy “the most sought-after wizard in today’s advertising industry.” David Ogilvy is quoted as saying, “Great marketing only makes a bad product fail faster.” Be careful what you wish for.
First, make your product great. Then, bring people to the party.
Let’s make your content engaging and memorable before we invite your prospects to the show. If you create a unique experience, your engagement will be much more effective when people come to the party.
Let’s discuss how we become unique. Then, let’s discuss a few organic ways to gain some attention.
Create your own style
Don’t try to be somebody else. You are best at being you.
Create you own show structure. There are enough knockoffs.
Highlight your sense of humor.
Tell stories that define your character.
Discuss topics that interest you. Be interesting by being interested.
Remove the clichés
Definition of cliché: a trite, stereotyped expression; a sentence or phrase, usually expressing a popular or common thought or idea, that has lost originality, ingenuity, and impact by long overuse.
If you want to sound unique and original, replace your clichés with something fresh.
When you use the same phrases used by everyone else, you become vanilla.
If you want to be unique, grab a thesaurus and find some new words
Be memorable
What can you do on the show this week that hasn’t been done before?
Listen to Dave Jackson on his 400th episode of “School of Podcasting” where he was hi jacked by the Binky & The Wiz morning show. You won’t hear that on any other show.
Some loved it. Some hated it. Everyone that heard it remembered it.
Removing every flaw and sterilizing your show will not make it memorable.
Be audacious. Be adventuresome. Be creative.
Be boisterous … sometimes.
Be tender other times.
Do it in a way that only you can do it.
Brainstorm until you have something exciting.
Sell The Sizzle
People do not buy products. They buy what the product can do for them.
You don’t go to a restaurant to buy a steak. You go the restaurant, because you’re hungry and want one of your favorite dishes. You want that tender piece of meat that you can cut with a butter knife. The one that will just melt in your mouth, because it is the best steak around. It is cooked perfectly. You are not rushing in there because the cow was corn-fed and aged to perfection. Who cares. Those are attributes, not benefits. Does it taste great? Will it fill me up? Does it remind me of the great family dinners we used to have when I was a kid? I’m in. Those are the benefits.
Sell the sizzle, not the steak.
Now that we have a great product, how to we bring people to the party?
Sure you could buy all of those expensive products or a bunch of Facebook ads. I’m sure they work.
There is an easier way. And, it is free.
Get your name out there by getting involved.
Getting Involved
How many podcasts do you listen to that beg you to get involved with the show? Email us. Leave us a voicemail. Post on our Facebook page. Find us on Twitter. Don’t forget that we have a speakpipe link on the website. Use a carrier pigeon. There are a million ways. Everyone wants engagement.
When you reach out and engage with others, they include you on the show. This does two things.
First, it puts you in front of their audience. That could bring a new audience to your show.
Second, through the Law of Reciprocity, the host of the show may be more inclined to engage with your show. A little thank you gesture. What goes around comes around.
Reciprocity in social psychology refers to responding to a positive action with another positive action, rewarding kind actions. When you do something nice for someone, they feel inclined to do something nice for you in return.
Gary Vaynerchuk spends an great deal of time discussing this in his book “Crush It”. It is a great book that I highly recommend.
Gary basically says, “Put your stuff out there. Then, go engage with everyone else.” Be seen. Meet people where THEY live.
Then, be patient.
You won’t get 100,000 listeners immediately. Grow slowly. Adjust and get it right as you progress. Build the foundation.
As Gary says, “do it again, and again, and again, and again.” Keep engaging. They will come. It only takes your time.
Schedule 30 minutes a day to interact with your audience where they are. You will eventually build the traffic you desire.
Get more podcast traffic, but first be unique.
Create your own style
Remove the clichés
Be memorable
Sell the sizzle
Get involved
I’d love to help you with your podcast. E-mail any questions or comments you might have to Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.
Are you like me? There are times when I find it difficult to find the motivation to take myself to the studio and create a great show. Sometimes it is so much easier to stay on the couch and watch some television.
Just like an athlete, we sometimes just need to find a way to get fired up.
This week, I received this e-mail.
I have a podcast about fly fishing that has pod faded. Because I am a fly fisher I thought such a podcast would be ideal. But, it became so much work from pre-production, to post-production, to hitting the publish button on iTunes, that I stopped after 10 months.
I enjoyed interviewing the people on the podcast and the preparation, but quickly grew tired of all the other work it took to publish. 4-6 hours for a 1 hour podcast.
My current challenge is that I enjoy doing several recreational things, but I am not “passionate” about any of them. I just enjoy doing them.
Also, I did not have a product or service to sell and still do not. Since this is not a hobby for me, I want to make a good income from this.
I have purchased your book for my Kindle and am reading it now. I am considering consulting with you for an hour or two to move things along faster.
Right now I am re-grouping and figuring out what to do next and your podcast is a great help.
Thanks again for a great podcast.
Name Withheld
There are a few issues within this e-mail.
How do we find the motivation to fight through the blahs and record consistently?
How can we streamline our workflow to make better use of our time?
How can we do more of what we love and less of what we dislike?
How can we generate some income?
Motivation
Like most podcasters, I sometimes fight the blahs. Are you like me? Do you have those days where you could record for hours on end when you have the drive and you’re fired up?
Then, I experience those other days where I just cannot find the motivation to get into the studio. I feel alone. I wonder if anyone is actually listening.
There are a few ways to find the motivation.
Tips:
Find the time of day and day of the week that gives you the most energy.
Be consistent with the day and time of the week you record – schedule yourself.
Record a few episodes in one sitting to batch similar functions.
Always work a week or two ahead to ease the pressure to produce.
Have a back up episode in the can in case life happens.
Streamline the workflow
Tips:
Record a few episodes at one sitting. Setting up the gear takes time. Logging in, gathering material, getting to the studio, getting in the right frame of mind all takes time. You can perform the tasks once for multiple episodes when you put it all into one sitting. You could conduct one recording session per month for 6 hours and be done.
Minimize your editing by relaxing on the perfectionism.
Find the areas that eat up a lot of your time and remove or condense them.
Do What You Love
If you hate editing or creating show notes or posting the episode, farm it out. Use virtual assistants or production assistants. Make it easy on yourself.
Much of this costs money, so …
Generate Income
What do fly fishers need?
Find something that is easy for you to create. Develop your product funnel. In this case, it could be location guides, gear guide, gear reseller, instruction tutorials, tours, travel coordinator, make your own flies.
Build different tiers for the funnel.
Michael Hyatt & Dan Miller did an interview about making $150,000 a year from your platform. Doing a podcast for 10 months creates a solid base. There is surely something in that niche that could be monetized. It simply needs to be uncovered.
This week:
Find the motivation to fight through the blahs & record consistently
Streamline the workflow
Do what you love
Build your funnel and begin to generate income
I’d love to help you with your podcast. E-mail any questions or comments you might have to Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.
You can also find tools to help you create great content at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com.
Let’s turn your information into engaging entertainment.
Have you noticed a lot of the business interview podcasts sound the same? We are hearing the same guests answer the same questions time and time again. How do you become unique in this sea of sameness?
Storytelling transforms your podcast.
People do business with people they know, like and trust. Stories help you develop that knowledge, likability and trust.
Your stories define you and will touch many more people than typical information. The stories you tell and the details you include reveal many things about you. That begins to develop that like and trust.
It can be a bit scary to reveal things about yourself on your podcast. Develop the ability to recognize your unique thoughts and the courage to reveal them on your show.
Two radio coaches have influenced me greatly over the years. They each have similar views on storytelling.
Radio consultant Randy Lane says use stories to “make it human by making it humorous, compelling or tragic”.
Radio talent coach Bill McMahon suggests you decide what you hope to make your audience “Laugh at, marvel at or better understand.”
How do you want your audience to feel after hearing your story? Frame that feeling in your engaging introduction. Decide what you hope to reveal about yourself with the story.
Stories help you connect, motivate and inspire.
There are four parts to the storytelling structure.
Engaging introduction
This pulls your listener right into the story. Your introduction should tell your listener exactly where the story is headed.
Vivid details
How will your emotion be revealed in the story? Use vivid details to make your story come to life in the theater of the mind.
Powerful conclusion
Wrap up the story by reframing of your engaging introduction.
What else?
Asking “What Else” will transform your show. Don’t let the story simply end and fade away. Turn it into something powerful.
Many treat a subject in a similar manner. That is why we hear the same style of interview. If you want to stand out and be different, transform you content by using your unique style.
“What Else” can we do with a compelling story? You could create a video, continue the conversation on social media, follow up with listener input in the following episode or various other things. Let your story lead to something bigger.
Ask “what else can we do” and see where it leads.
Storytelling transforms your podcast.
A few housekeeping notes this week.
Coupon code ends this week!
Get a one-hour coaching session with Dave Jackson and me for only $50 if you act before June 30, 2014.
Dave and I are now hosting the Podcast Review Show together. Our guests appear on the show to have their podcast reviewed by the two of us.
Typically, hiring the two of us individually for an hour would be hundreds of dollars. Not only do you get an hour of consulting from us on this show, you get to plug your show for a sixty minutes.
Our guests typically pay $99 to be featured on the show. Dave and I have decided to cut you a break. By using the code “coach50”, you can appear on the show for only $50.
You get half off. Still an hour. Still feedback from both of us. Still plugging your show. Half the price.
The code is “coach50”. This deal ends June 30, 2014. Get in on it now before we close it.
If you are truly serious about building your podcast, improving your show and increasing your traffic, you should also be attending the Podcast Movement in Dallas on August 16 & 17.
Find my affiliate link online at PodcastTalentCoach.com. We are only 8 weeks away from the Podcast Movement. Register today.
I’d love to help you with your podcast. E-mail any questions or comments you might have to Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.
Let’s help you determine where to begin podcasting.
I recently had lunch with the guys from the “200churches” podcast. Jeff Keady and Jonny Craig are pastors at a 200church in Northwest, Iowa. They want to encourage and support other pastors of “smaller” churches.
As we were having lunch, Jeff was telling me about their start in podcasting. They had all of the equipment and were ready to roll. As they were about to record their very first episode, Jeff said he didn’t know where to start. What was the first thing he was supposed to say? How do you figure out where to begin podcasting?
Where to begin is a natural problem. You know what you want to say. You simply don’t know where to start it all. How far back to the beginning of your message should you go?
You have all the equipment. You have set up the technical details of the podcast. How does the show content begin?
Whether you are a brand new podcaster, or someone with hundreds of episodes under your belt, this episode will help you with your content. If you are just beginning, this will help you create your framework. We will walk through content preparation as you lay out the show.
If you are an “old pro”, this content will be a great refresher to help you step back and evaluate your progress. When we have done something for a long time, assumptions begin to creep into the content. We sometimes take small details for granted as if our listener has been with the show from the beginning.
There are six steps to defining your content and preparing your podcast. These six steps will help you determine where to begin podcasting.
1. What do you hope to accomplish?
This includes both the topic and the show overall. Set a goal for each topic, the episode and your podcast in general.
2. What are the interesting topics you hope to address on this particular episode?
As you determine your topics, look for a theme to develop.
3. How will you treat each specific topic you hope to address?
What will you do with the content? You could answer the question, demonstrate the answer, play some audio, show charts to support your answer, or use some other treatment. Find a way to make it your own. Your approach should be unique to you.
4. Create an outline for the flow of the show topics.
This is important for the show introduction. Bullet points should suffice. Do not script your content.
5. What supporting information will you need for the show?
Organize and highlight for easy access during the show. This will help you sound prepared as you begin to build credibility with your audience.
6. Write your introduction. Write your conclusion. Include your call to action.
If you would like a worksheet to walk you through this process and others, visit the worksheet section at www.PodcastTalentCoach.com. These worksheets will further help you determine where to begin podcasting.
I’d love to help you with your podcast. E-mail any questions or comments you might have to Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.
I was listening to an interview CD that accompanies each issue of Success magazine. Publisher Darren Hardy was talking with Founder and President of Piranha Marketing, Inc. Joe Polish. During that interview, Mr. Polish proclaimed great marketing makes selling easy and unnecessary. It makes your call to action powerful.
Selling is Easy
You may not be selling in the traditional sense of products or services in exchange for money. However, you are making a call-to-action within your podcast. It may be selling for money. It may also be inviting your listener to come again, asking him to visit your website, requesting that she join your mailing list, inspiring him to get involved with a cause or any other action. It all involves selling yourself.
Polish’s statement was bold. As he went on to explain himself, Polish made perfect sense. In fact, his comments were very similar to the marketing and branding information we’ve been discussing with regard to your podcast.
We have discussed the call-to-action in previous episodes of Podcast Talent Coach. We simply need to determine what we hope to accomplish with our podcast episode before we begin recording.
In summary, Polish said great marketing gets people properly positioned, so they are pre-interested, pre-motivated, pre-qualified, and predisposed to do business with you (or act on your call-to-action). Great marketing therefore makes selling easy and unnecessarily.
If you have truly engaged your listener and created that strong relationship we’ve been discussing, the selling should take care of itself. Selling becomes difficult when you are trying to get your listener interested. Selling before your listener is motivated is a challenge. Trying to sell to a listener that isn’t qualified is hard work. If your listener isn’t predisposed to taking action, you will need to sell hard.
Building relationships with your podcast involves telling great stories. Revealing things about yourself through stories makes you real. Your listeners get to know and like you. As you continue to help them over time, you build the trust they seek.
When you have taken the time to build the relationship, your listener will be pre-interested, pre-motivated, pre-qualified, and predisposed to do business with you. They will be ready to buy. Selling, in terms of convincing your listener to buy, will be unnecessary. Your marketing and engaging relationship will have them ready for your call-to-action.
Do the hard work up front to make selling easy.
Shouting Will Not Help You
You can’t shout your way into a person’s trust circle. They only way to gain trust is to add value. Give them something they can use. Building trust is the foundation of revenue generation for your podcast.
As you build trusting relationships with your podcast, continue to ask yourself, “How am I helping my listener?” Continue to give, and the trust will develop over time.
When you begin every discussion with your product, needs or wants, people will tune you out. You will begin to sound (and be treated) like advertisements for used cars. Shouting doesn’t work. Your listener won’t care and will rarely return.
Serve first, many times over. Then and only then can you effectively sell.
Shows like the “Dave Ramsey Show”, “48 Days To The Work You Love” and “Smart Passive Income” are all designed to help their listeners first. Sure, they all have products to sell as the end result. However, they never begin with their product. The discussions on these shows always begin with the listener’s needs in mind first.
As you prepare for your show, find great ways to help. Your help may come in the form of entertainment. You may serve as companionship for your podcast listener. Help them find other forms of companionship as well. If your podcast is only one hour per week, there are 167 more hours in the week that aren’t occupied by your show. Your listeners will surely need more companionship to fill a few of those hours. Help your audience fill those hours, too.
Are you building trust, or are you shouting?
Ask For The Sale
After you’ve done the hard work building the relationship, don’t forget to ask for the sale.
One afternoon last week, I stopped by the quickie mart to get something to drink. As I waited in line at the cash register, the gentlemen in front of me set his purchase on the counter.
Among his items was a 2-liter bottle of soda. The bottle of soda was $1.69. The clerk said, “Did you know these are on sale two for $2? You can grab another and save yourself some money.”
The customers responds with, “Looks like I need to grab another bottle.”
By simply asking for the sale, the clerk doubled the purchase. The customer also benefitted by saving some money.
In fact, everyone wins in this transaction. The store is paying the clerk an hourly wage whether he sells one bottle of soda or 100. The cost of the clerk’s time to the store remains constant. Wages are the biggest expense to the store when figuring cost of goods sold. Therefore, by adding another bottle of soda to the purchase, even at the lower price, the store makes more money also.
It all happened because the clerk asked for the sale.
This week, review your show to ensure you are building those relationships.
• Start with the listener instead of your product or service
• Determine how you are going to help your listener with this episode
• Put a strong call-to-action at the end of the episode
Let’s Work Together
I would love to help you with your podcast. If you would like to improve your content, call-to-action and business, I have a few openings for coaching clients.
You need to be serious about making some money with your podcast. It may not be millions. However, you need to have the desire to make a little money.
We will work together to build a customized plan for you, your show and your business.
We have to date before we can get serious, right?
I’m offering a complimentary coaching call to a few candidates who are serious about their improvement. We need to see if we are a good fit for each other.
There will be no high pressure sales pitch. We can review your show to see if we work well together. If it clicks, we can lay out a coaching plan for you. If the call is not all you had hoped, no harm. We’ll just continue on as friends.
There is only room for a few. My calendar simply will not allow me to coach everyone.
If you are interested … and serious … e-mail me at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com. We can get the conversation started.
This week, we revisit my most popular episode. This episode has been downloaded almost twice as many times as any other episode I have released.
Maybe you missed it. Maybe you caught it and this will be a great refresher. Either way, I have received great feedback on the content and I am sure you will enjoy it.
On this episode, we discuss how to turn you, your content and your podcast into a brand. How do you create that powerful podcast brand to stand out amongst the sea of podcasts that are available online?
Get a one-hour coaching session with Dave Jackson and me for only $50 if you act before June 30, 2014.
Dave and I are now hosting the Podcast Review Show together. Our guests appear on the show to have their podcast reviewed by the two of us.
Typically, hiring the two of us individually for an hour would be hundreds of dollars. Not only do you get an hour of consulting from us on this show, you get to plug your show for a sixty minutes.
Our guests typically pay $99 to be featured on the show. I’ve convinced Dave to cut you a break. By using the code “coach50”, you can appear on the show for only $50.
You get half off. Still an hour. Still feedback from both of us. Still plugging your show. Half the price.
The code is “coach50”. This deal ends June 30, 2014. Get in on it now before we close it.
If you are truly serious about building your podcast, improving your show and increasing your traffic, you should also be attending the Podcast Movement in Dallas on August 16 & 17.
Find my affiliate link online at PodcastTalentCoach.com. We are only 10 weeks away from the Podcast Movement. Register today.
I’d love to help you with your podcast. E-mail any questions or comments you might have to Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.
Zig Ziglar used great stories in every point he made. He was a wonderful storyteller.
Dave Jackson and I spoke with the Contractor’s Secret Weapon podcast this week on the Podcast Review Show. They hosts told a great story about earning the #1 spot on Google. The story really helped solidify their points.
You don’t need to include constant stories in your podcast. You only need a few memorable stories to make your podcast stronger.
6 ways stories make your podcast powerful.
Transport your listener to other places using stories
Visual words
Theater of the mind
Would I enjoy taking a one-hour car ride with this person every week?
Develop friendships
Like a one-on-one conversation in a car
Do I know the host by listening to the show?
Reveal things about yourself
People get to know and like you
Stories define your character
People begin to trust you
Let others live vicariously through your stories
They can enjoy your journeys without the risk
May be the reason there are so many entrepreneur podcasts
Stories make you human
Humorous, compelling or tragic
Laugh, marvel, sympathize
Put yourself on the same level as your listener
There are worksheets available on the Podcast Talent Coach website that will help you develop your stories. These worksheets are free. The Show Prep and Topic Development worksheets will be most helpful with your stories.
You can receive further help walking through the worksheets by getting the Podcast Talent Coach Workbook. It is available in paperback HERE and on the Kindle HERE.
To discuss my personalized, one-on-one coaching, you can reach me at Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.
If you are truly serious about building your podcast, improving your show and increasing your traffic, you should also be attending the Podcast Movement in Dallas on August 16 & 17. Find my affiliate link online at PodcastTalentCoach.com. Prices increase by $40 on June 1. Act now!
I’d love to help you with your podcast. E-mail any questions or comments you might have to Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.
Have you noticed all of the interview shows popping up lately?
It seems everyone wants to have an interview podcast. Many simply copy the other successful interview podcasts and hope to stand out. How can you be different while being the same?
Jared Easley and I were talking the other day. He publishes the wonderful podcast “Starve The Doubts”. We were discussing his approach to make his interview show stand out amongst the sea of sameness.
Jared creates a unique approach to the interview show in a couple different ways. First, he not only has a guest to interview on his show, he also has a guest interviewer join him to ask the questions. This gives the show an extra dimension. The questions on every interview have a little different perspective.
Second, Jared asks unique questions. He opens every show asking about the guests favorite concert. He then sprinkles in “would you rather” and “fill in the blank” questions. Jared does his homework on every guest to create questions that are well-informed.
These two steps help to create a unique interview experience and overall solid, memorable podcast.
Be Memorable
If you want to keep your listener coming back show after show, you need to make them remember to come back. You need to remain top-of-mind for your listener. That is the purpose of audience engagement. Make your listener remember you for something specific about your show.
As you build your show, make it about one thing. Find one particular thing that will be remembered. If you try to be all things to all people, you will water down the show. Everything will be nice. However, isn’t usually truly memorable. You will get lost in the millions of messages your listener receives on a daily basis.
Find one point that you can make amazing. Take it over the top. Make it the “goodbye” scene in “Titanic”. Make it the “I am your father” scene in “Empire Strikes Back” between Luke Skywalker and Darth Vader. Your particular point could be the point where you assure your caller that everything will be ok. It could be the fantastic story of your brush with celebrity. It is your show. Find the magic.
Stir emotion. Make it amazing. Bring your listener back. Be memorable.
Do They Remember?
When you consider the entertainment options podcast listeners have, the importance of creating a powerful brand really becomes apparent.
I searched iTunes for podcasts about hockey. There are hundreds of hockey podcasts available. Thousands and thousands of episodes exist that deal with hockey. You can find various topics, including drills, NHL teams, coaching, fantasy hockey and many more.
How do you stand out? How do you get noticed?
Your listener needs to remember your podcast, so they can return and listen again. That is the way to build a following. It really doesn’t matter how many people listen today. What builds a strong podcast is the number of listeners that come back the next time, and the next time, and the time after that. You build your audience slowly with more listeners this week than you had last week. Get your listener to remember to return.
Using your brand to create strong relationships with your listeners is critical to the health of your podcast. If you are bland, you will get lost in the sea of average. There are over 100,000 podcasts available for consumption. Most of them are average or worse. If you refine your content, turn your information into entertainment, and transform your podcast into powerful relationships, you will easily stand out from the crowd. It is a must not only for your success, but your mere survival. Begin your brand today.
The Memorable Podcast Brand Uses Cows
The unexpected is amusing, delightful and memorable. Being direct assumes your listener cares about your marketing message. They don’t. Your listener cares about his or her needs, wants and desires. Attract their attention by doing the unexpected.
To engage your podcast listener and create a relationship, you need to be memorable. In order to be memorable, you must be unique. Be distinct, unusual, and unexpected. If you sound like every other show, you will not stand out and get noticed.
Chick-fil-a could have easily become another fast food restaurant lost in the sea of mediocrity. Founder Truett Cathy wouldn’t let that happen. The company pays great attention to the details and does the unexpected at every turn.
The Chick-fil-a mission statement is, “Be America’s Best Quick-Service Restaurant.” Sure, every fast food joint wants to be the best. Few are willing to put in the work.
One Saturday, we were on a road trip. We were passing through Des Moines, IA at 8:45p as we pulled into the mall to grab a quick bite. We found out the mall closed at 9p. As you can imagine, most restaurants in the food court were cleaning up. We were one of two parties there to eat.
We stepped up to the Chick-fil-a counter and apologized for cutting it so close and causing them extra work. The gentleman behind the counter assured us it was no trouble at all. We received our (fresh) food quickly and grabbed a table in the middle of the food court.
About five minutes later, the Chick-fil-a employee came to our food court table to make sure everything was alright. This was a mall food court. Few fast food restaurants ever check on you in their own establishment. You especially do not receive this sort of attention 10 minutes before closing.
That level of service is the norm at Chick-fil-a. They always take the extra step to surprise and stand out. It is carried through to the careers they offer, the scholarships they provide to their employees and the process of accepting partners and franchisees.
The company uses cows in their commercials to promote chicken sandwiches. The Chick-fil-a website even has a special section devoted to the cows. When a cow parachutes into a football game promoting chicken sandwiches, it us unexpected. Chick-fil-a is memorable.
If you can create unique, memorable experiences for your listener by incorporating the unexpected, you begin to create powerful, meaningful relationships.
Are you using your own cows in your podcast?
The Memorable Podcast Brand Swings For The Fence
Rather than being consistently good with your podcast, be occasionally great.
Your listener will remember one big thing from your show. They will not remember every detail, every comment or every e-mail answer. They will remember that one thing you did. Each show, try to make one big splash that will be memorable.
Swing for the fence.
Many know the great Babe Ruth as one of the greatest home run hitters in baseball. Many also know that Ruth struck out roughly twice as often as the league average. He struck out 1,330 times.
Babe set out to do something exciting. We wanted to be memorable. Sometimes, that meant striking out.
People don’t remember all of the singles Babe hit. Even though he is 2nd all-time with his on-base percentage of .474, nobody talks about all the times Ruth got on base. He had 1,517 singles and 506 doubles to his 714 home runs. That is nearly twice as many singles as homers. Doubles and home runs were just about equal.
Why do people remember all of the home runs? Because they were exciting. Babe was occasionally great. He was great often enough to be memorable.
You don’t have to set records. Simply make your podcast occasionally great. Nobody remembers your strikeouts. Don’t worry about them. When you finally hit the home run, people will remember.
Every now and then, swing for the fence
Risky Stands Out For The Memorable Podcast Brand
As we develop meaningful relationships with your podcast, we in turn build credibility that will support our call-to-action within your show. To develop strong relationships, you need to create engaging entertainment that will get you remembered by your listener. To be remembered, you must stand out.
You stand out when you are loved. You are remembered when you are hated. You fade into the background when you are plain, vanilla and trying to not upset anyone. If you don’t stir strong emotions, you are easily forgotten.
When we create, we expose our perspective. We open ourselves to criticism. It is natural to want your thoughts, views, art and creation to be accepted by everyone. To avoid being disappointed, we often play it safe.
Those fantastic, memorable personalities are usually both loved and hated. Rush Limbaugh is loved by the conservatives and hated by the liberals. Dave Ramsey is loved by the conservative investor and hated by credit card companies and whole life insurance salespeople. Dr. Laura Schlessinger would consistently be critical of her callers. Yet she would receive more callers than she could handle on any given show.
Safety lacks creativity. It is risky to be truly creative. However, that is really the only way to get noticed. Safe blends in. Risky stands out.
Create that memorable podcast brand to keep your listener coming back show after show. Remain top-of-mind for your listener. Make them remember to come back next week.
I’d love to help you with your podcast. E-mail any questions or comments you might have to Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.
If you listen to online business podcasts, you’ve surely heard the business funnel discussed. Online marketers move a large group of people into the big end of the funnel. As the price increases, the funnel gets smaller indicating fewer people buying.
Similar to the business funnel, we want to move our listeners through a show funnel. We want to engage our listeners, hook them by piquing their interest, and finally moving them through our content.
The size of the listener pool gets smaller as the group moves through the funnel. Many people will see our headline. A portion of those people will move further to read the description. An even smaller group will continue to move through the funnel by beginning to listen to the show. A subset of that group will actually get to the end of the episode.
How can we move our listeners through the episode more efficiently? How can we get more of our listeners to reach the end of the episode?
In this episode, we discuss five tips to help you with your engaging content and the listener progression through your funnel.
1. Develop A Goal For Your Show
As you develop your podcast, you need to determine what you hope to accomplish with the show. What will the show be about? What do you hope to make your audience feel? Is there some call to action you wish to make your listener take?
After you have developed the goal for your show, stick to it. All content on your show should support your goal.
If your goal is to help consumers get out of debt, don’t spend a lot of time discussing your favorite, new CD. Your listener has come to your show expecting you to deliver on your promise. If you tell her you help people get out of debt, deliver that content to her. When you start discussing anything other than that, your brand promise is tarnished. She will be headed elsewhere.
In his “My Disney Podcast”, Correy Webb discusses all things Disney. He discusses his cruise adventures, visits to the parks and other traveling tips. If Correy suddenly began discussing the poker game he had with his buddies last weekend, you would be disappointed. Poker isn’t the reason you’re listening. His Disney promise would be broken.
A great brand is built slowly with great consistency. Deliver on your brand’s promise. However, before you can deliver, you need to develop a goal for your show.
2. Prepare For Your Show
Before you begin to record your show, you should spend just as much time preparing for the show. It is very similar to mapping out a trip. You not only need to know where you are going, you need to know how to get there.
Many hosts will have an idea of which topics they hope to address on the show. They may have a few e-mail questions to answer or a current event to discuss. That is where most quit. They think, “Well, I have our ideas. Let’s do this.” They then begin recording.
This is a big mistake. You must plan what you hope to do with each topic. How do you hope to answer the questions? What will your opinion be on the current event. Most importantly, how will you present it to your listener.
If you plan to answer an e-mail question only because you think it is a good question, but you do not plan out your answer, you will wade through the answer. It will take you much more time to answer the question than is necessary. Your show will therefore lack momentum. Your listener will become easily bored. When you stumble your way through your answer unprepared, your listener will wonder if you actually now where you are going.
Before you open the mic, plan out your show. Jot down some notes. Write down the few important points you need to mention as you’re answering the question. Then, make sure you stick to your plan.
Dan Miller does a wonderful job of this in his podcast “48 Days to The Work You Love”. He knows exactly which questions he wants to answer in his show. He knows exactly how he wants to answer them. He also has a few solid examples for each answer. Dan tends to over-promise at the beginning of the show with the questions he hopes to answer. He should either stick to a time limit for each answer, or promise fewer with the potential of a few “bonus” answers at the end if time permits.
Give your show more momentum and energy. It will happen when you prepare for your show.
3. Tease Me
Anticipation is a key feature to storytelling. Your story should build just like a good plot builds in a movie. You need to make your audience anticipate the content that is on the way. It is like a vacation you are planning to take. The fantastic anticipation for the trip is almost as pleasurable as the trip itself. You can’t wait for the trip to arrive. You want your listener to feel the same way about your content. When they can’t wait for the story to arrive, you have created some great content.
Teasing is the art of creating anticipation for your audience to entice them to stick around for the payoff to your setup. It is a critical element of your show. Teasing helps create momentum for your podcast.
When you promote parts of the show that are coming up, you must creatively tease your audience. You must give them a reason to stick around. It isn’t enough to simply say, “A great story about this weekend is coming up.” Few will stick around for the payoff. Tease. Create anticipation. Instead, use something like, “You’re never gonna believe what I found in the attic this past weekend.”
The evening news does a wonderful job at teasing. Create anticipation. Tease me.
4. Create A Power Intro
The opening of your podcast should explain the purpose of your podcast and let your listeners know exactly what to expect as if this is the first time they have ever heard the show.
A well-crafted introduction serves two purposes.
First, it tells the brand new listener who is hearing the show for the very first time exactly what to expect from the show. It is like the intro to a late night talk show. “From New York. It’s the Late Show with David Letterman. Tonight, Tom Cruise. Larry The Cable Guy. And Katy Perry. Letters from the mail bag. Tonight’s Top Ten list. And Paul Shaffer and the CBS Orchestra. And now, former New York City Medical Examiner … David Letterman.” You know exactly what is coming your way, even if you have never seen the show before.
Second, those that have heard the show before are confident that they are in the right place. Those regular listeners will find comfort in the opening of the show they hear each time they tune in. Fans will also feel like they are “in the know”. This is similar to singing the theme song of your favorite sitcom. As soon as you hear the first few notes of the theme song, you know you’re on the right channel. Your show intro should elicit the same response.
As you create your show open, treat it as if every listener is saying, “Hey, I’m new here. What’s going on?” You’ll make everyone comfortable as the show begins.
5. Make Your Listener The Star
Make your listener the star. It is your show. You know where it is going. When listeners are involved in your show, it is always your job to lead your guest and make them the star.
There are many ways to incorporate your listeners into your show. Live interviews, live calls, recorded voicemail messages, and e-mail are a few of the possibilities. Incorporating listeners into the show gives your entire audience a vested interest in the show.
With guests, you must remember you always know more about your show than they know. You know the goals of your show. You know the plot and strategy. You are always on the show. They are new. Lead your guest.
Phrases like “great question”, “I’m glad you mentioned that” and “I didn’t realize that” make your guest feel they are adding to the show … as long as you are authentic in your comments.
Financial guru and radio host Dave Ramsey is great at guiding his listeners. When a caller begins to ramble on, he will always step in with, “How can I best help you today?” That is a great way to say, “Get to the point.” You need to remember that your callers are not professional. They are not sure how to adequately edit their question while still providing all of the necessary elements.
Just as you do not need to answer every e-mail you receive on your show, you do not need to read the entire e-mail. When you are using voicemail and e-mail questions, edit them before you use them. Keep the essence of the question while eliminating the unnecessary details. Nobody will fault you for editing a 4 minute voicemail message to a great 30 seconds. They will probably thank you. The edited call is still the call as long as you aren’t changing their words. Your show is entertainment. Edit it as such.
When interviewing a well-known guest, make it easy for them. Open with great questions for which you already know the answer. Talk hosts like Jay Leno and David Letterman have producers that do a pre-interview with their guests. They will ask the guest, “If Jay asks you about ____, what will you say?” The producer then puts the great questions on the blue cards for the host. Jay may not know the answer, but the guest knows the question is coming.
If you know your guest has done some amazing things, ask them about it. Then, let them answer. I hear so many hosts interview guests as if they are trying to show the guest how much they actually know. In turn, they answer the question as they are asking it. This leaves the guest very little to say.
You and your show become great when you make your guests and listeners the star.
Using these five tips will help you refine your content and give it focus. This will help you move your listener through your show funnel. Develop a clear goal, prepare for the episode, tease your listener, write a power intro and make your listener a star. You will be well on your way to transforming your show.
A few housekeeping notes for you.
Dave Jackson and I are now hosting the Podcast Review Show together. Our guests appear on the show to have their podcast reviewed by the two of us. Typically, hiring the two of us individually for an hour would be hundreds of dollars. Not only do you get an hour of consulting from us on this show, you get to plug your show for a sixty minutes.
Our guests typically pay $99 to be featured on the show. I’ve convinced Dave to cut you a break. By using the code coach50, you can appear on the show for only $49.50. You get half off. Still an hour. Still feedback from both of us. Still plugging your show. Half the price.
The code is coach50.
Now, we cannot possibly review everyone. Once we fill the available slots, this deal will go away. We have already had a great response. Just a few openings remain. If you are serious about your improvement and would like to be on the show, get registered today.
We have not made anyone cry yet. At half price, it surely cannot hurt that much. Just use coach50 when you register.
If you are truly serious about building your podcast, improving your show and increasing your traffic, you should also be attending the Podcast Movement in Dallas on August 16 & 17. Find my affiliate link online at PodcastTalentCoach.com.
I’d love to help you with your podcast. E-mail any questions or comments you might have to Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.
There is a big difference between marketing to men and marketing to women. The book “Men Are From Mars, Women Are From Venus” by John Gray, Ph. D. discussed in great detail the communication and relationship differences between men and women. These differences are critical in marketing. They are also important elements to your podcast strategy.
I’ll be speaking at the Podcast Movement in Dallas August 16th & 17th. My affiliate link is online at PodcastTalentCoach.com. I will be doing a session on this very topic showing you how to make use of these marketing tactics in your podcast.
Today, we are going to cover five major differences you need to consider when marketing to the different genders. Keep these differences in mind when you are shaping your podcast content.
Please understand that I am speaking in generalities. I understand these statements won’t hold true for every person. These points are are simply how most men and women react in common situations. The definition of stereotype is “a simplified and standardized conception or image invested with special meaning and held in common by members of a group” There are times when the stereotypical case will not hold true for a specific situation. Most of the time, this is the case.
THINKING
In a broad sense, men tend to think very linearly. Women usually think very spatially. To be effective communicating with each gender, you must understand these differences. You must also select one to target. The same message will have difficulty reaching both genders effectively.
PROBLEM SOLVING
Men and women also take different approaches in the way they solve the problems. Because men think linearly, men focus on the solution. Men try to determine what steps are needed to reach a successful outcome. If a man is in need of a new car, he will find the solution step by step. A man will review his options, compare the features, determine the best buy for the money that will do the job, and make the purchase. Men typically move through a problem step-by-step. If the steps are all completed successfully, he buys the vehicle.
Because women tend to think globally, they are typically concerned with the way their relationships are affected by problems and the possible solutions. A woman tends to consider how each person in her close circle is affected by each possible solution. If she is in need of a new car, she will typically consider her needs and those of her family. Will her kids be safe? Is there enough room for everyone? Will the features please her family? Are there entertainment features available to keep her kids occupied on trips? She will also consider how her friends will view the purchase and if she is being treated right by the salesperson. If the relationships all benefit from the purchase, she buys the vehicle.
You can see evidence of this difference in the way auto makers market to the different genders. Minivans aimed toward women will play up the features for the entire family. The commercial will depict the envy of the neighbors. The storyline may even show mom juggling soccer practice, shopping, carpooling and work. These commercials tend to be very spatial in nature and focused on relationships.
Commercials for trucks that are targeted toward men will usually tout the problem solving ability of the truck. The script will play up the horsepower, torque and hauling capacity of the truck. The commercial will usually show the truck pulling some ridiculously heavy load, like trees or ships or something. Men will be convinced they can get the job done with this particular truck. The steps are very linear.
When handling tasks, men tend to be single-minded and focused on one goal, while women usually multitask well. This difference probably began with the cavemen. Each had well-defined duties in the household back in the cave.
Cavemen would set out to find dinner and bring it home. He had one task with one goal. Women handled the entire household doing many things at one time. Men needed to be very focused to find dinner without being eaten by a tiger. Women needed to multitask in order to tend to the house (or cave), handle the children and keep the family in line all at the same time.
You can see this difference in society today. When men are watching television, they watch television. When men attend a sporting event, they watch the event. Men are typically focused on the thing they are doing. This is usually true even if they are doing it with friends.
Women, on the other hand, typically have the ability to multitask very well. Women can be cooking 3 different dishes for dinner, talking on the phone, and keeping an eye on the evening news all while being fully aware of what the children are doing in the other room. Women multitask in a way that astonishes men. Men cannot understand why women spend an entire baseball game talking with the people around her rather than watching the game. Men are there to watch the game. Women attend because it is a way to socialize and strengthen her relationships. She enjoys the game for much different reasons.
The tendency to focus on one task or many creates another interesting difference between men and women. Because they tend to multitask and focus on multiple items simultaneously, women do not seem to tire of activities as quickly as men. When men focus on one thing only, they will become bored with that particular item before a woman. Men will want to move on to the next thing. Therefore, men tend to like new and different. They tend to appreciate change more than women. Women will tolerate repetition much more than men, because they are not as focused on one item at a time. It may also take more messages in different ways to effectively reach and influence a woman.
Men and women also differ in the way they remember things and events. Again, men are linear. Women are spatial.
COMMUNICATING
Men typically view communication and problems solving as a way to show their strength and power. Men typically see things as a competition. It is a linear approach. They seek validation by solving problems. When men are communicating with each other, you will often see each attempt to “one-up” the other. You will often hear, “Oh, you think that’s bad. One time something worse happened to me.” Other men do not typically take offense to these comments. These challenges are a way for men to show their power and dominance.
Women use communication and problem solving for much different purposes. Women use both as a way to strengthen the relationship. Women seek understanding when tackling a problem. Rather than seeking validation, women are typically seeking empathy from and an opportunity to bond with their communication partner. You will rarely hear a woman try to “one-up” the person with which they are communicating. However, you will hear, “Oh, that’s terrible. What did you do?”
When I go out to lunch with my buddies, we have a good time. When I get home, my wife will ask me what we talked about. I will tell her, “Nothing really. Sports and politics.” She finds it baffling that we didn’t discuss his son’s birthday or our family vacation. We debate the nuances of professional versus college sports. We might discuss the benefits of one political candidate over another. That’s how men communicate. Men use a friendly challenge to bond. Women tend to see that style as a lack of understanding.
RELATIONSHIPS
Men and women also handle relationship problems differently. Just like problems in any other area of life, men typically seek the solution (linear) while women tend to use problems to strengthen the relationship (spatial). Understand these differences as you build your relationship with your audience.
Let’s take a typical, hypothetical couple. Tina and Adam have been together for 3 years. Their standard Friday night is eating take out and watching TV. Tina says, “Adam, we never go out anymore.” In Tina’s head, she is thinking, “Our relationship needs more ‘us’ time. We don’t spend enough time together having fun.” Adam replies, “Fine, let’s go out tomorrow night.” Adam is thinking, “Done, problem solved.” Tina then gets a little more aggressive with, “That’s not what I mean.” Now Adam is really confused. “You just said we don’t go out enough. Let’s go out tomorrow night. What’s the problem.” Tina says, “I’m not just talking about going out.”
Conversations similar to these fall apart, because men and women approach the problem in much different ways. Women use the conversation to strengthen the relationship. Men use communication to solve the problem. “Going out tomorrow night” means different things to each of them.
MEMORIES
When men remember events, they tend to remember in a linear fashion. They will remember events in sequence as one thing happened, then the next and finally the last. It is a sequential time line. If a man were recalling a party, they would typically begin with the setting and who arrived first. He would walk through the time line of the party. His description might begin with, “Things got going in the kitchen. We moved downstairs and shot some pool. Paul had a bit too much to drink and after he broke the lamp trying to dance, the party came to a halt and everyone headed home.” It is a step-by-step recollection of the events.
Women typically remember events in a very spatial way. They will remember who attended the party. They will remember the great time that was had by everyone. Women will recall some of the great conversations that took place. The memories would possibly include the laughs, the gathering places and the details of the atmosphere. The recollections of women tend to be global in nature.
These differences between men and women will play an important role as you define your target audience. Will your communication be spatial or linear? This is something you’ll need to decide before you can move forward to create the structure and content of your show.
Gender is only one characteristic of your target audience. There are many others to consider. Just as if you were describing one individual person, gender would only be one characteristic of that person.
I’d love to help you with your podcast. E-mail any questions or comments you might have to Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.
This week we discuss how to properly prepare for your podcast, and how to overcome the podcast jitters.
I began my broadcasting career when I was 19. It was completely by accident. I was going to college to get my architecture degree. Since I was 12 I had been tailoring my education to be an architect or engineer.
In college, I had the same fear of public speaking as most people. In our design classes, we had to do presentations in front of a panel of judges. I absolutely hated doing these presentations.
During class, four or five students would present during the hour. It would take about a week to get through the entire class. That was the worst part. The anxiety would build for presentation day only to not get your name called. I would have to live through the anxiety again in anticipation of presenting during the next class.
I never envisioned being a public speaker, radio talent or any other presenter.
My younger brother worked for a radio station at the time. I was home for the weekend doing nothing like most college students. That was when the phone rang. It was the manager of the radio station looking for my brother to fill in during a shift. My brother wasn’t home and I was offered a part-time job.
My career in radio started just running the board for long-form programs. I only talked on the radio between the 30-minute shows. I might give the time or temperature. Otherwise, I would sit around while the show played. Speaking was minimal.
As an elective for my architecture degree, I took a class called “Broadcasting For The Non-Major”. I figured being in a radio station for a part-time job should make this class a little easier. It would also help me learn more about my job.
That class eventually led me to become the music director of the college station.
That position got me a job working overnights at a commercial station. Suddenly, I instantly found myself talking to 10,000 people. I was no longer talking between long-form programs to a handful of old people. This was real radio.
Over time, I started to get comfortable talking on the radio. It took a little time. I eventually got there.
As I started picking up more hours on the air, my boss started to send me out broadcasting live in front of a crowd. I was being sent onstage to introduce concerts in front of 10,000 people. These were no longer people I couldn’t see. They were right in front of me.
It took me years to figure out how to overcome those butterflies I would get each time I stepped in front of a crowd. There were tips and tricks I learned along the way to help me. It was a combination of things I learned over the years that helped me defeat the jitters. In this episode, I would like to show you how to shake the butterflies out of your system. It could save you years of trial and error.
Preparation is the key idea in the process.
Here are four steps to properly prepare for your show.
To Overcome Jitters
– Prepare your material
– Rehearse
– Focus on one person – preferably your single target listener you have defined
Create Great Notes
– Bullet points – don’t script
– Tell stories
– Give examples – play audio
– Determine your open and close, intro and outro for show and each topic … “now it’s time for” is not an appropriate intro
Set the Room
– Get the temp correct – be comfortable
– Get some room temp water
– No distractions – phone, family
Prepare Your Equipment
– Close other programs
– Prepare your software
– Turn off your phone, close e-mail, close IM
– Test your mic and set your levels
– Contact and prepare guests & co-hosts
What other tips do you use to overcome the jitters?
I’ll be speaking at the Podcast Movement 2014. It is a national podcast conference in Dallas Aug 16 & 17. The speaker roster looks amazing. It is only about $135 for the standard ticket before June 1. Get my affiliate link here.
Next week, we will discuss the differences between marketing to men and women. You’ll learn how this will shape your podcast content.
I’d love to help you with your podcast. E-mail any questions or comments you might have to Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.
A few notes before the episode this week. I am speaking at the Podcast Movement in Dallas August 16th and 17th, 2014. It is a national podcast conference that has an amazing roster of presenters and speakers. It is less than $135 (including fees) for the standard ticket before June 1, 2014. I would love to have you join me there using my affiliate link. Get your ticket by clicking the logo in the bottom right corner online at PodcastTalentCoach.com.
Dave Jackson recently invited me to join him on the Podcast Review Show. You can find the show and listen at PodcastReviewShow.com. Each week we invite a podcaster on the show for a critique of the entire business from content to website to revenue opportunities.
Joining a two-person show forced me to review my tips for shows with multiple hosts. How do you maintain the level of quality and professionalism? How do you maintain the focus without running down rabbit holes and getting lost?
Most of these tips apply if you are a solo podcaster or only have guests on your show.
There are five areas to develop for a show with multiple hosts.
Define Each Role
Select your partner carefully
If you are the same, one of you isn’t necessary
What is each expected to bring to the show
Responsibilities During The Show
Who drives
Who sets up topics
Who cues others
Smooth Flow
Develop hand signals to avoid talking over each other
Use chat if can’t see each other
Use names of each host to allow listeners to follow along
Use a show clock so each host knows where the story is headed
Begin stories with your intriguing introduction so your partner can follow
Other Work
Decide who handles other tasks like booking guests & post prod
Equal sound quality
Use similar equipment
Record on separate channels for processing & post prod
If It Ends
Create an agreement before you begin
What happens to the show if someone wants to leave?
Who owns the content if someone leaves?
Who owns the business & clients?
“Oh, it will never happen. We’re married/best friends/brothers.” It happens all the time. Don’t fool yourself.
Plan your show before you begin. If you are already creating content, it is never too late to start. Start planning today.
This week:
1. Define the roles of each member of your show and put it in writing
2. Start using the names of those on the show
3. Create an exit plan for the show if it should end
Next week we will discuss how to prepare for a show. We will review topics like how to get over prelaunch jitters, how to use your notes, and what should be included in your prep outline.
I’d love to help you with your podcast. E-mail any questions or comments you might have to Coach@PodcastTalentCoach.com.
